John Alexander | Popular Science https://www.popsci.com/authors/john-alexander/ Awe-inspiring science reporting, technology news, and DIY projects. Skunks to space robots, primates to climates. That's Popular Science, 145 years strong. Fri, 12 Jan 2024 21:00:00 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.2.2 https://www.popsci.com/uploads/2021/04/28/cropped-PSC3.png?auto=webp&width=32&height=32 John Alexander | Popular Science https://www.popsci.com/authors/john-alexander/ 32 32 The best small dehumidifiers for 2024 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-small-dehumidifiers/ Fri, 12 Jan 2024 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=598055
Four of the best small humidifiers side by side on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Even a small dehumidifier can help solve big problems if you need to reduce excess moisture to promote wellness and protect property.

The post The best small dehumidifiers for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best small humidifiers side by side on a plain white background.
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A Breezome 60Oz. Dehumidifier on a white background. Breezome 60Oz. Dehumidifier
SEE IT

This is a surprisingly powerful and convenient dehumidifier for the price.

Best splurge The Tenergi Sorbi on a plain white background Tenergi Sorbi
SEE IT

This small dehumidifier completes the package and offers built-in air filtration as well.

Best Budget Tabyik's 42oz. Dehumidifier on a plain white background Tabyik 42oz. Dehumidifier
SEE IT

You won’t find a cheaper reliably operational dehumidifier.

While larger dehumidifiers bring the power, intensity, and awe to get a large room under control, for small jobs in cramped spaces, you’ll do much better using small dehumidifiers. These machines can help take the damp edge off a room, generally don’t require piping or tubes to use effectively, and are much quieter than their bigger cousins. And with the benefits of dehumidifiers being so plentiful as to reduce allergens, help with asthma, and even reduce snoring, you deserve to have one in your room even if you don’t have a ton of space. With all that in mind, these are the best small dehumidifiers for any situation.

How we chose the best small dehumidifiers

Our investigation of the best dehumidifiers for basements focused on the power and intensity of the dehumidifier. In other words, our selections were highly skewed toward dehumidifiers that could suck the most moisture out of the air in the quickest, most convenient, most comprehensive manner.

The best small dehumidifiers will also, naturally, have the capacity to suck a decent amount of moisture out of the air. That’s why we want dehumidifiers in the first place. But they’ll also be able to be lived around. This means quiet dehumidifiers that aren’t space hogs will rule the day. Bonus features promoting healthy air, like air filters for allergens, are also highly sought after, so long as an undue price increase doesn’t come alongside them.

The best small dehumidifiers: Reviews & Recommendations

The following dehumidifiers are small dehumidifiers—emphasis on the small. If you want a slightly larger one, check out our more expansive guide to the best dehumidifiers. Likewise, for the biggest, most powerful dehumidifiers, check out the aforementioned guide to dehumidifiers for the basement. But if you’re looking for a dehumidifier for crawl spaces or one that isn’t so large you have to crawl over it, we’ve got you.

Best overall: Breezome 60Oz. Dehumidifier

Breezome

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 6.26 x 8.62 x 11.34 inches
  • Water removal capacity: 750ml per day
  • Drainage: 1800ml reservoir
  • Loudness control: 35dB Sleep Mode

Pros

  • Giant reservoir
  • Has timer and Sleep Mode
  • Includes water nightlight
  • Dual semiconductor technology

Cons

  • Pricier than most small dehumidifiers

Breezome’s dehumidifier has more power and capabilities than nearly any other dehumidifier of its price and size. Plus, it runs consistently well, utilizing dual semiconductor tech to pull more water out of the air despite the unit’s small size. Customers rave about the consistency of the product in small bedrooms.

A perfect sleep companion, the Breezome has a rectangular, boxy shape for stable placement on a bedside table. Its large, 1,800ml reservoir can even be lit up on demand for a liquidy bedside lamp or nightlight. When you’re ready to sleep, you can set the Breezome to Night Mode at the touch of a single button, reducing the fan speed. This will grant you a comfortable 35dB operating volume, enough to sleep by.

You’ll also find that the Breezome has features outside of its size bracket. While you’ll see the near-ubiquitous auto shut-off feature, there is also an automatic defrost mode as well. Very rare for even the absolute best small dehumidifiers, the Breezome includes a timer, allowing you to set the device to operate for 12, 24, 36, or 48 hours before shutting off. This can save you energy in the long run if you know when you’d prefer to use a dehumidifier but aren’t always around to operate it.

Best splurge: Tenergi Sorbi

Tenergi

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 8 x 8 x 12 inches
  • Water removal capacity: 750ml per day
  • Drainage: 1,000 ml reservoir
  • Loudness control: 35-42dB

Pros

  • Great water removal ability with decent reservoir size
  • Comes with HEPA filter for increased air quality
  • ETL plus CARB certified
  • Aesthetically pleasing

Cons

  • Replacement filters don’t come cheap

Air quality and health benefits. To so many people, these are the reasons it makes sense to get a dehumidifier, small or otherwise. The Tenergi Sorbi has a quality combination of providing drier and cleaner air through its system, so while it may be more expensive than the average small dehumidifier, it also does more work.

Depending on your fan speed setting, low or high, the machine will run between 35 and 42 dB and deliver 22 or 38 cubic feet of clean air per hour. In addition to being drier, this air is rated as clean due to the HEPA filter you can install inside. It sorts out 99.7% of particulate matter in the air that passes through it. The California Air Resources Board (CARB) has certified this machine’s capabilities.

Best design: Posdry 27 Oz. Dehumidifier

Posdry

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 5.7″D x 6.3″W x 9″H
  • Water removal capacity: Up to 350ml/day
  • Drainage: 800ml storage tank or 3.28ft drain tube
  • Loudness control: 30 – 40dB

Pros

  • Great for any room
  • Bright light reminds you when tank is full (if not auto-dumped)
  • Cost-effective

Cons

  • Might be too lightweight

If you want to drain the excess humidity from your bathroom, kitchen, or RV effectively, check out this model from Posdry. It provides the standard features of a small dehumidifier but also has a quality drainage tube for effortless reservoir clearing. This means you can place it on a shelf and weave the 3.28-foot (1 meter) tube to the side of your sink or into your toilet’s reservoir tank.

Note that we don’t recommend placing this next to your tub for safety reasons. You may also find that the machine’s body is a bit too light, weighing in at just under three pounds. This means that you might pull it off the shelf accidentally when adjusting the tube, or a pesky cat might easily tip it off the shelf. If you plan to use this technique for effort-free dumping, secure your dehumidifier in place.

Most eco-friendly: ProBreeze Mini

ProBreeze

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 6.2 x 8.6 x 11.8 inches
  • Water removal capacity: 18 oz. per day (~540 ml)
  • Drainage: 52 oz. tank
  • Loudness control: “Whisper quiet”

Pros

  • Operating cost of just 12 cents a day
  • Pulls good moisture from air for its size
  • Wide, flat bottom
  • Includes handle

Cons

  • No sound guarantees

For a powerful small dehumidifier for consistent, around-the-clock use, consider the ProBreeze Mini. Rated to cost less than $4 a month during usage, you can feel comfortable using it for your 250 sq. foot room or crawl space that is getting too much humidity. Its wide, flat bottom will sit well on shelves and tables and isn’t prone to knocking over even when the surface it is on gets knocked.

The only detractor for this small dehumidifier is that the company offers no set decibel guarantee as to its volume, but merely states that it is “whisper quiet.” While this might indicate some variability in volume across units, there are few to any customer complaints about this issue. This is likely due to its use of Peltier dehumidification technology and 40-watt operation.

Best budget: Tabyik 42oz. Dehumidifier

Tabyik

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 5.6 x 6.37 x 11 inches
  • Water removal capacity: Unspecified (suitable for 320 sq. foot room)
  • Drainage: 42oz. (1200ml) reservoir
  • Loudness control: Runs at ~30dB

Pros

  • Great low price
  • Surprisingly fully-featured
  • Large reservoir
  • 5-foot power cord

Cons

  • Signifies it is full in an annoying way

It is hard to get a dehumidifier under $45, barring sales. Oftentimes, you’ll think you’ve found one, only to realize you’ve only found a storage container for silica packets. Tabyik, however, provides a quality dehumidifier (including all the features you want, like auto shut-off and even defrosting) that we feel comfortable calling your best value pick.

You might be concerned that the Tabyik does not specify the maximum water removal per day and only gives a recommended room size. However, do note that water removal ratings are only for “ideal” room humidity and temperature conditions, and most dehumidifiers will not always reach them. In practice, we find that this dehumidifier works to fill up its large 1,200ml reservoir within just a few days. That’s more than enough to get the edge off of a room, which is the traditional usage for small dehumidifiers.

What we do find somewhat annoying about this dehumidifier is how it lets you know its reservoir is full and ready to dump. Where most small dehumidifiers will have a small LED light that will brighten to let you know they are full, the Tabyik makes its entire reservoir a bright red. This amount of light could potentially disturb your sleep if it happens to go full in the middle of the night.

What to consider before buying small dehumidifiers

It goes without saying that you should pay a lot of attention to a dehumidifier’s (small or otherwise) ability to remove water from the air. When choosing a small dehumidifier, especially for usage in a bedroom or bathroom, other particulars become more critical and can quickly be overlooked in the search for more power.

Water drainage ease

While larger dehumidifiers are usually both manually and automatically (via a tube system) dumpable, small dehumidifiers are more likely to be hand-dumped only. This means that when the reservoir gets full, you must manually dump it down the drain or on your plants.

This may seem minor, but you can expect to do it relatively often. Spilled water is worth no tears, but it can be rather annoying. Look for handles, wave-breakers, and automatic shut-off features that turn the dehumidifier off before it gets to the brim to make your manual dumping easier.

Since even the best small dehumidifiers tend to be cheap, you’ll want to be especially careful of any drainage system (whereby the dehumidifier will dump directly into a sink or other drainage port) carefully. Ensure the water out fittings are solid and take any customer reports of leaks seriously.

Loudness

Many of our small dehumidifiers live in our bedrooms with us, especially if we seek to use a small dehumidifier for health benefits. As such, be wary of loud dehumidifiers for bedroom use.

Many manufacturers will list a maximum loudness in decibels (dB) that the dehumidifier is intended to go at, and we will report that to you. Others, however, are variable or utilize other sound-dampening mechanisms.

For example, some dehumidifiers will engage in ‘night mode.’ While the specifics differ from product to product, this sort of mode usually means that the dehumidifier will trade water-removal power for a reduction in operation volume for set periods of time. Other times, however, it means that the dehumidifier will turn off completely during the night, reducing benefits.

Additional features

In general, even the best small dehumidifiers are going to be feature-light. Small dehumidifiers are purchased for their small size and added convenience, not to be multifaceted smart machines.

However, you will see an air purifier on the most premium of small dehumidifiers, such as a HEPA filter. This makes logical sense due to the fact that dehumidifiers are processing and filtering air, in a sense, by default. It’s just normal for them to be filtering the water out of the air. Particulate matter filtration is just one added step along the way.

Don’t, however, come to think that small dehumidifiers are meant to be completely featureless. Important features like automatic shut-off (turning off automatically when the reservoir gets full) are so ubiquitous that it would only be noteworthy if a dehumidifier (of any size) didn’t have such a feature. Auto defrost is also quite common.

What you’re unlikely to see on small dehumidifiers that is quite common on medium and large dehumidifiers is smart-home support or companion apps. And, frankly, you’re unlikely to want or use them. The best small dehumidifiers are used as needed, quietly in the corner.

FAQs

Q: How much does a small dehumidifier cost?

A small dehumidifier can cost anywhere from $40 to $90, with most costing around $60. Since the units are tiny, they will need a lot of extra features (such as air purification) to justify a price too much over the $60 mark.

Q: What is a cheaper alternative to a dehumidifier?

While getting a dehumidifier is your long-run cheapest solution, there are some clever ways to reuse silica gel and silica packets that can soak up some moisture. Depending on your situation, your home may suffer from high humidity due to too much or too little ventilation. Experimenting with opening and closing windows and ensuring your doors are properly sealed could help.

Q: What is the best mini dehumidifier for a small bathroom?

The best mini dehumidifier for a small bathroom is the Posdry 27 Oz. as it has a quality drainage tube. This means that you can use the dehumidifier on a shelf above your sink or toilet in your bathroom and have the condensed humidity automatically fall into the sink or toilet basin.

Final thoughts on the best small dehumidifiers

The preceding small dehumidifiers represent your best options for getting a dehumidifier at an affordable price for your small room. They all emphasize affordability, tolerability, and everyday function over intensity and power. Remember, the best small dehumidifiers—if placed in typical locations for them—are objects to be lived around and should have the same feeling to be around as fans and other moving objects that are in our rooms but don’t affect our other activities greatly.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best small dehumidifiers for 2024 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Logitech for Creators Blue Yeti vs. Yeti X: Which podcasting mic should you buy? https://www.popsci.com/reviews/yeti-vs-yeti-x-microphone-comparison/ Wed, 16 Feb 2022 16:00:57 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=375630
Blue Microphone Yeti and Yeti X in front of a computer
Markkus Rovito

Here’s how to decide between versions of one of the most trusted USB mics for podcasting and streaming.

The post Logitech for Creators Blue Yeti vs. Yeti X: Which podcasting mic should you buy? appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Blue Microphone Yeti and Yeti X in front of a computer
Markkus Rovito

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The Original Blue Yeti is the best mic for streaming. Blue Yeti
SEE IT

Still great, the Blue Yeti is a user-friendly option for a new streamer or podcaster who wants a plug-and-play, reliable USB microphone with a proven sound.

The Upgrade Blue Yeti X USB is the best microphone for vocals Blue Yeti X
SEE IT

The Yeti X improves the audio quality, updates the design, and adds some extra features while also keeping the same basic operational and connectivity features as the Yeti.

The latest Black Logitech G Yeti GX microphone for streaming with an RBG color ring and a base against a white background Logitech G Yeti GX
SEE IT

A compact streamer-focused mic that offers a broadcast-style supercardioid capsule and RGB gamer styling.

Way before there were dozens of companies making hundreds of USB microphones, Blue Microphones introduced the Yeti in 2009 and it held a legitimate claim to being among the best USB podcast microphone for some time. With increasing competition, the Blue Yeti had to evolve, and the following iteration, the Yeti X, can claim to be more expressive … for a price. But just how wide is this generation gap? If you’re searching for the best microphone for whatever your project is and you’ve narrowed it down to Blue Yeti mics, chances are you’re comparing the classic to the new hotness, so here’s our Yeti vs. Yeti X primer to help you decide.

Is something wrong with the original Blue Yeti mic? Why another version?

Markkus Rovito

SEE IT

The Blue Yeti USB microphone ($109.99) was originally launched as a “premium” USB microphone aimed at pro, semi-pro, and aspiring broadcasters, singers, and musicians. At that time, many USB mics looked like novelty designs and lacked professional features and audio quality of broadcaster standards like the Shure SM7B. They did have the benefit of not requiring an external audio interface, however, and soon caught on and caught up. The Yeti raised the bar for USB microphone quality and became one of the most popular models worldwide for years and a common feature on many podcaster’s desks.

Since then, however, the USB mic landscape has exploded with professional options matching or exceeding the Yeti. Blue has kept pace by introducing a series of Yeti USB mics for various needs. The sub-$100 Yeti Nano, for example, is a smaller mic with fewer options. At the same time, the $249.99 Yeti Pro adds musician-focused features such as an XLR audio connection and 24-bit/192kHz studio-grade audio resolution. 

While those are targeted for specific use cases, the $169.99 Yeti X is the closest thing to an updated version of the Blue Yeti USB microphone, adding several small but noticeable improvements to the still-capable original. The Yeti X improves the audio quality, updates the design, and adds some extra features while keeping the same basic operational and connectivity features as the Yeti. But the original Yeti is still a great, user-friendly option for a new streamer or podcaster who wants a plug-and-play, reliable USB microphone with a proven sound. There’s nothing wrong with the original, so the pertinent questions for potential buyers are whether they want the Yeti X’s extra features and, if so, are they worth the extra $60? Let’s discuss …

Yeti vs. Yeti X microphones: What are the differences?

Blue (now known as Logitch for Creators and part of the Logitech G brand) won critical acclaim when it introduced the Yeti X in 2020, as the update adds a little bump to everything its best-selling predecessor does. The Yeti X steps up its digital audio resolution to 24-bit/48kHz, compared to 16-bit/48kHz for the Yeti. In theory, that higher bit depth represents a massive increase in captured digital data to recreate sounds more accurately. In practice, many people may not notice the difference in the audio quality, and many users may not even need or use the extra audio resolution in their streams, podcasts, and other broadcasts. 

However, the Yeti X has another trick up its sleeve: a fourth condenser capsule, compared to the Yeti’s three condensers. The condenser capsules in microphones convert sound waves into the mic’s signal, so having four instead of three condensers can contribute to greater audio clarity. At comparable prices, many other USB mics use four condensers to capture audio.

Aesthetically, the Yeti X looks sleeker in its design and has shinier finishing elements to the microphone and its stand base. The flatter microphone head contributes to Yeti X’s retro-futuristic appeal. The Yeti X is also slightly smaller than the Yeti but weighs a bit more; including the microphone and the stand, the Yeti X weighs 2.8 pounds, compared to 2.2 pounds for the Yeti and its stand.

Perhaps the most noticeable difference visual is the multicolor, multifunction LED ring around the Yeti X’s level encoder/mute button on its front. By default, these LEDs show the mic’s input level meter in green, yellow, and red, so you can see immediately if your levels are too hot. The encoder also controls the levels for the microphone input, headphone volume, and monitoring balance between the mic volume and computer volume. Holding the mute button switches between level modes and the LEDs show the levels as you turn the encoder. This Yeti X functionality gives you all your level controls in front, whereas the Yeti has a headphone volume knob in front and a microphone input level knob in back. Besides looking cooler, the Yeti X’s LED ring gives you the extra monitoring balance function, which the Yeti doesn’t have.

Finally, the Yeti X gives you extra options when paired with the included Logitech G Hub desktop software. Using G Hub you can customize the Yeti X’s LED ring colors, and apply “Blue VO!CE” vocal effects, which are EQ settings for treating your voice with presets—including “Warm and Vintage,” “Crisp and Modern,” and “AM Radio”—or dialing in your settings.

Cool, then how are the Yeti and Yeti X similar?

Yeti X in front of Yeti and a MacBook
The Yeti X adds several small but noticeable improvements to the still-capable original. Markkus Rovito

Both mics are USB-powered and can detach from their stands to be mounted on standard mic stands or boom arms. Detaching the Yeti from its stand can send several small, easily lost washers in all directions, and those parts also make reattaching the Yeti to its stand somewhat of a hassle. Thankfully, the Yeti X’s design doesn’t use any of those washers, so detaching and reattaching it to and from its stand makes for a better experience.

Both mics are also very sensitive in picking up sounds and have the same four pickup patterns—internal settings that focus the mic’s audio capture to specific areas in front, behind, or all around it. These four patterns are: cardioid (in front), most common for a single person talking or singing; omnidirectional (360 degrees), best for representing the entire ambiance of a space; bi-directional (front and back), ideal for two people sitting across from each other; and stereo, which creates a wide audio image and is well suited to recording instruments or multiple sound sources in front of the mic. On the Yeti, the Pattern control for choosing these pickup patterns (a dial) is a bit stiff to switch, but the Yeti X employs a better button switch with LED icons for showing the active pattern.

Once set up, the original Yeti earned its esteemed reputation for combining crisp, strong, detailed sound with a sturdy and durable metal design and professional looks. For any streamers who like to keep their mics in sight of the camera, the standard Yeti comes in a variety of colors—including blue, silver, teal, red, and black—while the Yeti for The Aurora Collection edition adds Pink Dawn and White Mist. It also has a headphone output, which lets you monitor the mic’s input with no latency while listening to your computer’s audio—an excellent and very handy feature. The Yeti X has all those traits as well, with the aforementioned audio-quality boosts. 

Is the improved sound quality of the Yeti X really noticeable?

When comparing 16-bit/48kHz recordings from the Yeti to 24-bit/48kHz recordings from the Yeti X, there is a noticeable difference in the fidelity of the Yeti vs. Yeti X. The Yeti sounds slightly harsher for “esses” and other consonant sounds, as well as breath sounds. Spoken words are clearer and musical instruments ring just a little more textured and resonant on the Yeti X. Even when comparing recordings at 16-bit/48kHz resolution from both mics, there was a smaller, but still noticeable difference in the clarity coming from the Yeti X. 

Note: If you want the full audio resolution from the Yeti X, you may have to dig into your recording software or streaming software settings to use the 24-bit/48kHz resolution.

That said, untrained listeners frequently do not notice the difference between 16-bit audio and high-resolution (higher than 16-bit) audio. And millions of people listen to podcasts and livestreams every day in compressed audio formats like MP3, so using a microphone with 24-bit or 16-bit audio would not really make a difference.

If I’m just recording myself talking, why would I want the Yeti X?

Markkus Rovito

SEE IT

While the practical need for 24-bit audio is not currently essential to many podcasters and streamers, the Yeti X still has an edge in clarity over the Yeti due to its fourth condenser. And suppose you are starting a podcast or other type of show in 2021. In that case, there is currently a push toward lossless audio on streaming services, so it may not hurt to “futureproof” your setup with a 24-bit audio USB mic that would stay relevant if audio quality expectations continue to go up over time. For example, 24-bit/48kHz audio (or higher) is already the preferred choice for recording music so that it can be delivered to high-definition formats.

Besides its audio, the Yeti X may be more appealing to those thinking about the on-camera appearance of their mic for their videos on YouTube, Instagram, TikTok, and so on. Whether you think the Yeti or the Yeti X looks better is a subjective matter, but having the LED level meter with customizable colors is certainly a way to stand out, and the Yeti X is at least much less common (for now). In contrast, Blue claims there are millions of the original Yeti in use.

But what if I’m streaming? An aside about the Blue Yeti GX

PC Gaming photo

The Blue Yeti GX is the Yeti line’s answer to the rise of streaming. Its streamlined body and RGB aesthetic are meant to illuminate, but not dominate, the area around your mouth and face as you speak, calmly we’re sure, into its dynamic supercardioid capsule designed to focus on your voice, not keyboard/mouse clicks. You can run your voice through Blue VO!CE filters and effects and there’s also an analog limiter to prevent clipping and a downward expander to reduce ambient background noise. Meanwhile, a heavy base reduces rattling if you happen to “fist pump” your desk during a heated gaming moment, and, likewise, the Yeti GX detects movements to dampen the mic and reduce this sort of interference (it can also be fitted to a boom arm).

Note, also, that the Yeti GX is quite easy to use. If you can plug its USB-C to USB-A connection in, you can use a Yeti GX effectively. In fact, for most people the standard options will sound fine and you’re likely to spend as much time in the Logitech G Hub software adjusting RGB as you are choosing a preset that sounds fine. More advanced options are there for those who want them. For streamers, especially, the simple on-mic controls will be useful for on-the-fly adjustments.

The big question is, however, if the Yeti GX is a buy and if it beats out the Yeti or Yeti X. As per the ideas of the mic’s makers, the primary people to be interested in this mic are streamers who will appreciate its simplicity and beauty. The associate Streamlabs Ultra free trial that goes with the Yeti GX can attest to that. If you are currently seeking your first, backup, or next streaming mic, such as if your current one has died, the Blue Yeti GX is a no-brainer. However, if you already have a Yeti mic that you enjoy for streaming, holding off on the buy button until you see a sale or special deal is more advisable. — John Alexander

So, is the original Yeti still good enough?

There are plenty of people using the Blue Microphones Yeti today for a podcast, a Twitch stream, a YouTube channel, etc. Their shows probably don’t suffer at all for using the Yeti instead of the Yeti X. So, if you really want to save money or if you just prefer the silver or blue Yeti colors that aren’t available for the Yeti X, which just comes in black or white, you will get one of the best USB microphones for the money in the original Yeti. 

On the other hand, you would also get a considerable amount of improvements for the extra $60 for the Yeti X, which upgrades the Yeti in almost every conceivable way. The Yeti X offers a clearer, richer sound from its additional condenser capsule and digital audio resolution, additional hands-on audio controls, a customizable multicolor LED level meter ring, voice EQ settings through software, and a slicker design that offers a cleaner experience for detaching and reattaching the mic to its stand. 

Regardless of the model you choose, the Blue Yeti vs. Yeti X debate features USB mics that have deserved reputations as two of the best for the price. There are new challengers in the USB mic market what feels like almost daily—such as the AKG Ara or MSI Immerse GV60 or Sennheiser Profile—but the Yetis remain strong in build yet sensitive to sound. They are an accurate, reliable, and easy-to-operate plug-and-play option for computer- and smart device-based broadcasting. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post Logitech for Creators Blue Yeti vs. Yeti X: Which podcasting mic should you buy? appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best snow blowers for gravel driveways of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-snow-blowers-for-gravel-driveways/ Fri, 19 Aug 2022 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=463653
Best snow blowers for gravel driveways sliced header
Tony Ware

Cut through the snow, not your driveway.

The post The best snow blowers for gravel driveways of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best snow blowers for gravel driveways sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall Honda Power Equipment HSS928AATD is the best overall snow blower for gravel driveways. Honda Power Equipment HSS724AAWD
SEE IT

With an easy electric start and adjustable auger height, this beast of a blower will carve a path through frozen precipitation in no time.

Best Electric EGO SNT2400 is the best electric snow blower for gravel driveways. EGO SNT2400
SEE IT

More eco-friendly, as well as noise pollution negligible, than gas-powered blowers, this electric option is still highly efficient.

Best for Long Driveways Ariens 30-inch snow blower for long driveways Ariens Deluxe 30-in Two-stage Self-propelled Gas Snow Blower
SEE IT

It can cut a 30-inch path through more than 18 inches of snow, which means fewer passes and shorter clearing times.

You might be avoiding snow blowers for gravel driveways because you’ve heard they’ll kick up rocks and damage your property. At the same time, shoveling out your entire driveway probably sounds like a horrid chore. The answer is a two-stage or three-stage snow blower, capable of skimming across the top of your driveway, removing the majority of snow while leaving your driveway intact. If you feel like picking the right machine for the job has you between a bunch of rocks and a hard place, we’ve made it easier with our list of the best snow blowers for gravel driveways.

How we selected the best snow blowers for gravel driveways

Selecting the best snow blowers for gravel driveways is a bit different than choosing the best snow blowers to use in a general sense. The main issue is that you cannot safely use a 1-stage snow blower on gravel driveways because they have no way to prevent rocks from making it out through the chute. Wheels and treads are another worthwhile consideration. In any event, we had to go beyond the top-rated snow blowers and look at each machine to make sure it would remove your snow and not the ground, without having to resort to snow shovels. We considered critical reviews and user impressions to help us narrow down our list to the best snow blowers for gravel driveways.

The best snow blowers for gravel driveways: Reviews & Recommendations

The following 2-stage and 3-stage snow blowers are all adequate choices for gravel driveways. While the typical choice is going to be a gas-powered 2-stage snow blower, we’ve also got some variety for you. Within this list, you’ll be able to find anything you would want from the category, from heavy-duty snow blowers to the best electric snow blower. In the end, all of the following choices will make for a good snow blower for gravel driveway clearing.

Best overall: Honda 660780 Two Stage Snow Blower

Honda

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This heavy-duty snow blower by Honda has the power to get big jobs done.

Specs

  • Stages: 2-stage
  • Size: Fits in 60 x 44 x 30 inches pre-assembly
  • Weight: 220 pounds

Pros

  • Easy electric start
  • Adjustable auger height
  • Clears 24-inches wide
  • Expert assembly available

Cons

  • Very heavy
  • Expensive

The top of our list belongs to Honda Power Equipment for its sheer power. This beast of a machine can handle 1,500 pounds of snow a minute, with a 24-inch wide clearing opening. Keeping on your gravel driveway should be relatively easy with the tank-like treads on the back two wheels. Be sure to install skid shoes on the bottom of the front section to give your snow blower some lift, but also be aware that the height of the Honda Power Equipment’s auger (the part that gets rid of the snow) is adjustable.

You can also take advantage of the offered expert assembly, which will be especially useful since the Honda Power Equipment snow blower weighs over 220 pounds. The weight, alongside the hefty cost, is going to turn some heads, but the overall efficacy of the Honda Power Equipment and advanced height adjustment earns it its slot at the top of the best snow blowers for gravel driveways.

Best electric: EGO SNT2400

EGO Power+

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The EGO SNT2400 is one of the few fully electric stage-2 snow blowers that can compete with a gas-powered snow blower.

Specs

  • Stages: 2-stages
  • Size: 49 x 26 x 45 inches
  • Weight: 154.7 pounds

Pros

  • Much quieter than gas-powered models
  • Headlights
  • Eco friendly
  • Expert assembly available

Cons

  • No provided batteries/charger

Our best electric snow blower for gravel driveways comes in the form of the EGO SNT2400. This product really outshines its gas-powered competitors in that it isn’t churning out noxious fumes into the air while also staying quiet in the mornings to not wake up the kids and neighbors.

The EGO SNT2400 uses arc lithium batteries to deliver the power of gas without all of the environmental downsides. The batteries also give you the chance for a completely electric but also cordless snow blower-for-gravel-driveways experience.

Unfortunately, the EGO SNT2400 does not come with the batteries and charger. This does, however, give you some choice and flexibility in what you’re getting, as well as save you some money if you’re an electric fan that already has the needed batteries for other EGO Outdoor Power Equipment. For this model, EGO recommends using two of the 56V ARC Lithium batteries, with the 7.5 Ah model being able to clear an 18-car driveway in a single charge.

Best 3-stage: CRAFTSMAN SB650 28-in Three-stage Self-propelled Gas Snow Blower

Craftsman

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The extra turbo mode kicks when when you have to chop through super-heavy snow or ice.

Specs

  • Stages: 3-stage
  • Size: 53 x 28 x 43 inches
  • Weight: 283 pounds

Pros

  • Extra power when you need it
  • Extremely burly wheels
  • Self-propulsion
  • 357cc engine
  • Six forward speeds and two reverse speeds

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Expensive

When things get rough, such as when you get refrozen snow regularly, it becomes time for a 3-stage snow blower. These hardy snow blowers have an accelerator that pushes through into the heaviest and wettest of snows, giving you the power to get the job done. This 357cc model is one of the most powerful currently available.

It cuts a 28-inch swath through the accumulated snow up to 18-inches hight. That means you can wait until the storm is over (most of the time) and then quickly clear the driveway all in one shot instead of having to do multiple passes. The self-propulsion system offers six forward speeds and two reverse speeds. You’ll need that help from the self-propulsion system since this blower weighs in at a very hefty 283 pounds.

It can throw snow for up to 30 feet and the versatile blade design makes it right at home on paved surfaces or un-paved surfaces. That’s great if you’re clearing a big property with mixed terrain.

If you typically just get fluffy snow that blows around in the wind, then this model might be overkill. But, if you get heavy, icy snow that tends to choke your regular blower, than this is absolutely worth the upgrade.

Best for long driveways: Ariens Deluxe 30-in Two-stage Self-propelled Gas Snow Blower

Ariens

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You want two things when clearing a long driveway: a wide clearing area and self-propulsion. This has both.

Specs

  • Stages: 2-stage
  • Size: 58 x 32 x 45
  • Weight: 275 pounds

Pros

  • Super-wide 30-inch clearing area
  • Powerful engine
  • Long throw
  • Self-propulsion
  • Push-button electric start

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Expensive

When you have a long driveway, you want to clear as much snow as possible with each pass. This powerful snow mover cuts a 30-inch wide path through the accumulation. That drastically cuts down on how long it takes to cover a large area. It’s also capable of chewing through up to 18 inches of snow, so no need to go out and do multiple sessions.

This machine offers variable-speed self-propulsion, which is all-but-mandatory since it weighs a very hefty 275 pounds. Still, it’s relatively easy to maneuver thanks to the powerful self-drive mechanism and burly back tires. The auger can throw snow up to 50 feet, so it’s good for wide driveways as well. Plus, the chute rotates up to 200 degrees so you can be surgical when it comes to placing the blown snow. This is a beast of a machine, but if you have a long driveway, it can drastically decrease time spent clearing snow.

Best budget: PowerSmart Snow Blower 212cc

PowerSmart

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: PowerSmart has provided us with a fully powered 2-stage snow blower for under $800.

Specs

  • Stages: 2-stage
  • Size: 32.3 x 24.8 x 22 inches
  • Weight: 143 pounds

Pros

  • Great power for the price
  • Relatively lightweight
  • Expert assembly available

Cons

  • Jiggly chute

Finally, we have a 2-stage snow blower from PowerSmart. Despite its relatively affordable price, the PowerSmart is tough enough to get through difficult storms thanks to a clearing height of up to 21 inches at full 2-foot width. It uses a 212cc standard gas engine with a corded electric start.

What the PowerSmart lacks in premium features, such as headlights or heated handles, it makes up for by being a solid unit that won’t break the bank. You’ll also notice that sticking to the essentials gives makes the PowerSmart comparatively lightweight at only 143 pounds. Where most units are considerably heavier than me, there’s a lot of comfort in working with a machine in the slippery snow that is more comparable in weight.

The PowerSmart features a 180-degree rotatable chute. While, in theory, this rotation should be under your control, consumer reports mention that the chute can have a mind of its own from time to time and change its aim. This is particularly noticeable in bumpy terrain. Still, you should be able to get it back under control quickly if you are attentive.

Things to consider before buying snow blowers for gravel driveways

While the number of stages is the most important thing to consider when buying a snow blower for gravel driveways compared to one for other use cases, there are other important things to consider before buying such a large, complicated piece of equipment. Then chuck on your best heated gloves and your best heated jacket and get to work.

Stages

At its most simple, we can describe the stage amount as the number of steps and parts used to chuck snow elsewhere. The most important distinction for users wanting to blow snow off the tops of gravel driveways is separating 1-stage and higher-stage snow blowers.

A 1-stage snow blower, also known as a “snow thrower,” has a more open build and no shielding to protect the ground. The result is snow—and gravel—thrown everywhere. These 1-stage snow blowers are not suitable snow blowers for gravel driveways.

The 2-stage and 3-stage snow blowers, meanwhile, are made for gravel driveways. A large part of this is the addition in most models of skid shoes, which force the machine slightly off the ground. The result is a skimming-off-the-top effect, leaving just a thin layer of snow atop your undisturbed gravel. The main bonus of a 3-stage over a 2-stage is the addition of an accelerator that can help with harder, refrozen snow.

Please note that other terminology works for these products, as well. For example, 2-stage, dual-stage, and two-stage all work interchangeably. When looking for the best snow blowers for gravel driveways avoid snow throwers, 1-stage snow blowers, single-stage snow blowers, and one-stage snow blowers.

Expert assembly options

Regardless of how handy you are, a bit of help putting together a several-hundred-pound machine can be quite useful. This assembly can also ensure that the skid shoes—the part of the snow blower that raises the machine up to not eat your gravel—are attached properly. As a bonus, the cost of getting expert assembly is typically quite cheap. For example, the EGO SNT2400 has an expert assembly option that adds less than 5% to the overall cost of the machine. That being said, be sure to discuss the details with the service provider, as there is usually a clause that allows for an updated estimate based on the complexity of the machine.

Size & weight

Picturing your heavy-duty snow blower tossing snow out of your path sounds great as the season approaches, but will you be happy with a large and ultra-heavy machine sitting in your garage all year? Be careful and imagine setting a box with the weight and dimensions of your new product in your shed for a full year. Are you going to be using it enough during the viable season to make it worth having it from spring to fall as well or is it going to be weighing you down more than the full utility that it provides? The heaviest snow blowers can weigh nearly 300 pounds. Once weights get up above 150 pounds or so, you want to make sure to have self-propulsion. Also, heavier models benefit from reverse gears to help you go backwards without doing a World’s Strongest Man event.

FAQs

Q: How much does a snow blower for gravel driveways cost?

A snow blower for gravel driveways can cost anywhere from below $800 to over $3,000. More complex models and, oftentimes, 3-stage snow blowers are likely to cost more than the rest. It is really important to evaluate how often you are really going to be using a snow blower when buying one for gravel driveways due to their high cost. Alternatively, consider budget models like the PowerSmart Snow Blower 212cc, which can pay for themselves after just a dozen or so uses.

Q: Can any snow blower be used on gravel driveways?

Any snow blower that doesn’t lift the snow from the surface directly can be used on gravel driveways. One-stage snow blowers take the snow from the surface and, in one step (or “stage”) directly displace it. In the case of gravel driveways, 1-stage snow blowers will also remove gravel on the surface as well. As a result, 1-stage snow blowers should not be used for gravel driveways.

Q: Two-stage vs three-stage snow blowers: what’s better for gravel?

The 2-stage vs 3-stage snow blowers, unlike the 1-stage snow blowers discussed in the question above, are both suitable for gravel. Instead, the debate on getting a 2-stage vs 3-stage snow blower comes down to how much power you need. Typical consumers will be fine with a two-stage snow blower, but some might appreciate the third stage (acceleration) that can be found in 3-stage snow blowers such as the Cub Cadet 3X 28.”

Final thoughts on the best snow blowers for gravel driveways

Getting the best snow blowers for gravel driveways is easy once you’ve figured out the need to have a 2-stage or 3-stage snow blower at a minimum. The snow blowers presented on this list should appeal to anyone wishing to get something to make the winter more bearable, with the Honda 660780 Two Stage Snow Blower being a particularly strong choice.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow blowers for gravel driveways of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best Android games for unlocking new worlds https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-android-games/ Thu, 09 Nov 2023 02:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586913
A man and a woman sitting next to each other playing games on their phones.
Whether you're playing with others or alone, these Android games provide plenty of challenge. Afif Ramdhasuma / Unsplash

Indulge in a little healthy competition with some of the best Android games.

The post The best Android games for unlocking new worlds appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A man and a woman sitting next to each other playing games on their phones.
Whether you're playing with others or alone, these Android games provide plenty of challenge. Afif Ramdhasuma / Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

With hundreds of thousands of Android games on the Google Play Store, it can be tricky to find ones that are suitable to play. Often, the games we see advertised the most for Android phones and tablets are also the most predatory. Avoiding games designed more to take our cash than to entertain us is difficult, but we can help by recommending five of the best Android games that break the mold and still provide plenty of fun.

 Super Auto Pets

An early-game fight showing mice, ducks, fish, and other creatures facing off in the Super Auto Pets Android game.
Assemble a team of cute creatures with super powers. Screenshot: Super Auto Pets

Super Auto Pets is an answer to auto-battling games like Hearthstone: Battlegrounds, Riot’s Team Fight Tactics, and Marvel Snap. The game has a clear monetization scheme and instantaneous unlocks, yet still holds onto the addictive gameplay loop the aforementioned auto-battlers have. But the obsession comes from fun and achievements, not grinding out currency and unlocks.

During gameplay, you’ll assemble a team of cute animals (including a dinosaur or two), feed them, and head off to battle. As the primary game mode is asynchronous, it’s a perfect game for busy adults. You won’t have to hurry through turns if you dip into play intermittently throughout the workday. If you have time, however, you can sit down for a ranked match, which plays like more typical multiplayer online games. What animals (and food) you play with are determined by sets, which can be purchased in full with a single direct purchase, no “gems” or other in-game currency required. The first set is free and you can eventually play with all animals for free via weekly random and/or curated sets.

Super Auto Pets is free, and you can buy additional packs in the app.

2. Vampire Survivors

One of the many level-up screens in the Vampire Survivors' journey, featuring the Magic Wand, Santa Water, and Knife options.
The interface may look dated, but this game is still engrossing. Screenshot: Vampire Survivors

Vampire Survivors became a cult classic on PC during the summer of 2023. With graphics that can be described as “1998 DOS freeware” and a user interface defined by only one word—chaotic—this is definitely a stylized game. The effect is outstanding, however, and a satisfying game loop quickly seals players within its grasp.

Each session starts with a character and a weapon or two, automatically flying about the screen. As your weapon hits enemies who increasingly crowd around you, numbers begin to fly everywhere, levels rise, and resources accumulate. Regular pauses in the action give you a chance to breathe and plot, while also giving you access to items that will improve your build. As time progresses, so does the intensity of the opposition, with the final bits of action proving the true power of your build and if you’re worthy of unlockables.

Vampire Survivors is free with in-app purchases.

3. Dominion

An early-game hand in the base game of Dominion, which displays playing cards for a militia, moneylender, artisan, and more, as well as a tally of your points.
Collect enough cards to create your own world. Screenshot: Dominion

Dominion is a classic board game. Now, it has a new Android app edition, suitable for both new and recurring players. Dominion is a deck-builder that emphasizes trade-offs and long-term planning. Each turn, you collect cards that either boost your score or your potential to grab even better cards later. Grabbing early-game, high-point cards while you can will always feel good, for example, but seeing those cards (dead weight in your hand) again and again throughout a match can feel exhausting.

As mentioned, this game originates from older source material. However, this digital rendition is a fairly new implementation of the game, and at the time of this writing, it remains in early access. As a result, if you’ve been put off by other mobile implementations of board and card games of this era, you should strongly consider coming back for Dominion to see if a new generation of graphics, UI innovations, and controls can get you in the game.

Dominion is free, and you can buy expansions in the app.

4. Peglin

A screen displaying a forest and points in the Android game Peglin.
Vanquish monsters and other enemies in this RPG. Screenshot: Peglin

Take PopCap’s Peggle, toss in a Slay the Spire overworld and character development system, and throw in some unique thematic arcs of its own and you have Peglin. Essentially, the game’s core loop is you—depicted as a green goblin with pointy ears—throwing rocks and orbs through a board to hit pegs. To oversimplify greatly, the more pegs you hit, the more damage you do to oncoming monsters. It’s a hit-or-be-hit world. After battles end, you get to add a new rock or orb to your backpack and, potentially, get the chance to attend an event or obtain a game-changing artifact.

While the opening act of the game, set in a forest, feels like Peggle with RPG mechanics on top, that feeling doesn’t last. By the time you’ve prevailed past a castle and into the void, gravity and gameplay will both be significantly different. Mastered all the areas? You’ll still have the “cruciball” challenge, which tilts the odds against you, and new characters to play with as well. Plus, the developerss keep updates coming, both improving upon the game and adding new orbs to fight with. Peglin is a fully-contained offline adventure.

Peglin is free with in-app purchases.

5. Shattered Pixel Dungeon

A gray dungeon depicted in the Android game Shattered Pixel Dungeon.
This dungeon-crawler is easy at first, but difficult to master. Screenshot: Shattered Pixel Dungeon

If you want a traditional, adventure roguelike Android game, then Shattered Pixel Dungeon is worth your time. Ditching awkward numpad controls and step-by-step movement, Shattered Pixel Dungeon takes you on a finger-accessible journey with mobile sensibilities. Collecting items, discovering the unknown, and bashing enemies with swords and spells are all still there in all their traditional roguelike glory for you, though.

[Related: The best Android apps for your Chromebook]

You may already be familiar with part of the title of the game, and that’s because it comes as a fork, or separate branch, of the open-source code of Pixel Dungeon. While other forks of this game exist, Shattered Pixel Dungeon is generally favored above others for its consistent development, plethora of extra items and entities, and nearly 10 years of independent history. If you like this game, other Pixel Dungeon variants may also be worth a spin.

Shattered Pixel Dungeon is free to play.

While these games are meant to be best enjoyed on an Android phone, the fun doesn’t have to stop there. If you’d like to get them on a bigger screen, check out our guide on how to use Android games on PC.

The post The best Android games for unlocking new worlds appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best garage heaters in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-garage-heaters/ Wed, 08 Nov 2023 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586294
Best garage heaters sliced header
Tony Ware

Because your hands should be warm and pliable when you’re tooling in the garage.

The post The best garage heaters in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best garage heaters sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall smart Heat Storm Phoenix Wi-Fi Edition over a white background Heat Storm Phoenix Wi-Fi Edition
SEE IT

The perfect heater for a quick jump into the car.

Best value black Amazon Basics Oscillating Ceramic Heater over a white background with gradient Amazon Basics Oscillating Ceramic Heater
SEE IT

A simple heater that doesn’t skimp on safety features.

Best propane white Mr. Heater F299730 floor heater over a white background Mr. Heater F299730
SEE IT

Gives off pleasing, blue flame heat and is suitable for indoor use.

Whether it’s to avoid pre-commute morning chills or help you get through that weekend project, garage heaters are there to keep you warm. But there’s a lot to look into, including safety concerns (noxious fumes) and the scary possibility of accidentally winding up with one of those 240V plug-ins and nowhere to plug it. To get you on the right track, and with an appliance that suits your needs, we’ve compiled a list of the best garage heaters, with every angle and style covered.

How we chose the best garage heaters

It shouldn’t surprise you, but the two primary factors that go into any selection for an entry onto the best garage heaters list are heating quality and safety features. Without these two factors, an item cannot be considered for the list. The next things we considered are the types of customers that need garage heaters and the types of garages those customers have. For example, if you’re the standard garage user who just wants to hop into a car without freezing, you should probably just go with the Heat Storm Phoenix Wi-Fi Edition. But, if you’re a tinkerer, there are many more things to consider. But no matter what your situation, it is our firm belief that we’ve probably found something of quality for this list that will suit your needs.

The best garage heaters: Reviews & Recommendations

As we’ve organized the following list, we’ve organized it to be human-based first garage-based next to the best of our ability. What does this mean? Human situations, such as wanting overhead heating, come before garage considerations whenever possible. In other words, as you’re browsing this list, consider your personal situation first, as the best garage heaters are those that solve your problems.

Best overall: Heat Storm Phoenix Wi-Fi Edition

Heat Storm

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Provides the best heat for average families looking to pop into the car.

Specs

  • Power source: Electric (1500W)
  • Size: 4 x 19 x 16 inches
  • Placement: Wall mounted
  • Heating style: Infrared

Pros

  • Fast, concentrated heat when and where it matters
  • Simple installation
  • Robust safety features
  • Easy to control remotely

Cons

  • Best for quick trips to the car

Generally speaking, there are two types of garage heater customers: those who want to heat up their garage to stay in it and work and those who want to hop in the car in comfort. The vast majority of people will be in the latter group, and this is the heater for them.

The Heat Storm Phoenix weighs a mere nine pounds and connects with your standard American 110/120-volt outlet. This simple setup and outlet connection easily makes it one of the best electric garage heaters. It provides radiant heat, which emanates from the heater, and can be wall-mounted next to your garage entryway. This, in combination with its WiFi-enabled remote controls, means you’ll be able to reach your car in comfort and then switch the heating element off after you drive away.

It’s also worth pointing out that radiant heat works relatively quickly, unlike convection heating, as it sends out rays of heat. In the same way, it can be highly energy efficient if used in the right manner. You aren’t spending power heating up the far corners of your garage, after all.

Finally, it is worth pointing out how much emphasis is put into the safety blocks of this machine. It has a child lock, tip-over protection, an air filter, and overheating shut-off, so even if you forget to turn it off after leaving the garage, you can have peace of mind about the safety of your garage.

Best year-round: Dyson Pure Hot + Cool HP07

Dyson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This heater provides heat in the winter, cooling in the summer, and air purification all year long.

Specs

  • Power source: Electric (1500W)
  • Size: 9.76 x 8.07 x 30.08 inches
  • Placement: Freestanding
  • Heating style: Convection

Pros

  • Provides heating and cooling
  • Uses HEPA filter for cleaner air
  • Very safe, no blades
  • Controlled via Alexa

Cons

  • Somewhat loud

Dyson’s Pure Hot + Cool HP07 is a multi-functional tool that won’t get in the way once winter turns to spring. This is because, at its heart, the HP07 is a tool meant for making your air livable, no matter the season on air temps. In winter, it warms as a 1500-watt heater, and in summer, it cools. In spring and fall, you can keep running it; its air filtration system still sorts out dust and allergens as small as 0.3 microns in diameter

There’s a lot to like about the design of the HP07 as well. In the same vein as many of the best air purifiers, it has a dual-filtration design. Carbon filters sort through organic matter, while HEPA filtration gets the fine particles. Plus, it uses a bladeless fan, making it super safe for curious fingers as well. Finally, the whole thing is controllable via Alexa, making for easy, hands-free temperature adjustments. We consider this heater to be one of the best space heaters.

Best smart: GoveeLife Smart Electric Heater

GoveeLife

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This programmable ceramic heater provides heat on your schedule.

Specs

  • Power source: Electric (1500W)
  • Size: 7.87 x 7.87 x 25.59 inches
  • Placement: Freestanding
  • Heating style: Ceramic convection

Pros

  • Contains 24-hour timer
  • Smart voice controls for Google, Alexa, and IFTTT
  • Easy to use
  • Tip over and overheat protection

Cons

  • Internal thermostat not perfect

If you’re the type that looks forward to getting into your garage after a long day of work, the thought of wasting time waiting for the temp to rise can be painful. That’s why we like the GoveeLife, which can be controlled via smart-home devices/assistants and has a 24-hour timer for heating that works around your schedule.

The control system for this heater is highly reviewed for its ease of use. Once you’ve connected the heater to your WiFi and the GoveeLife app or your smart system, things go pretty smoothly. It’s also only ~8 pounds, so positioning it where you want won’t be difficult. And if that weight scares you due to the possibility of pets or curious children knocking it over, do be aware that it has tip-over protection alongside the usual overheating protection.

Best personal: Mr. Heater F215100 “Little Buddy”

Mr. Heater

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This works perfectly for a single person needing heat by their side at all times.

Specs

  • Power source: Propane
  • Size: 11 x 11 x 11 inches
  • Placement: Freestanding
  • Heating style: Radiant

Pros

  • Hot local heat
  • Tip over protection and low-oxygen shutoff
  • Uses convenient, disposable propane cylinders
  • Nearly silent

Cons

  • Needs (small) ventilation area

It’s easy to get too fancy with your garage heating, warming up the whole place, when a little buddy could do the trick. For occasional garage use where you just need a warm boost, Mr. Heater’s “Little Buddy” is there for you. With a single one-pound, easy-to-install canister of propane, it produces over five hours of warm heat in a small area surrounding it. The Little Buddy runs quietly.

Despite its small size and an allowance for indoor usage, the Mr. Heater Little Buddy does require a small amount of ventilation. If there are any issues, a low-oxygen shutoff will turn off the Little Buddy immediately, and it has tip-over protection in case you knock it over.

Best overhead: Comfort Zone CZQTV5M

Comfort Zone

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Pushing out radiant heat and functioning as a light source, this heater will help you get work done.

Specs

  • Power source: Electric (1500W)
  • Size: 5.25 x 26.5 x 14.3 inches
  • Placement: Overhead, ceiling mount
  • Heating style: Infrared

Pros

  • Dual heat and lighting action
  • Safety grill for active workspaces
  • Adjusts to 90-degrees
  • Overheat detection

Cons

  • Limited control options

Typically, the rule of hot air rising prevails, eliminating the ability to have effective overhead heating options. However, as one of the best infrared heaters, which push out heat in a ray-like manner), this product allows you to circumvent this seeming law. The Comfort Zone CZQTV5M’s combination of radiant heater and overhead lamp works wonderfully in this regard; if its light can reach you, so can its heat. This fantastic combination makes it one of the best garage heaters for those doing work on top of a table or workstation, especially at night.

The Comfort Zone CZQTV5M features a solid metallic frame with a sturdy mounting bracket to be affixed above the workstation in your garage or in a central location that works for you. Below the mounting area, a 90-degree angle of rotation will allow you to pivot that vital light and heater combo. A protective keeps stray two-by-fours from smashing up anything important. The Comfort Zone CZQTV5M has two heat settings, 750W and 1500W, though we wish there were a few more as you might want to dim the heat more as you build up inner heat from working.

Best propane: Mr. Heater F299730 

Mr. Heater

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Provides the flame-based heat propane lovers crave.

Specs

  • Power source: Propane
  • Size: 28 x 10 x 26 inches
  • Placement: Freestanding or wall-mounted
  • Heating style: Blue flame convection

Pros

  • Provides blue flame heat you can see
  • CSA-certified for safety plus low-oxygen shut-off
  • Includes thermostat and mounting gear
  • No batteries or electricity required

Cons

  • Propane can be tricky to use

The Mr. Heater propane heater provides the reliable flame-based heat that we often think of when “heater” pops into our minds. That’s because it is powered by propane, not electricity. This means that you’ll be required to connect it to a propane source, such as a tank, and keep that source filled, but also means that you’ll have a source of heat that can get you through winter power outages. (And keep enough tanks in the storage shed, and you can run those grills and fire pits, as well.)

Those worried about safety issues from gas will be happy to know that Mr. Heater uses a low-oxygen detector, which shuts the gas off on the off chance that dangerous conditions are detected. It is also made to be indoor safe, is CSA-certified, and does not require venting.

Best 240V electric: Dr. Heater DR966

Dr. Heater

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This affordable heater is perfect for your 240V hookup.

Specs

  • Power source: Electric (6000W)
  • Size: 14.5 x 13 x 14.5 inches
  • Placement: Wall mounted
  • Heating style: Infrared

Pros

  • Intense heat
  • UL-certified safety
  • Works well with large, uninsulated garages

Cons

  • Requires 240V plug

Americans run on 110/120V appliances. That’s how our electricity grid delivers power. Unfortunately, many of the best garage heaters (at least in terms of power) take a 240V approach. If you don’t already have 240V capabilities installed in your garage, it can be a hassle, but if you do, consider the Dr. Heater DR966.

It pumps out heat at 6,000 watts (or 3,000 for a lower heat setting), which is about four times the rate that typical 120V heaters do. The point-and-shoot infrared style makes it the best for longer garages with “leaky,” uninsulated walls.

Best for open garage: Briza Infrared Patio Heater 

Briza

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Tripod-standing heat that extends the warmth of your garage.

Specs

  • Power source: Electric (1500W)
  • Size: 35.5 x 4 x 4 inches (element)
  • Placement: Freestanding (on tripod)
  • Heating style: Infrared

Pros

  • Functions safely outside of garage
  • Wide heating element
  • Included tripod
  • Automatic shut-off safety

Cons

  • Limited range for heating

Many of us like to keep the garage door open, extending our working area out into the driveway. This is especially critical if we’re sawing due to the dust, or need the open air to prevent getting knocked out by toxic fumes. The Briza, which works indoors and out, can safely extend the warmth of your garage into the area outside of it. With an IP55 rating, it is quite safe even under a drizzle, and you can be sure it won’t be taken out by a plume of sawdust.

Lengthwise, the Briza is nearly a yard long, giving you a healthy amount of steps outside of your garage while still aligning next to it. The infrared heating element only warms for about 6 feet, however. This makes the strategic play to put the Briza in parallel with your driveway, maximizing your garage “extension.” When not in use as one of the best garage heaters, the Briza also turns out to be one of the best patio heaters.

Best budget: Amazon Basics Oscillating Ceramic Heater

Amazon Basics

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is the best freestanding heater under $50.

Specs

  • Power source: Electric (1500W)
  • Size: 7.52 x 6.34 x 10.04 inches
  • Placement: Freestanding
  • Heating style: Ceramic convection

Pros

  • Highly affordable
  • ETL-list and TUV-certified
  • Tip-over protection and overheating shut-off
  • Even heating throughout garage

Cons

  • Lacks advanced features
  • Not for high-humidity areas

The Amazon Basics ceramic heater is a very basic style of heater that is simple to use. Just plug it in and turn it on to start pumping out warm air. This version, which oscillates, helps disperse the warmth evenly throughout your garage. If you want the heat closer to you, moving the Amazon Basics ceramic heater about your garage is easy, even if you’re carrying other things due to its carrying handle.

Admittedly, the biggest draw of this heater is that it has a low price. Even before sales and discounts, you can get three of these for about $100. What really counts is that it doesn’t skimp on having a quality fan, a reasonably long power cord, or safety certifications and features. However, it should be noted that Amazon warns against usage in “high humidity rooms,” which, if you live in certain regions, could include your garage. Otherwise, this is the best garage heater for those on a strict budget.

What to consider before buying garage heaters

While you may have a solid grasp of what you want in your garage, it is quite possible there are some lingering questions about what makes the best garage heaters worth it for your setup and lifestyle. Plus, safety is incredibly important for heaters, so you’ll want to understand these features fully.

Usage style

The most important thing to consider when buying a garage heater, or anything for that matter, is how you will use it. This consideration weighed heavily on our minds when choosing the reward categories above, and it should for you, as well, as you peruse garage heaters.

What follows is a listing of common customer self-descriptions, alongside the considerations and recommendations we make for those customers:

I hate being chilled before getting in my car in the morning. If you’ve just stepped out of the shower, have wet hair, and need to go to work, the walk from your warm home to your car is highly unpleasant. Your garage heater should be located next to your garage entrance, possibly wall-mounted. Radiant, infrared heat works well in this case, as the heat stays “local” better than other heaters, but many heating styles will work. Remote turn-on and turn-off are essential for your needs. We consider this to be one of the most common types of garage heater consumers, which is a large reason why the Heat Storm Phoenix Wi-Fi Edition is our overall best garage heater.

I want to use my garage. You have a lot more options. Spend more time considering ideal placement as well as your favorite type of heating when choosing your garage heater. If you already have a 240V connection, use it. In general, though, convection heaters are the best garage heaters for people who spend larger amounts of time in them.

I want to tinker in my garage. The ideal heater for the tinkerer will either be an overhead infrared heater that can warm the hands directly or a nearby convection heater. Infrared choices will work particularly well if you work in one place and mainly have trouble with exposed areas of the body, such as the hands, getting cold. They’re also the heater of choice for drafty, open garages. A convection heater will work fine, too, and provide better full-body heating in enclosed garages.

Compatibility

It may seem strange to consider compatibility when talking about heating, but the fact is that not every heater will suit your garage. High-powered 240V heaters may not work for you if you’re an American and don’t have suitable adaptations in place. The result could be anything from an underpowered heater to damage to your machinery.

Similarly, if you aren’t already comfortable with propane usage, connecting tubes and tanks may be a challenge. Those systems may be incompatible with you.

Safety

Heat, fires, and gasses are all deadly. Understanding what safety mechanisms and regulations are in play, as well as a bit of chemistry, is vital for picking out the best garage heaters.

By and large, the two most common types of safety features for heaters are tip-over protection and overheating shut-off. The first turns the heater off when it is knocked over to prevent rugs, carpets, or other flammable objects from getting too much heat from being knocked over by you, your pets, or your children. The latter keeps the machine from burning too hot. Depending on the company, they may go by slightly different names, and “automatic shut-off” may mean one or both of these features. Remember that wall-mounted and ceiling-mounted garage heaters may not need tip-over protection.

Safety certifications are another assurance that the product you are buying, if used with proper care, is safe. The common UL and ETL listings indicate that a third party has evaluated the product for safety. The two labels are nearly identical in meaning. TUV certifications show that a series of critical “tests” have been passed. For example, the TUV electric room heaters certification mark requires IPX4, a safety test, and production was monitored.

For propane heaters, the safety of propane itself may be an issue. Low-oxygen sensors are common for such heaters and will automatically turn the heater off. These sensors, also known as “Oxygen Depletion Sensors,” may not fully work in situations where there is incomplete combustion, however. Still, it should be noted that—when working properly—propane heaters give off little to no Carbon Monoxide. As all things can malfunction, we still recommend using one of the best carbon monoxide detectors whenever using propane indoors.

FAQs

Q: How much does a garage heater cost?

A garage heater can cost anywhere from under $50 to over $250. This is a highly diverse product category, with some products aiming to heat the whole garage and others just the area you work in. For reasonable quality heat, start in the $100s and work your way from there.

Q: What is the most efficient heater for a garage?

The most efficient heater for a garage is a heater that heats the people (and pets) inside of it. Don’t get hung up on garage size or getting every nook and cranny warm if it isn’t necessary. A radiant or infrared heater that focuses its “attention” on you can be far superior to a convection heater in the right circumstances.

Q: Is it worth it to heat your garage?

If it makes you more comfortable, it is worth it to heat your garage even if you aren’t in it all the time. Nowadays, garage heaters can be used for short, intense bursts, and controlled remotely, making them highly efficient even if you don’t linger in the garage.

Final thoughts on the best garage heaters

By purchasing one of the above garage heaters, you will be able to tackle a variety of situations in your garage and come out warmer and happier. As mentioned previously, the best garage heaters are those that alleviate human-centric issues first and conform to the needs of your garage second. No matter what your needs, or the kind of garage you have, you should be able to find a suitable garage heater on the preceding list.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best garage heaters in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best electric fireplaces in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-electric-fireplaces/ Tue, 29 Aug 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=566042
The best electric fireplaces composited
Stan Horaczek

Imagine yourself plopped in front of an electric fireplace, watching TikToks in the most luxurious, least messy way possible.

The post The best electric fireplaces in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best electric fireplaces composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Dimplex Featherston electric fireplace Dimplex Featherston
SEE IT

This is the best mixture of features and cost for most people.

Best TV stand Ameriwood electric fireplace Ameriwood Home Farmington
SEE IT

Built-in storage and ample surface space make this ideal for supporting a TV.

Best budget Duraflame Electric Infrared Quartz Fireplace Duraflame Electric Infrared Quartz Fireplace
SEE IT

Get all the warmth and flickering flame without lighting cash on fire.

Electric fireplaces save you the trouble of bringing logs (and potentially bugs) into your home. These simple setups provide the heat and glow of a real fire with only a small fraction of the effort. There’s simply something romantic about being curled up with a person, pet, book, or smartphone in front of a warm, flickering fireplace without being covered in sweat and sap. So, curl up, save yourself from “woodchopper’s back,” and grab one of the best electric fireplaces to warm your home in both temperature and vibe.

How we chose the best electric fireplaces

Traditional fireplaces create smoke, even when using the best fire logs (the Duraflame Gold Firelog burns an incredible 80 percent cleaner than wood). As a result, they typically have to reside in very specific locations around the home. However, we’ve found that people like the freedom and flexibility that come with electric fireplaces. It’s a huge upgrade in terms of design and usability. At the same time, aesthetics still matter, and they need to fit in your space. While some truly wild designs exist, we populated this list with models that will fit most spaces—though be warned, they’re all larger than most space heaters. Some also come in different colors so that you can customize and coordinate them with your decor. As with all heat sources, both impressive heat output and quality safety features are paramount. Any time a gadget intentionally creates heat, you want to opt for a brand with a solid reputation for build quality.

The best electric fireplaces: Reviews & Recommendations

With electric fireplaces, you don’t have to know how to build a fire. Plus, you’ll save a tree and avoid the smoke, which could possibly be worse than wood stove air pollution. The best electric fireplaces are versatile machines with robust safety features, fine looks, and great heating capabilities. If you’re shivering in anticipation of there being a chill in the air, check out our top picks.

Best overall: Dimplex Featherston

Why it made the cut: Transform any wall into a rock fireplace; no chimney or cutting required.

Specs

  • Size: 16 x 61 x 44 inches
  • Installation: Mounts to wall
  • Heat control: Thermostat
  • Heats rooms up to: 1,000 square feet

Pros

  • Transformative for any wall
  • Realistic flame, logs, and mantel
  • Quiet heating fan
  • Surprisingly easy to assemble

Cons

  • Heavy and expensive

Some electric fireplaces don’t blend seamlessly with the space around them. The Dimplex Featherston, however, deftly integrates itself into a room.

How does it fare? The Dimplex Featherston has an impressive stone mantel with wood offsets. Far from being a cheap, plastic imitation, this electric fireplace is heavy and solid, weighing over 300 pounds. It mounts firmly to the wall, so you don’t have to worry about kids or pets knocking it loose. Despite its size and weight, the assembly is rather quick and easy, taking about an hour or less for most people.

Inside the Dimplex Featherston’s rocky exterior is a firebox that puts out 5,118 BTUs of heat, providing supplemental heat for rooms up to 1,000 square feet in size. Visually, the firebox imitates natural wood burning with a patented technique to give the logs an apparent glow.

Overall, the Dimplex Featherston is a transformative experience for your wall. Placed and anchored, it will appear like a traditional fireplace. As a result, it is quite expensive, rather heavy (again, over 300 pounds), and might not be for everyone. But if you want a sturdy, attractive model that will last, this is the pick.

Best for existing fireplaces: PuraFlame Klaus 

Why it made the cut: This perfectly fills the spot where a “real” fireplace would go.

Specs

  • Size: Check available sizes
  • Installation: Insert
  • Heat control: 750/1500W plus thermostat
  • Heats rooms up to: 400 square feet

Pros

  • Fits in recessed areas of homes meant for fireplaces
  • Visual and sound effects
  • Remotely controlled power, thermostat, and effects

Cons

  • Cannot be hardwired.

What happens when a house already has a fireplace that barely gets used? They can be dangerous, require a constant supply of (potentially insect-housing) logs, have no temperature adjustment, etc. They’re unsightly when not in use and throw soot in the house when not. But this space begs to be filled, and the PuraFlame Klaus does a great job.

Praised for its realistic appearance, the PuraFlame Klaus will give your dead, unused fireplace recess a usable, safe alternative. Lively, flickering logs that look as if they are filled with the spirit and energy of flame fill its interior, with their intensity and brightness changeable over three settings. Its built-in speaker provides your choice of six crackling sounds. And you can safely keep the logs there during the summer months without inviting beetles. It looks good year-round.

During usage, you’ll also find the PuraFlame Klaus a worthy alternative to a real fireplace. Unlike a real blaze, you can adjust its temperature via remote control and a thermostat option. It gives up to 400 square feet of supplemental heat. It has exceptionally positive customer ratings for its performance and ease of installation.

Best TV stand: Ameriwood Home Farmington

Why it made the cut: This freestanding model supports a large TV with style.

Specs

  • Size: 15.69 x 59.61 x 29.37 inches
  • Installation: Freestanding
  • Heat control: Low / High
  • Heats rooms up to: 400 square feet

Pros

  • For TVs up to 60-inches wide or 95 pounds
  • Highly rated for heat output
  • Convenient shelf for consoles
  • Quick toggle settings via remote

Cons

  • A bit delicate
  • Difficult assembly

This TV stand electric fireplace combines the best features of a TV stand and infrared heating to make a powerful, effective combo. The stand’s design (and size) varies a bit by “color” selection, with wooden designs appearing rustic and invoking feelings of country living. White “ivory” color designs will blend in more with modern homes.

Those that recall our examination of the best infrared heaters will know why we like this one so much. For one, the Ameriwood electric fireplace, by using infrared, will provide radiant heat that feels almost “sunlike” in nature. This gives a toasty fireplace feeling. One downside of infrared heating is that it travels like light, in a line, instead of heating the air. By placing an infrared heater in an electric fireplace TV stand, Ameriwood effectively solves this issue since most users will be facing the TV anyhow.

The gorgeous look of the replicated fire combined with its radiant feel are big selling points for the Ameriwood. However, it should be noted that with these good looks comes some delicateness. Be careful when assembling the product and moving the (heavy) box into your home, or you might scratch its exterior.

Best wall mounted: R.W.FLAME 60-Inch Recessed and Wall Mounted Electric Fireplace

Why it made the cut: With dazzling colors and recessed optionality, the R.W.FLAME is a clear winner.

Specs

  • Size: Models between 30 and 68 inches wide
  • Installation: Wall-mount or recessed
  • Heat control: 750 and 1500 W modes
  • Heats rooms up to: 400 square foot

Pros

  • Fun, digital aesthetics with lots of color modes and options
  • Timer settings
  • ETL-certified design
  • Overheating shut-off

Cons

  • Finicky remote

For a beautiful wall-mounted or recessed look, try the R.W.FLAME, which can make any wall of your home look like a fireplace. It looks terrific as a wall mount, where it hangs on the wall via a bracket, but once you like it, you can also recess it into the wall, where its (depending on the version you get) 3.85-inch or 6-inch depth can be partially or fully hidden. Take the chance to assess how you like the heating style and location before cutting into your wall, as this electric fireplace (like most others) is meant to heat the space immediately surrounding it, not every inch of the room.

Visually, the R.W.FLAME is renowned for the controllable light show it creates. A bright line of flaming crystal crosses the bottom of the visual pane, from which flames rise. You can set both the crystal and flame colors from 12 choices, with five levels of brightness. The timer also allows it to automatically turn off after one to eight hours, so it won’t waste fuel after you’ve fallen asleep.

Best budget: Duraflame Electric Infrared Quartz Fireplace

John Alexander

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This inexpensive portable electric fireplace is a certified “keeper.”

Specs

  • Size: 13 x 24 x 23.4 inches
  • Installation: Freestanding
  • Heat control: 20-setting thermostat
  • Heats rooms up to: 1,000 square feet

Pros

  • Wide temperature range
  • Runs quiet at <37dB
  • Price
  • Overheating shut-off feature

Cons

  • No tip protection

Duraflame’s Electric Infrared Quartz Fireplace looks like a formidable iron box of fire. In reality, it is an inexpensive, safe-to-use electric fireplace that has significantly fewer returns than the competition. It’s cool to the touch despite heating your room up to temperatures of 82 degrees. Its 10 heat settings—you can increment the heater’s temperature between 62 and 82 degrees—give you a lot of flexibility depending on the day’s needs.

The heater’s ability to work well in 1000 square-foot rooms and to be moved easily accounts for a lot as well. We do wish it had tip-over protection, but it is not fully necessary with responsible usage. The rest of this electric fireplace’s customer satisfaction comes down to its beautiful appearance, practical application as a personal heating unit, and great nighttime usage. Aesthetically speaking, the fireplace itself looks classic and has five light settings to illuminate its artificial flame.

What to consider before buying electric fireplaces

There is a lot to consider when getting an electric fireplace. The styles vary so much in application that it can be difficult to find a one-size-fits-all approach to assessing them. Still, the installation style, safety features that some display, and heat-controlling mechanisms are relatively universal.

Installation

Right off the bat, you’ll have to decide what style you want. Some mount to the wall, while others stand freely. You’ll also find others that offer an insert-style design, which fill in the places where traditional fireplaces might go.

If you’re looking to fill a hole left by a more conventional fireplace that you’re no longer using, electric fireplaces are a no-brainer. In this case, check out the PuraFlame Klaus, which also happens to be among the highest-rated electric fireplaces on the market.

Certain electric fireplaces are affixed to the wall in a way not so dissimilar to that of a flatscreen television. For larger models meant to be flush with the surface, you may see them described as “wall-mounted.” It just means that, while the bottom of the fireplace might touch the floor, the back must mount to the wall for security and to become flush. Wall-mount-style electric fireplaces often create an illusory sense of depth.

Freestanding electric fireplaces will stand on four legs, like a cabinet or other piece of furniture. You’re most likely to see the safety features seen below on freestanding electric fireplaces.

Safety features

As with all heating units, you will likely wish to have some safety features as part of your electric fireplace experience. Here are some terms to look out for:

Automatic shut-off feature: Overheating or “auto-heat kill safety” feature designs work by turning off the unit when it gets too hot. This is good for keeping your room from getting too hot and saving yourself from a fire.

Freestanding units may also have a “tip-over protection” feature that shuts off the device if it is knocked over. This prevents heating elements and fans from pushing hot air directly into carpets or floors for too long. Note that this feature is somewhat more rare on even the best electric fireplaces.

CSA-certified unit: This indicates that the product has a CSA-certified design, which indicates these electric heater safety standards are upheld.

ETL-certified unit: Another common safety standard. It shows that a product meets safety and production standards in the US and Canada.

Heat control

Heat control is one of the most easily overlooked aspects of getting an electric fireplace. You may have a powerful fireplace, but it may have limited utility if you can’t control the temperature. Look for a 3-heat setting dial at minimum, with things like low, medium, and high power. A dial or thermostat with more fine-tuned control is even better. Some models allow for temperature adjustments via app or remote. The point is, don’t overlook having good control over your machine in the pursuit of intense heat output. As the end of fall or the beginning of spring approaches, the best electric fireplaces will serve your needs just as well as they do in the nights of deepest winter.

FAQs

Q: How much does an electric fireplace cost?

An electric fireplace will cost anywhere from just under $100 for a budget model to over $1,000 for a realistic replacement of a real fireplace. If you don’t care about lifelike design but still want quality, you should expect to pay from $150 to $350 for an electric fireplace.

Q: What are the disadvantages of an electric fireplace?

The two main disadvantages of electric fireplaces are that they tend to have a lower maximum heat than other indoor heaters and they don’t work as well outdoors. However, the best electric fireplaces will heat quickly and provide suitable heat for their recommended heating area. As electric fireplaces are meant to replace an indoor thing, they are often not rated for water resistance. Consider using suitable outdoor heating or portable fire pits for outdoor heating. 

Q: Do electric fireplaces really warm a room?

Electric fireplaces warm a room but are typically made more for supplemental heat rather than as a main source of heat for the home. In this way, they simulate the need to gather around the fire to get toasty and warm. If concerned, be sure to check the manufacturer’s recommended room size and heat style before making a purchase.

Final thoughts on the best electric fireplaces

Electric fireplaces come in so many designs and configurations that almost any living space can benefit from one. They provide an extra heat source in the cold months, as well as a soothing light show. It’s a great way to improve the interior of your home without worrying about a supply of wood or regular chimney cleanings. Plus, the best electric fireplaces give you a simple way to control heat and light to your exact taste.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best electric fireplaces in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best 3D printer resin in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-3d-printer-resin/ Tue, 07 Nov 2023 01:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586316
3D printer resin sliced header
Tony Ware

No matter what you want to print, there’s a resin for you.

The post The best 3D printer resin in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
3D printer resin sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Elegoo 8K 3D Printer Resin bottle with a figure next to it over a white background Elegoo 8K 3D Printer Resin
SEE IT

This resin works wonders with today’s best resin 3D printers.

Best value Sunlu ABS-Like Resin (3000G) bottle with a silver warrior figure in front over a white background Sunlu ABS-Like Resin (3000G)
SEE IT

A giant bottle of resin that has an excellent dollar-to-gram ratio.

Best for models black Anycubic 3D Printer Resin bottle with figurine next to it over a white background Anycubic 3D Printer Resin
SEE IT

It is a customer favorite that consistently displays sharp details.

You’ll need 3D printer resin for 3D resin printing if you have a resin 3D printer. It sounds like a tongue twister, but it is just a simple fact. Your printer almost certainly came with some resin, giving you an initial feeling of what your printer is capable of. But did you know that there are tons of styles and colors of resin that can completely redefine your builds? To help you make your next print a true work of art, we compiled a list of the best 3D printer resin bottles you can get, all with different styles and functions.

How we chose the best 3D printer resin

3D printer resin is the base of your prints. As a result, changing up your resin can have a giant effect on the look of your prints. Some resin holds shapes better and is made for premium details, while other resins come in cool colors or can be flexible. The variety is truly surprising, which is why we wanted to bring forward a variety of styles to you, giving you a wide variety of inspiration and intrigue for your next print.

The best 3D printer resin: Reviews & Recommendations

The following 3D printer resins represent the best in their respective categories. Each resin presented is unique in the way that it prints, but similar in that it has been used successfully by hundreds (if not thousands) of customers just like you. The resins here can be thought of as both superior in some way and a means of expression by the printer.

Best overall: Elegoo 8K 3D Printer Resin

Elegoo

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 1000g
  • Colors: Space Grey
  • Characteristic: Opaque model

Pros

  • Supports high-details models
  • Low shrinkage
  • High compatibility
  • Non-brittle, low odor

Cons

  • On the expensive side

If you have an 8K 3D printer, which is considered the top-of-the-line for commercially available products, then you should check out this best-selling resin from Elegoo. It’s designed to be non-brittle and essentially non-shrinking so you can get the most out of detailed print projects. And while you should still ventilate, there will be reduced odors with this product.

While the Elegoo 8K 3D Printer Resin is specifically designed to work with their Saturn 2 8K LCD 3D Printer, it is widely compatible. It should work with nearly any DLP or LCD printer that uses 405nm light. Instead of compatibility, we find the main flaw of this resin to be the price. While not “expensive” it is a bit pricier than most, so it’s best to only grab this if you have a printer that can make use of its talents.

Best transparent: Siraya Tech Craft Ultra-Clear 3D Printer Resin

Siraya Tech

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 1,000g
  • Colors: Ultra-Clear
  • Characteristic: Transparent

Pros

  • Completely see-through
  • Anti-yellowing formula
  • Smooth and glossy after processing

Cons

  • Takes some experimentation

If you’re into painting your models, it doesn’t really matter what the base coloration is. But if you want to peer into your model or use lighting with it, transparent styles are the best 3D printer resin for you. Siraya makes an ultra-clear resin that has an ice-like appearance, becoming even more clear after processing. While the general consensus is that you will need to practice with this resin to get the effect perfect, it does turn out great results. A person with a 3D resin printer for cosplay can really run wild if they’re concentrating on smaller objects, such as baubles and lenses, as can jewelry makers. If you want other cool effects, Siraya Tech Craft Glow-in-the-Dark 3D Printer Resin is a cool alternative.

Best for models: Anycubic 3D Printer Resin

Anycubic

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 1,000g
  • Colors: Gray, black, white, green, clear
  • Characteristic: Opaque

Pros

  • Sharp details
  • Low shrinkage
  • Customer favorite
  • Highly affordable

Cons

  • Easiest to use with Anycubic printers

Our guide to the best 3D printers for miniatures includes at least a couple of Anycubic printers. With resin like this, perfect for miniature makers, it makes sense, too. Anycubic’s 3D Printer Resin has low shrinkage, which might seem odd for miniatures, which you want to be small. However, shrinkage can be unpredictable, causing slight changes to models. As a result, this combined with the Anycubic resin’s ability to hold sharp details, makes it great for small figures. Customers love it for its quality and affordability, too, making it hard to find negatives. We can say, however, that the resin will work best with Anycubic printers, if only for the extensive ideal parameters charts the company provides.

Best color kit: Sunlu 3D Printer Resin Bundle 

Sunlu

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 4 x 500g
  • Colors: Multi-pack (Dark grey, black, clear, clear green)
  • Characteristic: Varies

Pros

  • Lots of variety
  • High (395 to 405nm) compatibility
  • Inspires creativity
  • Other options available

Cons

  • Smaller 500g individual bottles

Committing to a whole bottle of clear or colored resin when you aren’t sure you’ll like it can be costly as well as disappointing. As a result, we recommend getting kits with several bottles of different resins to experiment with. This particular kit has an assortment of solid and transparent colors, though other options exist on the store page, including a set of cute pastel colors. The only thing we don’t love about this set is what comes standard for such packs; the individual packs are smaller.

Best dual color: RepRapper UV Dual Color 3D Resin

RepRapper

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 500g, 1000g
  • Colors: Various
  • Characteristic: Dual color

Pros

  • Cool lighting effects
  • Water washable resin
  • Makes printing an art again

Cons

  • Awkward bottle design

As we get obsessed with the finer points of 3D printing, such as resolution, build area, and print speed, the cool factor can be totally forgotten. The two-tone effects of RepRapper resin bring back the inner artist in the 3D printer, however. Each bottle (coming in 500 or 1,000g, depending on color set) prints in a single resin style. When viewed, however, the two colors will appear in a spectrum depending on the amount of light present. Different angles will also make opposing colors pop out, producing a truly mesmerizing effect.

Best flexible: Superflex 3D Printer Resin

Superflex

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 500g, 1000g, and 5000g
  • Colors: Clear
  • Characteristic: Flexible, transparent

Pros

  • Combines transparent and flexible effects
  • Playful, rubberlike material
  • Maintains durability

Cons

  • Quite expensive

If you want a floppy, rubbery finish to creepy crawlies, tentacles, or unexpected creations like towers, the Superflex 3D Printer Resin is a good choice. While different thicknesses will have it behaving in somewhat different ways, nearly everyone describes it as giving their prints a tough rubber feel. There are some pretty good (and successful) experiments with mixing this resin with other, more standard, resin among community members as well. To be fair, this is a pretty logical thing to do as the Superflex 3D resin does run on the more expensive side.

Best environmentally friendly: Elegoo Plant-Based 3D Printer Resin

Elegoo

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 500g and 1000g
  • Colors: Gray, clear green, and white
  • Characteristic: Opaque or clear

Pros

  • BPA- and benzene-free
  • Soy-based design for less chemicals
  • Highly affordable

Cons

  • Hit or miss on the odor

When we think of environmentally friendly or “green” options, we usually expect to pay a huge price hike. Luckily, Elegoo’s Plant-Based 3D Printer Resin remains affordable while eliminating many chemicals typically found in resin and replacing them with soybean-derived substances. For example, this resin is BPA- and benzene-free so you can feel somewhat safer as you are working with it. One interesting thing about this product is the odor, which customers seem to have strong opinions about. Some report that it has a very low odor, while others completely detest it. No matter your opinion, this remains the best 3D printer resin for reducing your exposure to chemicals.

Best for large batches: Sunlu ABS-Like Resin (3000G)

Sunlu

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 3000g
  • Colors: Black, dark gray, gray, white
  • Characteristic: Opaque

Pros

  • Great cost per gram
  • Tough, non-brittle resin
  • Secure packaging
  • Highly-reviewed product

Cons

  • Mixing can be a challenge

There are a ton of things to like about Sunlu’s ABS-Like resin, as it is a fan favorite in its own right. What we wanted to highlight, however, was the incredible affordability of the 3,000-gram jug of this resin, which is perfect for printing larger sets that need the same characteristics. Its bottle is very secure and easy to use, but mixing large quantities of the resin is known to be a challenge.

Best budget: Monoprice Rapid 3D Printer Resin

Monoprice

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 250g
  • Colors: Black and gray 
  • Characteristic: Opaque

Pros

  • Small, affordable bottles
  • Wide compatibility
  • Perfect for small projects

Cons

  • Bulk buys may be cheaper

While large jugs of resin are great for large projects, if you just print occasionally, the best 3D printer resin for you likely comes in a smaller bottle. We find the Monoprice Rapid 3D Printer Resin to offer the smallest bottles of decent quality resin. While, if your goal is to save money in the long term, large bulk buys may be better, the 250-gram bottle of Monogram Rapid 3D Printer Resin is a fantastic deal for casual printers and is compatible with all UV resin printers.

What to consider before buying 3D printer resin

If you’ve read through our guide to picking the best 3D printer filament for FDM printers, you may already suspect that picking the best 3D printer resin is more difficult. In actuality, it isn’t that difficult. There are some common sense compatibility checks, but there’s a lot of freedom in resin choices you might not expect. Here’s what we looked at and why:

Brand

Brand loyalty isn’t necessarily something to encourage. 3D printers aren’t like home office printers, with companies like HP locking you into using their ink. Even the best 3D printer resin is just a fluid, after all.

That all being said, when a company makes printers and resin, they obviously test them out together. And they’ll tell you which of their printers will work with which resin, including optimal settings that they’ve discovered through large-scale testing. Just look at the Anycubic resin compatibility chart. If you have an Anycubic printer, you know the exact settings to use with this resin. This is one reason why we have resin from most major printer makers represented on the list.

Still, most resin has wide compatibility. If you have a 405nm spectrum printer, you will be able to find a variety of products compatible with it.

Bottle size

If you just want to make just a few prints in a given color or style, a small bottle will do. But what if you want to make a set of figures with the same character? Min-maxing bottle size or buying in bulk makes more sense.

The bottle sizes represented here are usually for 1,000 grams of product. However, bottles as small as 250 grams exist. Similarly, you can find large bottles for 2,000 grams or even 3,000 grams.

Ultimately, it is up to you to figure out what is the best 3D printer resin bottle size for your specific circumstances. However, in much the same way as you should get an extra can of wall paint for later touch-ups, consider grabbing an extra bottle of resin for long-term projects. You never know when your resin of the moment will get discontinued.

Character

Character, texture, color, call it whatever you like, but there is a distinct feel to each type of resin available. While even standard opaque resins will differ from each other in subtle ways, you can find extreme differences if you’re willing to search. With our list of 3D printer resin, you will be able to find something that can make your next project shine.

FAQs

Q: How much does 3D printer resin cost?

3D printer resin can cost as much as $50 per 1,000-gram bottle. Depending on the characteristics, brand, special qualities of the resin, and bottle size, you can find resins for considerably less. If you see a bottle for over $50, we highly recommend pausing and considering if you truly want it.

Q: Is resin or filament better?

Neither resin nor filament is better; rather, they do different things well. Resin 3D printers are good for details, smooth exteriors, and cool effects but use more hazardous materials and require curing. FDM printers, which use filament, are easier and generally safer to use but are typically of a lower resolution and are more likely to show “z-layers” after printing.

Q: What is the best type of resin printer?

The best resin 3D printers typically come from Anycubic or Elegoo. Just about anybody will be happy with the Anycubic Photon Mono X, though absolute beginners should go with the Elegoo Mars 3. If you’re on a budget, try the Creality Halot-One.

Final thoughts on the best 3D printer resin

The preceding list includes opaque, transparent, glow-in-the-dark, two-tone, and flexible resins. Though there are certainly others, we feel like these should give you a chance to open your creativity in the near future. 3D printing isn’t only a way to create copies of things entered into a printer, it is a craft and a way to express your true creativity. From standard, solid resins to neat light tricks, it really does feel that a resin 3D printer can do it all.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best 3D printer resin in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best 3D printers for miniatures in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-3d-printers-for-miniatures/ Fri, 27 Oct 2023 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=583856
four of the The best 3D printers for miniatures composited into a collage
Stan Horaczek

A 3D printer for miniatures can make gaming a whole lot more fun and accessible all while encouraging creativity.

The post The best 3D printers for miniatures in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
four of the The best 3D printers for miniatures composited into a collage
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Anycubic Photon Mono X 6Ks with accessories on a plain background Anycubic Photon Mono X 6Ks
SEE IT

This advanced printer creates smooth, flawless objects without obvious layering.

Best for kids Toybox 3D Printer Toybox 3D printer
SEE IT

The simple printing process helps little ones avoid the 3D printing learning curve.

Best for large armies Elegoo Mars 4 Max Elegoo Mars 4 Max
SEE IT

A large print area helps this chunky printer create multiple miniatures at once.

Whether you want to play an established wargame, roleplay your own scenarios, or make replacement meeples for your favorite board game, you likely want a 3D printer for miniatures. Instead of being focused on large-scale print areas, miniatures lovers want 3D printers that can get heavy detail even when the print outcome is small. But should you go for FDM or resin? Is the 3D printer going to be too complicated? The questions go on and on. Depending on your desires, you might want to make different choices. No matter what, though, we have the perfect suggestions for the best 3D printers for miniatures across the board.

How we chose the best 3D printers for miniatures

Everyone games differently, so we designed this list to cover a wide area. While many such lists are (rightfully) filled with resin printers only, we found this approach to be too narrow for the typical reader. Our top model will print models with intricate details from resin, but, simply put, not everyone is ready for a resin 3D printer. Having alternatives that are suitable for people of all skill levels, including children, felt more plausible. We also wished to highlight other hobby aspects and find suitable choices for those with alternative needs. Our selections are based on a combination of editorial reviews, hands-on experience, spec comparisons, user reviews, and brand reputation.

The best 3D printers for miniatures: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether you’re into casual accessories or competitive cosplay, 3D printers can be an invaluable accessory. And one of the premier pieces of excitement for commercial at-home 3D printer usage is the ability to make figurines, models, and minis of your choice. We highly encourage this excitement with the following list of 3D printers for miniatures, with options available for those of all ages and experience levels. Here are some options ideal for your next session.

Best overall: Anycubic Photon Mono X 6Ks

Anycubic

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Anycubic will satisfy your desire for intense detail.

Specs

  • Type: Resin
  • Filament supported: (Resin)
  • Size: 13.77 x 21.25 x 13.33 inches
  • Print area: 195 x 122 x 200mm
  • Resolution: 6K (5760 x 3600)

Pros

  • Intense resolution for superior model details
  • Nearly imperceptible layers
  • Good price-to-quality ratio
  • Excellent for large “hero” models

Cons

  • Not good for beginners

If you’re looking for one of the best quality resin printers to max out the style of your army or D&D player character stand-in, try out the Anycubic Photon Mono X 6Ks. It’s a highly-detailed cousin of the Anycubic Photon 3D printers that you’ll see throughout our listing of the best resin 3D printers, a category of 3D printing that is known for its ability to produce intricate figurines. Much like its relatives that live on that list, Anycubic’s Photon Mono X 6Ks provides great value for the cost and a beautiful touchscreen display.

Its 6K resolution provides miniatures that look fluid and organic in construction, less than layered constructs. While its tall build area won’t necessarily be useful if you’re printing out a Napoleonic regiment, it will serve you well in your plights to make a towering, angry ogre or a stand-in for your player character.

Ultimately, the only thing that isn’t “good” about the Anycubic Photon Mono X 6Ks is its lack of accessibility for beginners. In fact, this isn’t a slight against it. Using a resin-based 3D printer is no easy feat; at 6K, this one is expected to be more advanced than its peers. By the time you’re ready for it, you’re expected to be an established 3D printer with a proper room layout for this machine. If that doesn’t feel like you, we’ve got items that will be more your size later on this list.

Best for large armies: Elegoo Mars 4 Max

Why it made the cut: Get the horde of your dreams in a weekend or two with Elegoo.

Specs

  • Type: Resin
  • Filament supported: (Resin)
  • Size: 9.69 x 9.06 x 17.83 inches
  • Print area: 195.84 × 122.4 × 150 mm
  • Resolution: 6K (5760 x 3600)

Pros

  • Prints up to 70mm per hour
  • Decent build area
  • Supportive community
  • Educational videos available

Cons

  • Instructional manual can be confusing

Printing models one at a time is okay, but you can also get small platoons out of a printer if you try hard enough. You’ll likely enjoy the Elegoo Mars Max 4’s build area, which can support multiple entities and print speed up to 70mm per hour. Want to get started with a war game in just a weekend? Watch this man’s massive army creation in a weekend tutorial, based on a pair of the older Elegoo Mars 2. Imitate it with the modern Elegoo Mars Max 4 and confer with the community about further ideas to make your print one of the best around.

Such is the way with the Elegoo community. Internally, there is a tendency to admit the instruction manuals tend towards the arcane side at parts, but many are active to help you get over the humps, including on the Elegoo subreddit. The company has also released comprehensive online tutorials to smooth the learning process. In other words, if you have trouble, someone has your back.

Best for terrain: Bambu Lab P1P

Bambu

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A huge print area and fast printing speed means you can move mountains (to the table) easily!

Specs

  • Type: FDM
  • Filament supported: PLA, ABS, PETG, etc.
  • Size: 15.2 x 15.3 x 18 inches
  • Print area: 10 x 10 x 10 inches
  • Resolution: N/A

Pros

  • Incredibly fast running
  • Multi-color printing options available
  • Large build area
  • Beginner approved

Cons

  • Low resolution

If you already have an officially sanctioned army of store-bought figurines, you might’ve found that you wanted to populate your battlefield with campaign-specific terrain. Or perhaps a spiral staircase ornament makes the perfect dungeon prop. And who can forget the hedgerows of Normandy?

To make these battlefield and roleplay essentials, the Bambu Lab P1P is probably your best bet. It has a large print area, and it gets the job done fast, with mountains and hedgerows being printed at a standard rate of 500 mm/s. Despite the speed, the print plate’s vibration compensation also ensures you’ll get a good, non-wobbly product (including on the critical first layer).

The best part is that you won’t have to do too much to get all these results, either. Once set up, it’s ready to go. This quick setup and go is one of the main reasons the Bambu Labs P1P is also featured as one of the best 3D printers for beginners.

This isn’t to say, however, that the printer can’t get more complex as you grow into it. There are options for adding multiple colors to the printing and an attachable time-lapse camera. Really, the only thing not perfect about this printer is the FDM-tier resolution, but that shouldn’t get in the way of you enjoying yourself, especially for terrain.

Best for kids: Toybox 3D Printer

Toybox

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It may not pull the same level of detail as a resin printer, but even children can operate it.

Specs

  • Type: FDM
  • Filament supported: PLA
  • Size: 7.4 x 7.4 x 9.05 inches
  • Print area: 7 x 8 x 9 cm
  • Resolution: 200 microns

Pros

  • Child friendly
  • Ready to use in minutes
  • Online catalog with miniatures

Cons

  • Low resolution

The Toybox 3D Printer is a simple-to-use 3D printer that can be set up in less than an hour by just about anybody, including first-time users. When connected via WiFi to your phone and computer, you can select from 100s of models to print, no sizing or editing required. As long as children know not to touch the (very) hot filament extruder, they should be able to operate the machine 90 percent on their own, with responsible pre-teens needing next to no supervision. However, don’t let age scare you away, as people of all ages can enjoy this 3D printer.

Searching for ‘miniatures’ on the Toybox website reveals a set of “DnD Miniatures” as well as things like a goblin assassin, orc smasher, and other generic fantasy creatures. If that’s not enough, you can even import models from special files, though this is an admittedly advanced feature.

One thing that our Toybox 3D Printer review pointed out that is quite relevant here is how much stuff you can get out of the filament provided. Even though additional filament from Toybox remains cheap, expect to get well over a dozen prints from what you originally sent before considering buying more.

Best budget: Anycubic Photon Mono 2

Why it made the cut: You don’t have to spend an arm and a leg for a resin printer.

Specs

  • Type: Resin
  • Filament supported: (Resin)
  • Size: 15.4 x 9.01 x 9.25 inches
  • Print area: 6.5 x 3.5 x 5.6 inches
  • Resolution: 4K

Pros

  • 4K resolution on the cheap
  • No grid lines
  • Includes gloves, funnel, spatula, and other necessary tools

Cons

  • Requires manual leveling

Looking at the quality and intensity of resin 3D printers today, it can seem like you would always have to shell out hundreds of dollars to acquire one. The Anycubic Photon Mono 2, however, is here to prove that sentiment wrong, providing 4K printing with no grid lines under $250.

To add even more bang for your buck, the kit includes other essentials like gloves, a funnel, leveling paper, a screen protector kit, and a pair of spatulas. You’ll even get a USB drive to keep your print files (or whatever else you want) on. The main thing that is missing is an automatic leveler, but manual leveling is worth taking the time to figure out in exchange for a printer of this price.

What to consider before buying 3D printers for miniatures

The fact of the matter is getting the best 3D printers for miniatures depends on a lot of factors, including the aims of your gaming, what kind of miniatures you want to print, and how picky you are about appearances. And that’s all before we consider budget. While we can recommend an overall best that will suit the needs of the largest number of typical customers, the reality is no one printer will be the best for everyone in this category.

Here, we will go through a number of choices and decisions you will have to make on your purchasing journey, highlighting what will be best for each type of miniature printer consumer.

Resolution vs. size

Typically, when we discuss 3D printers, especially for general audiences, the print’s size will be emphasized. This statistic, also known as its “build area” or “print area,” makes sense to focus on for most people. Bigger equals more.

However, in the world of 3D printers for miniatures, the printer’s resolution plays a more important role. Small, defined placement of FDM or controller light exposure (resin printers tend to have better resolution) can create models with incredible smoothness that look beautiful and organic. They’re a far cry from layered creations. The printers that aren’t of the super highest resolution on this list aren’t producing blocky constructs, to be clear, but the difference is noticeable.

Note that size can still be an important factor in miniatures, especially if you want to print large terrain features or sets of armies in a single batch. Also, note that decent resolution and print area are not mutually exclusive properties; you can get both. But if cost is a limiting factor, you should nearly always go with the highest resolution 3D printer for miniatures available, even if you have to sacrifice a bit of print area to get it.

Resin vs. FDM

So, we’ve established resolution rules when it comes to selecting the best 3D printers for miniatures. We’ve also touched on the point that, in general, resin 3D printers reign supreme in the resolution department. In fact, many websites will only recommend resin printers when choosing the best 3D printers for minis.

We’ve decided to go a different route and believe the choice isn’t as cut and dried as others make it out to be.

The reason is that resin 3D printers are more involved and can be dangerous if you aren’t willing to take your time and do things properly. Curing is involved, you need gloves, and the resin itself is toxic.

For a casual printer looking for reasonably good models, an FDM printer is best. And, to be clear, you can get perfectly good-looking models from FDM printers, no doubt about it.

On the other hand, expert printers and those looking for an involved hobby should choose resin printers, as they will ultimately produce the best product.

Print speed

If your goal is to print out a single miniature to represent your DnD character, print speed largely doesn’t matter. Just start the printing up and come back later. No problem.

Similarly, if you’re fine with reusing the same miniatures again and again, speed won’t be too much of an issue. Those bayonet-wielding Napoleonic musketmen are basically orc chainsaw gunmen, right?

But, if you want a new large army for each game, batches start to become important. As we previously mentioned, size can mitigate this to some degree, but if you’re a serial printer, time will eventually add up to something big.

For FDM printers, expect between 20mm and 70mm per second. The higher that number is, the faster it’ll print. Resin printers print entire layers at a time, so they’re faster for creating multiple minis at the same time.

FAQs

Q: How much does a 3D printer for miniatures cost?

Typically, a 3D printer for miniatures will cost at least $300. Anything more than that shouldn’t come as a shock, either. If you can find one for under $300, such as with the Anycubic Photon Mono 2, be sure to look at the drawbacks (in this case, no automatic leveling) and make sure you can handle them.

Q: What is the disadvantage of FDM printing?

When it comes to making miniatures, the disadvantage of FDM printing is lower resolution. However, we don’t believe that should discourage you, as a good paint job and a bit of imagination will go a long way. While we do acknowledge that the very best 3D printers for miniatures are resin printers, not everyone can be expected to use them effectively. As a result, depending on your level of commitment to the hobby, the disadvantages of an FDM printer can easily be overcome.

Q: Is it legal to sell 3D-printed miniatures?

First and foremost: We are not lawyers, and if you really want to know if your actions are legal, you should consult an actual lawyer. This advice is only for informational purposes. The laws and regulations may differ in your state, country, or region. In general, it should be legal to sell 3D-printed miniatures as long as you own the IP rights to what is printed.

Final thoughts on the best 3D printers for miniatures

Getting started using a 3D printer for your miniatures hobby does not need to be a difficult task. Whether you want to go for a complex machine that can build detailed 8K 3D sculptures or a simple FDM printer that makes quality miniatures anyone can produce, you can find it on the preceding list.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best 3D printers for miniatures in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best smart home security systems of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-smart-home-security-systems/ Thu, 02 Feb 2023 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=509217
A lineup of the best smart home security systems on a white background.
Amanda Reed

How smart is a home that doesn’t feel secure? Here’s how to feel safer in 2023 with the help of intelligent protective tech.

The post The best smart home security systems of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best smart home security systems on a white background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A white SimpliSafe 10-piece smart home security system on a blue and white background. SimpliSafe 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System
SEE IT

Comes with everything you need for security inside and outside your home.

Best customer service A Ring 14-piece security system on a blue and white background Ring Alarm Pro, 14-Piece
SEE IT

Talk to a real person and get your questions answered fast.

Best budget A Tolviviov smart home security system on a blue and white background Tolviviov Wi-Fi Door Alarm System
SEE IT

Easy to use for people of all technical skill levels.

If you’re worried about crime impacting your household, it makes perfect sense to buy one of the many smart home security systems that have popped up over the past few years. However, with abundance comes analysis paralysis. To what system should the savvy, safety-conscious consumer turn? We investigated the market to bring you the best smart home security systems so you can pick the best choice for your living situation and loved ones.

How we chose the best smart home security systems

While nearly every product you buy enters your home at some point, there is something particularly intimate about inviting in a smart home security system. Unlike shoes—something that only needs to function well enough when called upon—your smart home security system needs to function perfectly 24/7/365. That’s why one of the bigger ranking factors this time was brand satisfaction. Cybersecurity and data protection were other key factors because, while less is often more, in the world of security more really is more. You’re only as strong as your weakest entry point.

This guide was compiled after many hours of careful research; facts and opinions were cross-examined by editors. Ordinary users were asked about their experiences using these devices, and we interacted with customer service agents throughout the course of compiling this guide. Each company’s personal website and plan information were thoroughly checked for the most up-to-date service plan information possible.

The best smart home security systems: Reviews & Recommendations

Our selection of smart home security systems comes from a wide variety of well-known and trusted brands with a broad array of attached services. While kits differ, they all typically include sensors for your doors and/or windows and an alerting mechanism. One of our picks is sure to match your budget and lifestyle.

Best overall: SimpliSafe 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System

SimpliSafe

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The SimpliSafe 10-Piece system is a very complete kit that starts the security before your door is opened.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Easy
  • Sensors: 4 door/window sensors, 2 motion sensors, 1 indoor camera, 1 outdoor camera
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: $28/mo. (Optional)
  • Smart protocols: N/A, but Alexa- and Nest-compatible

Pros

  • Outdoor cam so your security starts before an intruder enters your home
  • Comes with one free month of 24/7 professional monitoring service
  • The variety of parts gives you a more complete sense of security
  • Optics and branding

Cons

  • Must learn to set up each part correctly

If you’re looking for a system that is essentially complete directly out of the box, the SimpliSafe 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System is the kit for you. It includes a variety of sensors and indoor and outdoor cameras, meaning you should feel fully protected in your home. While each piece is easy to install in and of itself, you’ll have to learn and think about the placement of each part—however, you’ll be able to handle it on your own if you can handle a strip of 3M tape or a screwdriver. Let’s review each part individually to get a good picture of how they will function together in your home:

The SimpliSafe base can hold up to 100 SimpliSafe security devices and is the central hub for your equipment. It is also capable of emitting a 95dB alarm. The push-button keypad lets you arm and disarm the system with a PIN. Having four entry point door/window sensors will allow you to protect the primary entryways to your home, while the two motion sensors—which are designed to be pet friendly and decorative—protect the areas of your home with too many entry points or windows.

What makes the SimpliSafe 10-piece system better than the 12-piece version is the inclusion of both an indoor and an outdoor camera. Suppose you’re used to the grainy, near-worthless security cam footage often seen in local news coverage. In that case, you’ll be particularly happy with the full colors, 1080p quality, and night vision offered by SimpliSafe. For those concerned with privacy, the indoor camera comes with a stainless steel shutter, so you won’t have to worry about having your private moments enter someone’s data tables.

Finally, the package set comes with an official SimpliSafe flag that declares your home protected by SimpliSafe. While no one can guarantee that this will deter all criminals, there will be at least a few that will back down.

Best customer service: Ring Alarm Pro, 14-Piece

Ring

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Go from dialing a number to “Hello” in 1 minute, 18 seconds.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Easy
  • Sensors: 8 door/window sensors, 2 motion sensors
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: Between $4-$20/mo. (Optional)
  • Smart protocols: Z-wave

Pros

  • Fantastic phone technical support
  • Dual keypads for increased flexibility
  • Provides range extender for large homes
  • Multiple 24/7 monitoring plans to choose from

Cons

  • Overhyped WiFi functionality

The Ring Alarm Pro 14-Piece set has fantastic customer service and is a great smart home security system for larger homes. Its impressive networking and dual keypad design (some home security systems only allow for one keypad) allow for larger coverage areas than some of the best smart home security systems. With customizable ringtones, you’ll always know which door is being opened in your home. The Ring Alarm Pro even comes with Wi-Fi 6 functionality via its hub. This feature is handy but gets a bit overhyped, sometimes eclipsing what counts—there are better Wi-Fi 6 routers out there.

What should you get excited about with the Ring Alarm Pro? A very approachable DIY setup where a real human is there to help you quickly. After just a few button taps to specify exactly what we wanted, we could—right here, right now—contact a customer service agent 1 minute and 18 seconds after dialing Ring’s customer service.

Best monitoring: ADT 8-Piece Wireless Home Security System

ADT

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: ADT is amongst the most experienced and best professional monitoring companies.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Intermediate
  • Sensors: 4 door/window sensors, 1 motion detector 
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: $19.99/mo. (Optional)
  • Smart protocols: Z-wave

Pros

  • Highly experienced monitoring team
  • Perfect size for families
  • Optics and branding

Cons

  • Occasional installation snags
  • Only works in the U.S.

The ADT 8-Piece Wireless Home Security System is all you need to get started with the highly regarded ADT security model. It’s a brand that takes itself seriously, providing a yard sign to let customers proudly display their security status on the lawn. Sure, it is part marketing, but it’s also part confidence in the ADT name alone being able to ward off potential neighborhood thieves.

The package itself includes door/window sensors and a motion sensor, with the kit being targeted to owners of two- or three-bedroom homes. While not difficult, installing the sensors can take some time as you manually pair and label each one within your system. You can install them using the included adhesive backing or a more traditional screw-in technique. The time investment should feel closer to “weekend project” than “plug’n’play” for the typical first-time user.

When combined with the optional professional monitoring from ADT, it can almost feel as if you have a dedicated housesitter while you’re away.

Best modular: Wyze Home Security Core Kit

Wyze

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Wyze’s Home Security Core Kit is just that, a quality core kit that can be easily added to as needed.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Easy
  • Sensors: 2 door/window sensors, 1 motion sensor
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: $9.99/mo
  • Smart protocols: N/A

Pros

  • Very affordable and complete starter kit
  • Comes with three months of free professional monitoring
  • Can easily add on more sensors or cameras
  • Guided setup via Wyze app

Cons

  • Service plan essential
  • Only works in U.S.

If you prefer to wade through new technology instead of diving directly into the deep end, the Wyze Home Security Core Kit will be the best smart home security system for you. For starters, the core kit itself is very affordable, covers two entry points plus a room of your choice, and provides months of complimentary professional monitoring service to give you a taste of how Wyze works.

Once you’ve decided how much you like the system, you can start adding more components immediately. Finish off the rest of your home’s entry points with more door/window sensors, or transform your setup into a video surveillance system by adding a Wyze cam. Leak and home climate sensors are also available.

The modularity, as well as the stick-on setup guided by the Wyze app, gives the Wyze Home Security Core Kit a very DIY air to it. You can be confident that you, by yourself, should be able to install it. Unfortunately, the rugged individualism this inspires is dropped down a notch—it requires a 24/7 monitoring subscription for the device to truly shine. You’ll just have sensors, but the keypad won’t work after the three-month free trial runs out. The Wyze Cam add-on will also lose smart features and extended storage. Still, the service is cheaper than market averages, you probably wanted it anyway.

Most compatible: Abode Security System Starter Kit

Abode

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Abode goes way beyond just Z-wave and Zigbee.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Easy
  • Sensors: 1 door/window sensor, 1 motion sensor
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: Between $7-$22/mo. (Semi-optional)
  • Smart protocols: Zigbee, Z-wave, Homekit, IFTTT

Pros

  • Connects and works with just about anything
  • Variable professional monitoring options
  • Sub-30-minute total setup time
  • Easily expandable

Cons

  • Limited sensors in starter kit
  • Reviews note poor customer service

Can’t decide between Zigbee and Z-wave, so want access to both? Not sure if you want to use Alexa or opt for a Google home security system? Need HomeKit or IFTTT support? It’s time to look at an Abode Security System, a home security system that connects with all of these in some way.

The Abode Security System Starter Kit is a perfect way to get set up with the system, as it includes the main hub, a couple of sensors, and a key fob. You’ll find it surprisingly easy to set up and get going—even technological turtles report installation times of under 30 minutes—but will quickly find yourself wanting other pieces if you don’t have, for example, home security cameras from an existing, compatible system. If you decide to stick with Abode products, you can choose from glass break sensors, water leak sensors, smoke alarms, and indoor/outdoor cameras to tailor the system to your needs.

While all owners have access to alerts and live video feeds, more “advanced” features—such as video storage—require you to subscribe to one of Abode’s plans, either the Standard (self-monitoring) or Pro (professional monitoring).

Best budget: Tolviviov Wi-Fi Door Alarm System

Tolviviov

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is the best smart home security system under $100.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Easy
  • Sensors: 5 door/window sensors
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: No
  • Smart protocols: N/A

Pros

  • Simple to use system with keychain fob and app control
  • Very loud alarm
  • Affordable for all pricing
  • No monthly payments

Cons

  • Supported by 2.4GHz Wi-Fi network only
  • Lower brand recognition

If you’re wanting to avoid overly techy solutions to your problems and save money in the long run while doing so, the Tolviviov Wi-Fi Door Alarm System is worth checking out. Tolviviov systems, in addition to being budget-friendly, also happen to be the best smart home security systems for elderly people due to their extremely loud alarm systems and manual keychain controls. It still has app functionality, including Alexa support, for those wanting a more modern feel.

Considering the price range, it shouldn’t be surprising that the Tolviviov system doesn’t have a professional monitoring system. However, this lack comes with a silver lining, as systems with professional monitoring on a recurring monthly subscription often tie other features into it. With the Tolviviov, what you see is what you get. A loud siren to alert you to entries, app alerts that tell you what sensor was disturbed, and the option for Alexa voice support. It’s simple, but it works.

The main concerns for the Tolviviov system are its connections and brand recognition. The Tolviviov only works with the 2.4GHz Wi-Fi band. Be prepared to isolate the 2.4GHz band. Lastly, the brand recognition just isn’t there yet. Sure, the super loud alarm will make burglars scram, but you won’t get the same response from the name “Tolviviov” that you will from an “ADT” sign in your yard or a Ring video doorbell near your front door.

What to consider when buying the best smart home security systems

From the surface, the best smart home security systems appear to be quite similar, just different collections of the same parts. This is compounded by the fact that, when things are running smoothly, our residential security systems blend into the background of our lives. However, if you do even a tiny amount of digging, you’ll see that there is more complexity in both the hardware and the included customer service plans than meets the eye.

Options for 24/7 professional monitoring

If you have a smart home security system that alerts you when intruders come into your home, or when your house faces other problems, you are all in the clear, right? While it is a nice thought, it is potentially untrue if you are incapacitated or unable to reach your phone to assess the threat (such as while out at work or on vacation).

Typically, 24/7 professional monitoring services come as part of a subscription fee, usually around $30 per month. While all systems retain some functionality without the subscription, others only provide limited service without the full subscription.

Zigbee and/or Z-wave connection

Much like Wi-Fi, Zigbee and Z-Wave represent frequency bands that can connect the pieces of your smart home security system together. Zigbee systems typically run faster, but burn through batteries quicker, while Z-Wave systems can have a bit of response delay but require less battery maintenance work.

In reality, which of the two systems is better depends on your overall network. If you have a lot of Z-Wave products already, going with another Z-Wave device is great because they are all mandated to work together. Zigbee devices can usually “find” each other but don’t always interconnect in a fully functioning way, sorta like pairing non-Apple headphones to your iPhone via Bluetooth. 

Another possibility includes using neither system and operating solely through Wi-Fi and the system’s own proprietary hub. If you are looking for a smart home security system and not a full smart home network, this should be fine. Alternatively, super-compatible systems can connect to both networks and have other connection options as well. Whether you want to go with Zigbee or Z-Wave or both is entirely up to you.

Branding and flags

Some smart home security systems have a flag to stick in your lawn to scare potential thieves away. Some customers are happy to see it, but others are skeptical about the usefulness of a sign to deter thieves, who might use the info to “crack” through the system.

What does the science say? Our friends at Bob Vila took a deep dive into the research on security signs and crime deterrence. Here are some of their findings:

  • ~25% of criminals will skip a home with a security sign.
  • ~50% of criminals will skip a home with a security sign and a visible camera.
  • The optimal locations for such signs are in a place visible from the street and in the backyard.
  • Branding matters. A recognizable or easily searched-for brand name works best to convince thieves your home is really protected.

Privacy

Whenever you bring something into your home, you want to feel comfortable about your privacy. This goes doubly so for home security products that can record and monitor the inside of your home. As such, you should pay particular attention to a brand’s privacy track record.

Take, for instance, the recent controversy over Anker’s eufy brand, which promised end-to-end encryption but didn’t deliver. If that wasn’t damaging enough, the company’s initial response was to merely change their privacy commitment statement. They’ve since come clean, but the sour taste still lingers.

For full transparency, this is not the only brand to have publicly suffered a privacy breach. In 2021, a former ADT technician pleaded guilty to charges of criminal spying while employed at the company. Important things to note here are how well ADT handled the situation compared to eufy, that their internal procedures and systems have since been changed to reduce the likelihood of a similar situation happening in the future, and that this was an incident involving a single employee and not the company at large. The ADT system in this guide does not include a camera.

FAQs

Q: How much does a smart home security system cost?

A smart home security system can cost anywhere from under $80 to over $400. You should also leave room in your budget for a monitoring subscription, which typically costs between $20 and $40. Overall, smart home security systems are highly affordable and shouldn’t outprice other smart gear for your home.

Q: What is the highest-rated home security system?

The highest-rated home security systems come from SimpliSafe and Ring. With new products and bundles being released regularly, as well as shifting prices, consumer ratings for individual bundles may fluctuate over time. That being said, highly regarded product bundles from both companies can receive a coveted 4.7 stars or higher on Amazon after hundreds (or even thousands) of reviews.

Q: Is smart home security worth it?

Smart home security is worth it if you are nervous about the safety of your home or neighborhood. Some systems can check for flooding and fires as well. With 24/7 professional monitoring, you also have access to a team that is ready to help you and alert authorities in case of an emergency. People wanting smaller, less extensive security should consider smart doorbells as a potential alternative.

Q: Is SimpliSafe better than Wyze?

It depends on what you want in a system. SimpliSafe is among the highest-rated smart home security systems, and the SimpliSafe 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System is our personal pick for the best smart home security system due to its high-quality performance and complete coverage. This isn’t to say that Wyze systems are bad, as the Wyze Home Security Core Kit is a premium choice for those that want a custom, modular system.

Final thoughts on the best smart home security systems

Getting one of the best smart home security systems in 2023 is not as difficult as in years past. Installation should be smoother due to the simplicity of wireless Zigbee, Z-Wave, and Wi-Fi connections that can integrate these systems with the existing smart home gadgets you already own. With app integration and voice support, you can get the truly convenient home security you desire.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best smart home security systems of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best monitors for streaming in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-monitors-for-streaming/ Sat, 25 Jun 2022 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=450956
The best monitors for streaming
Stan Horaczek

Whether it is for YouTube, Twitch, or just hanging with your buddies on Discord, we’ve got the monitors for your content.

The post The best monitors for streaming in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best monitors for streaming
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall Samsung Odyssey G7 is the best streaming monitor overall. Samsung Odyssey G7
SEE IT

Get that big-screen feel without sacrificing the critical 16:9 aspect ratio.

Best for Twitch ASUS ROG Swift PG259QN is the best monitor for streaming for twitch. ASUS ROG Swift PG259QN
SEE IT

Highly recommended due to its hardcore refresh rate, response time, and Twitch-compatible aspect ratio.

Best budget Acer SB220Q Acer SB220Q
SEE IT

Poured all of your money into a new PC or graphics card upgrade? The Acer SB220Q is for you.

With more and more people live streaming content, you aren’t alone if you are wondering if some monitors for streaming out there perform better than average for creators and consumers of everything from unboxings to speed runs. Monitors are rarely seen when watching someone online, yet they are so vital for the whole streaming experience. For that reason, we’ve put together this round-up of the best monitors for streaming so you won’t have to hope to catch a faint reflection of them in glasses’ frames. 

Thanks to the best webcams for streaming, we’ve all gotten a good look at the headsets and other accessories inside of our favorite streamer’s rooms. Some of the more observant of you might even have a solid idea of the best streaming devices and best mics for streaming already available. Well, read on, and the best monitors to finish your setup will no longer be a mystery. 

How we selected the best monitors for streaming

Streaming is an incredibly diverse field. In just a few hours of watching streamers you’re likely to see a huge assortment of content: From Maya in the great, bright outdoors working with wildlife to MoonMoon cursing at Mario in a dark room … from a woodblock printmaker showing detailed shots of his knife work to intensive screen transitions from the two-time himself, DrDisrespect, creators have different needs and uses for monitors.

The result is that it is difficult to select a monitor that is the very best for all streamers. Instead, we looked at monitors that are good for categories like gaming, sitting down and working for long hours, and also a few specialty monitors, like those that work well on the go. We also made sure to consider the current monitors of top streamers and the monitors we predicted they’d buy if they were to buy a new one right now. Combining personal experience, research on high-profile personalities, critical consensus, and user impressions, we narrowed down our list.

Best monitors for streaming: Reviews & Recommendations

Generally speaking, the best monitors for streaming are the best monitors for gaming that have a useful aspect ratio. They also tend to be monitors that keep your head and neck comfortable after many hours of streaming … gotta grind out those ranks, after all. We’ve also included an IRL streaming pick, for streaming on the go, due to the massive surge in popularity of that category. Many of them have already been top-streamer tested or belong to product lines used by your favorite eCelebrities. These are our best monitors for streaming.

Best overall: Samsung Odyssey G7

Samsung

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is one of the best monitors around, with a possible 240Hz refresh rate and that big-screen feel while keeping the preferred 16:9 ratio.

Specs

  • Aspect ratio: 16:9
  • Refresh rate: Up to 240Hz
  • Response time: 1ms

Pros

  • Competitive response time
  • Elegantly curved display
  • Low eye strain

Cons

  • Expensive

The Samsung Odyssey G7 is a monitor that provides a consistently comfortable gaming and streaming experience. With a 31.5-inch curved screen utilizing WQHD level resolution, you get that big-screen feel without sacrificing the critical 16:9 aspect ratio.

If you’re into grinding out the hours in your streamer chair, you’ll be happy to know that it also ranks as a top monitor for reduced eye strain. This is largely in part due to the max refresh rate of 240Hz and the quick 1ms response time all displayed on a comfortably curved screen. What’s even better for the streamer is the fact that these factors also contribute to getting the best KDA in the squad.

When it comes time to complain about this monitor, it can be difficult. However, there is one spec we just don’t like so much about this monitor: the price. While it outclasses the competition in so many ways, we just wish that this wasn’t one of them.

Best for Twitch: ASUS ROG Swift PG259QN

ASUS

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It has a top-of-the-line refresh rate and response time with about as much eye care as you can pack into a premium gaming monitor, all while maintaining that key 16:9 aspect ratio.

Specs

  • Aspect ratio: 16:9
  • Refresh rate: 360Hz
  • Response time: 1ms

Pros

  • Impressively high max refresh rate
  • TUV-certified flicker-free and low blue light tech
  • Good connectivity (HDMI 2.0, DisplayPort, USB)

Cons

  • Included stand quite large

The ASUS ROG Swift comes highly recommended for any Twitch streamer looking to make it big in FPS or battle royale games due to its hardcore refresh rate, response time, and Twitch-compatible aspect ratio. It even has great maneuverability for neck comfort and TUV Eye Comfort Certification for those 14+ hour weekend stream marathons. Anyone familiar with the streaming powerhouse XQC will find themselves drawn to this ASUS due to his time with its predecessor, the ASUS ROG Swift 258Q.

Aside from long hours of use, you’ll also find that the ASUS ROG Swift has great connectivity options, with USB and HDMI 2.0 alongside the somewhat better DisplayPort for the best possible frame rate.

The main irritation with this monitor is that the included stand is quite expansive. While it is sturdy and doesn’t shake easily, the stand is just about as wide as the monitor itself and has some depth to it, too. Consider using a wall mount to conserve desk space.

Best for gaming: BenQ ZOWIE XL2546K

BenQ

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This monitor is used by some of the best gaming streamers in the world and has the specs needed to be a top FPS player.

Specs

  • Aspect ratio: 16:9
  • Refresh rate: 240Hz
  • Response time: 1 ms 

Pros

  • Dynamic Accuracy Plus tech for low blur
  • Smaller stand base than predecessor
  • Intensive response time
  • FPS Pro-Grade refresh rate

Cons

  • Duller colors than predecessor

Used by YouTube’s favorite medical unprofessional, DrDisrespect, the BenQ ZOWIE XL2546K is an overall upgrade to the very popular BenQ ZOWIE XL2540. While retaining a lot of the power of the previous model, it comes in an upgraded package with even more FPS-playing potential.

The Dynamic Accuracy Plus (DyAc⁺) used by BenQ nearly eliminates motion blur. Where the typical LCD monitor will have an intermediary softer color between a flash white and a return to black, the BenQ ZOWIE XL2546K will skip this to produce a crisp transition between colors. When coupled with a 1ms response time, this tech can give you the edge you deserve when you need to get precise headshots and track CS:GO recoil patterns down to the pixel.

We like how it compares to the previous model overall. Not only is the response time better, but it also has a much smaller base at approximately 20% smaller. We weren’t as impressed with the vividness of the colors, which appeared somewhat dull. There’s no other way to put it, though, this monitor will take the top 20% of FPS players to the next level of gaming.

Best for live streaming IRL: ARZOPA Portable Monitor 2K

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Arzopa’s monitor is a portable, high-resolution screen to bring to your next LAN party.

Specs

  • Aspect Ratio: 16:10
  • Response time: N/A
  • Refresh rate: 60Hz

Pros

  • Compact size
  • High-resolution screen
  • Three inputs

Cons

  • USB-C ports on one side
  • Exact response time not given

If you want to bring a monitor to your next LAN party—especially to connect to a gaming laptop–Arzopa’s 2K display is our recommendation. The 13.3-inch display’s namesake feature is its 2K (2560 x 1600), which, combined with its support of HDR and ultra-thin profile, makes it a pretty powerful portable screen. In our tests, which were mostly conducted by doing office work with some light Apple Arcade gaming, the monitor performed well. ARZOPA doesn’t provide any response time metrics, but the 60Hz display didn’t show any noticeable lag at any point during our tests. Gamers who play first-person shooter titles may want to the company’s G1 portable display, which offers a 144Hz refresh rate but only HD resolution.

This monitor has two USB-C ports and can be powered from your computer, though the company includes a USB power adapter in the box if you don’t want to drain your computer. If you have a PC or Mac with a Thunderbolt 3 port, setting up this display during your LAN party will be a simple, single-cable affair. If your computer has an HDMI port, the company has a separate cable in the box. Once it’s connected, you can control the display’s settings—brightness, color profile, contrast, etc—by pressing a switch on its left side. We recommend futzing around with these settings at home, so you can hop into a game the moment you get to your friend’s house.

Most 13.3-inch portable monitors are only 1080P, and the extra resolution on Arzopa’s 2K display will make a big difference for gamers. The ability to play titles at a higher resolution will reveal even more of its details. Plus, the portable display can be used to help you get work done when you put your controller down.

Consider an iPad a monitor? The 12.9-inch M2 iPad Pro is another portable screen to consider.

Best for Mac: Apple Studio Display

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: It’s expensive and not without issues, but Apple’s Studio Display is an attainable 5K display with all the design flourishes you’d expect from an Apple product.

Specs

  • Aspect ratio: 16:10
  • Response time: 20ms
  • Refresh rate: 60Hz

Pros

  • 5K display has plenty of room for a game and settings panel
  • Designed with the Mac in mind
  • 12-megapixel webcam will work in a pinch

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Low response time

The Mac hasn’t been a dominant game platform since the 1980s. Still, Apple is trying to change that by building in a lot of graphical horsepower into machines running its custom-designed M-Series processors, which debuted in late 2020. If you have one of those machines and want to get into streaming, the Apple Studio Display finally delivers on the promise of a high-end monitor made by Apple for its desktop fans and MacBook aficionados.

Its ultra-high resolution means you can run a 1080P game, streaming settings, and chat on a single screen with no compromises. It only has a Thunderbolt 3 port for video connectivity, but that won’t be an issue since all Macs released since 2016 have that port. The most significant benefit of using a display designed by Apple is that it fits neatly into the company’s hardware ecosystem. The MacBook Pro we used while testing the display immediately connected to the monitor each time we connected it.

If you haven’t invested in a webcam for streaming, this monitor does have a built-in 12MP cam, but its quality is compromised because of a feature called Center Stage, which crops its image and can pan around to keep you in the frame. Still, knowing you’ll always have a camera connected to your streaming machine is comforting. If macOS is your platform of choice, and you’d like to see if Apple’s commitment to gaming is sincere, this is the monitor to pair with an ultra-responsive mouse as your battlestation.

Best budget: Acer SB220Q

Acer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is a reliable Acer with a price that is nearly impossible to beat, made perfect for chill “Hearthstone” card-slinging or grinding TFT ranks.

Specs

  • Aspect ratio: 16:9
  • Refresh rate: 75Hz
  • Response time: 4ms

Pros

  • Great refresh rate for the cost
  • Good enough response time for average gamers
  • Image quality for everyday gaming

Cons

  • No VESA mounting

For many streamers, especially those starting out or who want to focus on slower-paced games, getting a super-advanced monitor isn’t a great choice. A quality affordable monitor, like Acer’s SB220Q makes a lot more sense.

Looking at the raw stats, you see a monitor that pushes way above its paygrade. The monitor has a surprisingly high refresh rate of 75Hz in a tier where you’d usually expect 60Hz. For all but the very top players, the 4ms response time of this humble Acer won’t be any different than the 1ms response times sported by some monitors over four times this one’s cost. Additionally, not all games are so twitchy and reaction-based. A Top 100 “Hearthstone Battlegrounds” player is going to do just as well on this as they will anything else.

Really, the only thing we don’t like about it is that you can’t use your own mount with it as it doesn’t have VESA holes. The mount it comes with is okay, but losing the potential for options is always a bummer.

What to consider before buying monitors for streaming

The No. 1 thing to consider is what kind of streamer you want to be. There is always some extra that might fit your particular niche the best. Be creative and work with your audience. Despite how much they enjoy OMEGALUL’ing your every failure, they really do care about your gaming experience, stream quality, and overall well-being. Well, at least, sorta.

Aside from niche favorites, there are some key things that pop up more frequently than others, including screen resolution, response time, and screen flicker. Aspect ratio, in particular, plays a unique role in livestreamed video gaming that you just might not expect.

Aspect ratio

For most streamers, the best aspect ratio for a monitor will be 16:9. The details of why that is the case are a bit lengthy, but worth learning if you want to stream.

Understanding what aspect ratio is and how it affects your streaming experience can be a bit tricky. Aspect ratio falls into a similar category as resolution, as it is a ratio of pixels. Where it diverges from resolution, however, is that it directly describes the rectangular shape of your screen.

The aspect ratio of your monitor can give you a good idea about how it will look. A 2:1 aspect ratio monitor could be 2 feet across and 1 foot up OR 6 feet across and 3 feet up. The vertical-to-horizontal ratio stays the same.

Stream hosting sites have standard viewing windows that can adjust to different viewers’ browser window sizes. Twitch and YouTube both default to 16:9 for this. Try changing your browser window size while watching a stream and see the display automatically adjust. The website automatically adjusts the image size to fit your window based on the aspect ratio selected.

How does this translate to the streaming experience? When aspect ratios don’t match, stream hosting services have to squeeze everything into a smaller space, shrinking the visible area. This can also happen even if you adjust the aspect ratio of your stream away from the 16:9 default if your viewers don’t have equivalent monitors to match.

To get around this, ultrawide streamers have to play games windowed, use specialized software, or find some other way around the issue. The result is a friction between what the viewer and streamer see on the screen, which is undesirable for all. Again, it is best to keep to a 16:9 ratio for a streaming monitor, or keep as close to it as possible.

Refresh rate

Refresh rate is going to be something that affects you, the streamer, directly more than it does the audience. While lower refresh rates can contribute to eye fatigue, which possibly lowers stream length, the biggest deal will be when you’re trying to edge out those headshots in FPS games or avoiding getting ganked in your MOBA of choice.

Refresh rates are measured in Hertz, or Hz, and reflect the number of times per second that a monitor’s image refreshes. The higher, the better, these typically start at around 60 Hz and start to level off around 144Hz, but there are those that go beyond.

For slow, tactical games like “Sid Meier’s Civilization” or casual “Hearthstone BG” runs, this won’t be a huge factor for you. However, when you’re in a 3-on-1 situation in the last minutes of a battle royale, it could make all of the difference in the world.

Response time

Another metric of screen changes, response time tells us how fast it takes a pixel on the monitor to go from one color to another. Measured in milliseconds, the testing usually covers the time to change from white to black or one shade of gray to another.

Much like refresh rate, above, this can make a lot of difference to your performance while playing fast games, especially FPS games. Additionally, it is another factor in the trailing white line behind your rapidly moving white cursor on dark-mode’d websites.

You should strive for a response time around 5 milliseconds or less, but a little bit over won’t affect the average individual too much. To put it into perspective, a blink takes about 150 milliseconds, so an extra millisecond or two in your monitor’s response time isn’t going to make a huge difference unless you’re in the top few percent of players in your game.

FAQs

Q: How much does a monitor for streaming cost?

A monitor for streaming can cost anywhere from just over $100 to well over $500. When budgeting for a monitor for streaming, you should consider at what level your streaming will be done at. While it is tempting to imagine yourself shooting up into the ranks of streamer stardom, the average streamer on Twitch will never clear 100 viewers.

Q: Can I stream with only one monitor?

You can stream with only one monitor, but it is advisable to use two. Typically, you’ll want to have your main monitor full-screened with the game you’re playing and use a second monitor to keep an eye on the chat. This gives you a chance to keep up with the conversation, actively ban bad actors before the chat gets derailed, and provide a better sense of community to keep viewers coming back.

Q: Do monitors affect streaming?

Yes, monitors affect streaming. For one, the aspect ratio you use affects how viewers see what you’re streaming. That’s why we recommend a standard 16:9 aspect ratio. Next, a monitor can also affect your performance as a gamer or monitor user. High-quality monitors can take top-tier gamers to the next levels in reaction-intensive genres, like FPS. Low-quality monitors that hurt your eyes, on the other hand, will make streaming feel monotonous and more like a chore than a passion. The result will be a low-energy stream without the hype required to get viewers to smash that follow button.

Final thoughts on the best monitors for streaming

Getting a high-quality gaming monitor, like the Samsung Odyssey G7, will go a long way for you in your streaming career or hobby. At the same time, I also feel certain that any of the monitors on our list (except the ZenScreen) has all of the qualities necessary to be the main monitor for anyone ready to start dedicating themselves to streaming. Now, go order your monitor, say your “Kappa 1, 2, 3,” and get that stream started!

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best monitors for streaming in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best monitors for programming in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-monitors-for-programming/ Thu, 30 Jun 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=452595
The best monitors for programming composited
Stan Horaczek

Get through a long day of coding with comfort using one of our top picks for programmer-friendly displays.

The post The best monitors for programming in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best monitors for programming composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall LG 34WN80C-B UltraWide Monitor is the best monitor overall for programming. LG 34WN80C-B UltraWide Monitor
SEE IT

Plenty of display real estate, plus the ability to split the screen, make this wall-mountable USB-C monitor extra efficient.

Best 4K The HP 27-inch UHD is one of the best monitors for gaming. HP 27-inch 4K UHD
SEE IT

Ultra-thin bezels, blue light protection, low-blur technology, and great tilt range make for an optimum viewing option.

Best budget Samsung Business S27R650FDN is the best value monitor for programming. Samsung Business S27R650FDN
SEE IT

Wide viewing angles, plus equally robust connectivity options, are packed in an energy-saving easy on the eyes display.

Programming and living behind a screen are basically synonymous—so for high-quality coding and study, you deserve comfort, and an optimized monitor for programming is a great place to start. While the stereotype of the hacking coder, slouched into a chair, wearing a hoodie, and blasting their eyes with a bright screen in a dark room is fun, the result will only be a horrible experience. Instead, if you’re a real coder of today, you probably realize you have a long, steady career ahead of you. Increased comfort and feeling good on the job will lead to a fruitful workday and a clear head, ready to innovate. With work from home not going anywhere soon, especially in the knowledge work sector, it is falling more and more on the shoulders of the worker to get their own computer equipment. As a result, we invite you to consider upgrading your life with one of our best monitors for programming picks.

How we chose the best monitors for programming

Staring at screens, typing out notes, and looking through comparison tables is something both the writer and the programmer handle on a daily basis, so personal experience helped guide this guide. Discussing the matter of picking a monitor with software engineers themselves helps, too, of course, with key concerns, including size and resolution. I also looked at user impressions, their concerns, and what critics see as coming trends, such as more working from home; for these reasons, I adjusted toward results that prioritize comfort and eye health after long-term usage.

Ultimately, good monitors for programming are good monitors for computing. Expect to see some overlap in how programming monitors are evaluated with other categories of monitors, such as gaming monitors and trading monitors, etc. The key differences, such as being used for work activities with less chances of a break, will be where we put in a significant portion of our comparison efforts. Still, a good monitor will always be a good monitor.

The best monitors for programming: Reviews & Recommendations

The best monitors for programming include a wide range of brands, makes, and features. Again, a good monitor for programming will be good for a wide variety of uses. Any of the monitors on this list will be good for any purpose but also have some qualities that give them the edge over the competition regarding quality coding time.

Best overall: LG 34WN80C-B UltraWide Monitor

Why it made the cut: This monitor is ultrawide, the perfect size, and has on-screen controls to make it the best possible experience for people wanting to use multiple windows at once.

Specs

  • Size: 34”
  • Resolution: 3440 x 1440 pixels
  • Screen: Anti-glare, Hard coating

Pros

  • Built-in screen-splitting options
  • USB-C works great with the MacBook Pro
  • Excellent height adjustability for neck comfort
  • 100 x 100 VESA wall-mountable

Cons

  • Expensive

The LG 34WN80C-B Ultrawide is designed for intensive programming at home. This is seen in its On-Screen tech, maneuverability, and MacBook Pro connectivity. It is also one of the best ultrawide monitors for working at home.

The first way this can be seen is through the huge customization ability available through LG’s On-Screen control options. Using this feature, you can subdivide your screen into defined boxes. Click, drag, and pop your relevant windows into place to fill each section and get the most out of the monitor. You’ll notice that you have space for debugging windows, coding screens, GitHub pages, and more all on one monitor without feeling cramped. Naturally, the 34-inch ultrawide size of this LG plays into that, but the on-screen controls will certainly pull their weight.

Next, let’s talk about maneuverability. This monitor does a great job of accommodating coders of any height by having just over half a foot of vertical height adjustment. Furthermore, this is accomplished without finicky knobs or difficult-to-reach panels; you can just move it with your hands, and the spring-loaded mechanism of the stand will take care of the rest.

Finally, consider that this monitor supports USB-C, making it a really good combo with MacBook Pro laptops. Considering that macOS is a preferred programming environment, there’s a good chance that either your current or next company computer will be one. There are other good monitor options for MacBook Pro users, but not all of them will prove to be best for programmers.

Best 4K: HP 27-inch 4K UHD

Why it made the cut: This is a 4K monitor for programming with built-in blue light filtering, excellent tilting, and the ultra-high resolution you deserve.

Specs

  • Size: 27”
  • Resolution: 3840 x 2160 pixels
  • Tilt: 5 degrees forward, 16 degrees backward

Pros

  • AMD FreeSync for low blur
  • Ultra-thin bezel
  • Built-in blue light protection
  • Great backward tilt range

Cons

  • Not VESA compatible for mounting

The HP 27-inch 4K UHD provides a decent size while giving you the 4K resolution you’ll need for intensive graphical projects and standard computer use. The added blue light protection that comes built-in with the monitor is a nice addition for ensuring a couple of crunch hours at night don’t cut into your success the next day.

Multi-monitor setups will particularly enjoy the sub-quarter-inch bezel around the sides of the monitor. Quickly flicking your eyes to your other monitor is comfortable and not immersion-breaking as it can be with some monitors. In fact, if you manage to bump your monitors close enough together, it can feel practically like one monitor from a vision perspective.

One thing I wasn’t so happy about with this monitor was the lack of VESA mount holes. Luckily, the monitor is still quite adjustable with six degrees downward tilt and 17 degrees upward, making this HP great for those who like to tower over your monitor as you work. Ultimately, we think you’ll likely not miss the ability to pair this with a monitor arm unless that happens to be your priority.

It all comes together to give us an outstanding monitor for programming that fits in well with HP’s solid general-purpose monitors. While this HP fits in as the best 4K monitor for programming, you should certainly check out the others if you are an HP fan.

Best value: Samsung Business S27R650FDN

Samsung

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This monitor approaches budget pricing while still having great features for professionals.

Specs

  • Size: 27”
  • Resolution: 1920 x 1080 pixels
  • Viewing angle: 172 degrees

Pros

  • Includes Eye Saver Mode
  • Wide viewing angle for collaboration
  • Full connectivity panel
  • Energy-saving mode

Cons

  • Unreliable DisplayPort connection

The Samsung Business S27R650FDN has “business” right in the name, but does it hold up to being the best value monitor for programming work? Based on the features and specs that Samsung has managed to pour into it, we’d respond with a resounding “yes.” That’s without mentioning one of the most businesslike features of all: its economical energy-saving mode and bargain sticker price.

With workers in mind, the Samsung Business uses the included Eye Saver Mode to reduce blue light from the monitor. Flicker-Free technology is also included to keep your eyes comfortable and feeling rested through a long shift.

Especially useful for teams and collaborative efforts, the Samsung Business has a 172-degree viewing angle and a wide connectivity panel to support a wide range of devices, including those that use USB 3.0 (including B type), USB 2.0, DisplayPort, HDMI, and old school RGB. For those with a ton of devices, this will certainly be the best value monitor for programming. The only caveat to this is that the DisplayPort is touchy and unreliable, dropping for some users.

Best for gaming and programming: Samsung Odyssey G9

Samsung

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Samsung Odyssey G9 is the best monitor for gaming and programming due to its size, resolution, and high-performance gaming screen.

Specs

  • Size: 49”
  • Resolution: 5120 x 1440 pixels
  • Refresh rate: 240Hz

Pros

  • Gigantic screen size
  • Vivid color display
  • Intensive curve

Cons

  • Very expensive

Here’s another fantastic ultrawide option for your gaming and programming pleasure. Much like our pick for the overall best monitor for programming, the Samsung Odyssey G9 provides a massive screen ready to fit many windows, charts, graphs, debug menus, and the like.

What’s different about the G9 is that it is also one of the best ultrawide gaming monitors, with insanely high refresh rates of 240Hz and a 1 millisecond response time. Add the AMD FreeSync technology that ensures that your monitor matches a compatible graphics card frame-by-frame, and you have a recipe for back-to-back after-work headshots.

Additionally, the G9 has a curve at a degree that copies the curve of the human eye. This helps reduce the need to constantly bend your neck to take in the fullness of the screen. That doesn’t mean you’ll never wish to crane your neck or tilt your head while using a G9, of course, but you should notice a subtle reduction in neck and shoulder stress when compared to other curved monitors for programming.

One thing to remember is that the G9 is bigger than nearly any other monitor out there, making it a great choice of large monitor for programming. Unfortunately, the sticker price has had the chance to measure every square inch of the G9 and has been able to keep up with it. While this is certainly not a cheap monitor for programming, it will keep you happy.

Best portable: ASUS ROG Strix (XG16AHPE) 

Terri Williams

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 15.6 inches
  • Resolution: 1920 x 1080
  • Refresh rate: 144Hz

Pros 

  • Very high refresh rate
  • Can be used in landscape and portrait modes,
  • Integrated folding kickstand

Cons

  • Price

It shouldn’t surprise you that the best portable monitor for any task comes from a company that offers excellent, at times affordable, battlestation accessories. The ASUS ROG Strix 15.6-inch portable monitor is one of only a handful of models with a 144Hz refresh rate, which is necessary for gamers but will make cursor and window movement buttery smooth while writing code.

The display also has many features that other portable monitors lack, including a rotating kickstand that allows you to orient the display vertically or horizontally. This kickstand makes the display more solid than the magnetic stands that come with most portable displays. Another nicety is the display’s stereo speakers, which aren’t powerful but will work in a pinch.

ASUS includes several cords with its portable display, including a micro-HDMI to HDMI cable, a USB Type-C cable, and a USB Type-C to A adapter. This means it’ll be able to connect to any computer right out of the box, no additional accessories necessary. One additional useful feature is the universal tripod socket—a hole with a ¼” thread—which makes it convenient to use the portable monitor with a tripod stand. That said, a sleeve, which can be used as a stand, is also included.

If you really want to max out the performance your programming setup, ASUS also makes an even bigger 17.3-inch version of the Strix portable monitor with a 240Hz rwefresh rate. Most people, even gamers, don’t need a 240Hz display, so we recommend the less expensive model.

Best budget: BenQ GW2780

BenQ

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This monitor checks all of the basic boxes, gives you a bit extra, and still has a price tag worthy of the best budget monitor for programming. 

Specs

  • Size: 27”
  • Resolution: 1920 x 1080 pixels
  • Screen: Glossy LED

Pros

  • Intelligent brightness adjustment
  • Wall mountable with 100 x 100 VESA
  • Built-in cable management

Cons

  • Low-quality built-in speakers

Our best budget monitor for programming, the BenQ GW2780, stays cheap but has many nifty features that make it worthwhile for programming or any other purpose. 

You can see the standard features that make it great for programming with the 27-inch screen or its 100 x 100 VESA mount capabilities.

However, the extra features that aren’t costing you any extra make the BenQ outcompete other budget monitor contenders. One cool example is a sensor that adjusts your screen’s brightness for you automatically. Another is the built-in cord control in the stand. Sure, these aren’t features most of you are begging for, but these kinds of thoughtful touches show that BenQ is going the extra mile to make a worthwhile product for the budget tier.

However, one extra you probably won’t love is the included speakers. They’re low-quality and quiet, and even people who aren’t professed audiophiles tend to struggle to like them. If you are in need of some speakers on the cheap, there are quite a few desktop speakers or budget Bluetooth speakers out there that will better suit your needs.

What to consider when buying the best monitors for programming

Getting monitors for programming, much like getting monitors for home offices, can be tricky because you’ll want the monitor to be good for other purposes, too. Luckily, many of the factors that translate to being one of the best monitors for programming, also make for great general monitors. For example, programmers are likely to care a lot about size, but people watching Netflix aren’t complaining about monitors being too big. We’ll examine all of the big factors in this sort of multimodal way, including resolution and comfort.

Size

This one is relatively straightforward. In almost every case, bigger is better. The ability to have multiple windows open at the same time and look at things side-by-side cannot be overstated. Moving your head from one monitor to another can make direct comparisons tricky, whereas having everything ready at a glance will help keep you in a happy programming flow state.

While some people might look at a very large screen and feel overwhelmed, it is easy to make your windows smaller and focus on what is important. You cannot do this the other way around—making windows larger than the screen to be more comfortable. Getting something a tad bigger than you’re used to will likely go fine; you’ll get acclimated to the larger size, but going too small will trap you in.

So, when might it be bad to have a larger monitor? When the monitor is so big that it pushes out your other monitors. Sure, the advantages of side-by-side comparison given by a large monitor are important, but that doesn’t mean that having the ability to throw something up in full screen on another monitor is less important. Finding balance and what works appropriately with your given desk space is critical.

Resolution

In the world of movies, we always seem to see blocky, pixelated coding text. The real world won’t have it. Resolution is the most important factor for getting a crisp, easy-to-look-at picture out of your monitor. The higher the resolution, the more pixels you’ll see in a given patch of monitor space.

Resolution is defined by both numbers and letters, which can be somewhat confusing. The numbers give a reading of the pixels shown, horizontally and vertically. For example, a resolution of 1920 x 1080 shows 1920 pixels from right to left and 1080 pixels from top to bottom. Resolution numbers are often abbreviated to just show the vertical number—1920 x 1080 is known in this system as 1080p.

Letter abbreviations are also commonly used. Some of the most common abbreviations are as follows: FHD (Full High Definition) is 1920 x 1080; QHD (Quad High Definition) is 2560 x 1440; and UHD (Ultra High Definition) is 3840 x 2160. Interestingly, despite only getting to 3,840 pixels wide, this is commonly referred to as 4K.

So, what resolution is good for programming? This is another case of the bigger, the better, but we recommend going for at least 1080p, with 1440p and higher offering the best experience. One often unmentioned but worthy note is that your desktop space changes with your resolution. So, if you’re the type of programmer with about 40 to 50 files and folders on your desktop, plus a dozen or so game shortcuts, then you’ll definitely want to opt for the highest resolution possible!

Comfort

It’s a sad fact, but you’ll probably be working more often than you’d like to be. Be comfortable while you do it. For this review, we’re looking at three key comfort factors that can work for you:

Range of tilt: Your monitor’s ability to tilt will add comfort by increasing the flexibility of its facing. Having a monitor that is tilted too high or too low could have the negative effect of subconsciously forcing your head to match, giving you headaches or unnecessary shoulder tension.

Ability to wall mount: Rigging up your monitor with a reliable wall mount or desk stand will give you the advantages of increased desk space and heightened maneuverability of your monitor. Look for VESA-compatible monitors, with 100 x 100 mounting surfaces giving you the most options in terms of wall mounts to buy and 200 x 200 being an okay alternative for ultrawide monitors.

Eye comfort: Screens that are too bright, glossy, or that suffer from screen flickering can all cause eye discomfort. Nowadays, monitors also provide built-in blue light blocking to improve users’ sleep quality. All of these factors can greatly affect how you perceive your time with your monitor and the quality of your work, so much so that we’d recommend you check out our monitors for eye strain if this is a recurring problem for you.

FAQs

Q: How much does a monitor for programming cost?

A computer monitor for programming will probably cost around $300 to $600, though that can change depending on the category. For example, the best value monitor for programming might come in under $250, while the best monitor for gaming and programming might go over $1,000.

Q: What is a good monitor size for programming?

The best monitors for programming should typically be at least 24 inches, but the bigger, the better. Exceptions obviously exist, such as when you are getting a portable monitor, but the “big equals better” rule will apply to most coders.

Q: How many monitors are good for programming?

Two or three monitors are best for programming. In the modern age, single monitor setups feel limiting for any use but can feel especially straining when you are dealing with multiple windows simultaneously. While our pick for the best monitor for programming, the LG 34WN80C-B UltraWide, has the on-screen tech to make this easier with a single monitor, most monitors do not. At the same time, there can be too much of a good thing—don’t let your desk space get conquered by too many monitors.

Final thoughts on the best monitors for programming

Getting one of the best monitors for programming doesn’t have to be difficult. If you find a monitor that is easy to use in daily life, treats your eyes well, and connects properly with your work computer, then you’ve probably found a decent programming monitor. Still, considering a unique monitor like the LG 34WN80C-B UltraWide or the business-minded Samsung Business S27R650FDN might give you the extra edge you’ve been looking for.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best monitors for programming in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best stud finders for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-stud-finders/ Wed, 02 Aug 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=560644
The best stud finders composited
Stan Horaczek

Every good tool box should include a stud finder to save your walls from destructive guessing games.

The post The best stud finders for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best stud finders composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Zircon MultiScanner A250c on a plain background Zircon MultiScanner A250c
SEE IT

It’s excellent at finding studs, but also provides other functions to add versatility.

Widest scan area Franklin Sensors ProSensor T13 on a plain background Franklin Sensors ProSensor T13
SEE IT

Speed up your search for studs with help from 13 sensors.

Best budget Craftsman Stud Finder Craftsman Stud Finder
SEE IT

You can regularly find this basic finder for under $10.

A stud finder is the sort of thing that feels totally forgettable until you need one. In practice, they’re like the x-ray vision you might’ve imagined using as a kid, but instead of being made to see through walls and gleam hidden secrets, they pretty much exclusively stick to lumber, along with nails and possibly even live wires. Here, we’ll explore this wall-scanning technology for what it really is and, of course, help you pick out the best stud finders for your next project.

How we chose the best stud finders

You’ll find that even the best stud finders are relatively simple devices. Even in 2023, you shouldn’t expect apps, smart AI, or other technologies you’re used to seeing in almost everything nowadays. You should expect batteries—the kind that need to be physically removed and replaced.

Still, even in this world of relatively tame older products, the best stud finders each find a niche to fill or have bonuses that just make sense for you. This could be because the batteries they use also go well with some of your older tools, they get the wide range you want, or they throw in something extra, like a leveler. This is definitely a category where you should avoid overthinking. As a result, we’ve focused on quality products—with a large (and happy) customer base—that fill their niches well and come out at a reasonable price.

The best stud finders: Reviews & Recommendations

The best stud finders for you will typically fill one or more of a few distinct types. Widely used—and customer-approved—products tested repeatedly in practical environments with high margins of success are obvious inclusions. Premium “kitchen sink” varieties that throw in a lot of extras (such as levelers), have tons of sensors over a wide range, and use superior UIs can be attractive options as well. Finally, niche picks and those covering a wide variety of battery requirement options were considered throughout to give everyone a high chance of finding a viable product that meets their standards. Finding the right value for the output helps tremendously as well. Taking all those factors into consideration, these are the stud finders we suggest you put in your tool box.

Best overall: Zircon MultiScanner A250c

Zircon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: When your mind thinks “modern stud finder,” this is probably what you’re picturing—and it works well, too.

Specs

  • Sensors: 1 Stud/metal/wire, Center
  • Battery requirements: 1 x 9-volt
  • Interface: Graphical UI

Pros

  • Incorporates tech to correct user errors
  • “All-in-one” tool
  • Notch for marking at top

Cons

  • More expensive than most
  • No battery included

When you think of a single-sensor stud finder, you’re probably thinking of something in a form factor very similar to that of the Zircon Multiscanner A250c. It’s got a handle and head not too unlike what you’re used to seeing, as well as that orange-ish yellow that just screams stud finder or similar tool.

The Zircon Multiscanner A250c stands out from the crowd of “typical stud finders,” however, for its multiple scanning modes and special features. In other words, it is way more of an all-rounder than you’re expecting.

It has multiple scanning modes, including the ability to look for studs through varying depths of drywall, and a metal mode capable of searching through more dense materials.

The ACT (Auto Correcting Technology) eliminates errors from common user “problems.” For example, if you start directly over a stud that can cause issues with other stud finders, you’ll be impressed with the Zircon Multiscanner A250c. And it makes sense because why should we be punished for starting out in the right spot?

Ultimately, the Zircon Multiscanner A250c is going to be the best stud finder for just about any situation, but it is more expensive than any of the others on this list. It is also a single-sensor finder, which means it lacks the versatility others offer. So, if you’re looking for something a bit more singular in purpose or with more sensors, you can find that for cheaper elsewhere on the list. However, if you want the best and are willing to pay (just a bit) extra for it, go ahead and grab the Zircon Multiscanner A250c.

Widest scan area: Franklin Sensors ProSensor T13

Franklin Sensors

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This offering from Franklin is one of the widest stud finders available.

Specs

  • Sensors: 13 edge/center
  • Battery requirements: 2 x AA (disposable only)
  • Interface: Multi-LED lights

Pros

  • Wide 9.7-inch span
  • 1.7-inch scan depth
  • Bonus features include bubble leveler, ruler, and pencil caddy
  • Rare AA battery user

Cons

  • Doesn’t work with rechargeable AA batteries

To get the job done quickly, you need something with some width. That’s the thinking, at least, when it comes to the Franklin Sensor ProSensor T13, which is over 9.7 inches wide and sports a 13-sensor array.

The Franklin Sensor ProSensor T13 uses one-button sensing, with the machine picking the best scanning mode automatically. Just move it over the wall, and the sensors’ associated LED lights will shine, giving you a full mental picture of the target stud. It also has a built-in ruler, bubble leveler, and a spot for your pencil so you have nearly everything you need when it is time to get started working.

It is nice to see a stud finder that uses AA batteries, regarded as the most popular battery style. However, there is an unusual quirk with the AA batteries that you can use with the Franklin Sensor ProSensor T13. They must be of the disposable type; rechargeables may still work, but they will likely die very quickly.

Best for plaster walls: Zircon MetalliScanner m40

Zircon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It’s like a metal detector for your walls, even the dense ones.

Specs

  • Sensors: 1 metal detector
  • Battery requirements: 1 x 9-volt
  • Interface: LED lights

Pros

  • Locates metals through plaster and plath
  • Works with cement, concrete, stucco, and drywall as well
  • Ignores density, looks for metal

Cons

  • Detects metal, not wood.

The Zircon MetalliScanner m40 handles an increasingly rare situation—dense plaster walls—better than its competition. Plaster walls, which fell out of usage after the 1940s, present a unique situation for other stud finder sensors as these walls are intensely dense all the way through. That makes studs hard to locate with typical methods.

The Zircon MetalliScanner m40 detects the metal nails or screws in the studs themselves to help you locate them without relying on density measurements.

It also has this metal sensing through other materials as well, making it the best for ceramic tile as well. However, this still stands as the best stud finder for old homes, not newer ones, due to the way it works. Of course, if you have an unusual material your home is made from, it is always worth a try.

Best magnetic: The StudBuddy Magnetic Stud Finder

StudBuddy

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This classic magnetic stud finder has an easy grip and hangs to the wall.

Specs

  • Sensors: N/A
  • Battery requirements: N/A
  • Interface: N/A

Pros

  • Comfortable grip
  • No batteries needed
  • Cheap and always functional

Cons

  • In some ways, just a magnet

Despite its simplicity, the StudBuddy is one of the higher-rated stud finders you’ll find in stores. In so many words, it is “just” a (neodymium) magnet. In more flattering terms, it uses “old school tech” and sensibilities of the highest order. The StudBuddy uses magnetism to locate nails already in studs in your wall. It will even stick to the wall in the spot near a detected nail, showing you the line where you should pull out one of your favorite cordless drills and get busy. If one nail went in that vertical space, the thinking goes, so should yours.

It goes without saying that the StudBuddy is not the perfect machine. There are reasons we’ve updated the technology from magnets to sensors. However, it remains one of the best stud finders for its charms: the elegantly designed handle, its ability to stick to the wall, and its no-battery forever-ready design. It can go anywhere and might’ve earned itself a place in your bag for that reason alone.

Please note that there is also a StudBuddy Plus, which includes rubber grips, two bubble levelers, and inch and centimeter rulers along its small perimeter. At nearly twice the price of the original StudBuddy (which is nearly always ~25% off), it is harder to recommend, though. So, unless you’re trying to build the ultimate minimalist kit of battery-free tools, the ‘Plus’ is a pass while the original StudBuddy stays in.

Best budget: Craftsman Stud Finder

Craftsman

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is a relatively straightforward stud finder without the frills (or the price) of premium-grade finders.

Specs

  • Sensors: 1 edge detection
  • Battery Requirements: 1 x 9-volt
  • Interface: LED light

Pros

  • Works simply
  • Great value for the money
  • Once you get the hang of it, easy to execute

Cons

  • Low documentation
  • No battery included

The Craftsman Stud Finder is a low-cost but often misunderstood stud finder of the edge detection variety. There are a couple of tips and tricks for it, which we’ll discuss shortly, but once you get the hang of it, you’ll probably be happy with it. If you don’t need something intensely feature-rich, this could be the best stud finder for you.

One issue with the Craftsman Stud Finder is that it doesn’t necessarily present itself in the most straightforward manner. There isn’t a ton of hand-holding. For instance, the most upsetting find for most people is that they get the Craftsman only to find out they needed to pick up the not included, but very necessary, 9-volt battery to operate it.

And operating it, too, can be an issue due to low levels of instruction. However, once you know its secrets, you can use it easily. The Craftsman Stud Finder detects edges only and doesn’t work well when started on a stud. Move the Craftsman Stud Finder from the left of the stud you want to the right. It’ll light up when the left side of the stud is found. Then, do the same from the right side, moving to the left.

What to consider before buying the best stud finders

Choosing a stud finder should be a relatively straightforward affair, but there are still a few things that you need to take into consideration before choosing one. The number of sensors and width of your stud finders’ effective area will affect the convenience of use, as will the stud finder’s interface. Lastly, because even the best stud finders are relatively simple, they can come filled with extra features that are worth exploring.

Number of sensors

One of the quickest ways to add speed to your stud finding is to increase the number of sensors. One common form factor that works this way is the “array of sensors” style. It’s like having extra stud finders tied together, all working at once. Additionally, as each one scans at the same time, these multi-sensor stud finders are the best stud finders for real-time visualization of the stud. As they usually spread wider than the stud, you can “see” the full stud all at one time.

Style of sensor

Another factor to consider here is the styles of sensors on the stud finder. Edge finders will help you find the edge of the stud, while center finders will help you find the stud itself.

Typically, you’ll just see sensors capable of detecting changes in density just beyond the width of a typical piece of drywall. It won’t necessarily matter what that change in density is. However, some sensors can detect more. This includes stud finders that can distinguish iron pipes, detect through ceramic tile and other materials, and even find livewires.

Remember that stud finders can be wrong, including with livewire detection. Don’t trust your life with one. If there is even the slightest chance of a livewire being in the area you’re driving nails into, take extreme caution. Instead, use these only to help you find the best place to knock into and ensure the power is out before proceeding. When in doubt, contact a real electrician.

Interface

As has already been stated, stud finders are not incredibly complex. As a result, there are only two types of interfaces you’ll see, neither of which are incredibly modern in appearance.

The first style is a simple detection and light system. When a sensor gets a reading, a light brightens. This style is incredibly simple and quite common for stud finders with an array of sensors. This contrasts highly with the second common style, which is a simple LED graphical UI. Think more TI-80 calculator (or worse) than any UI you’ve seen in recent years, but still serviceable enough to give you any required information.

In actuality, neither system is better than the other, and the best stud finders will include those of both interface types. Sometimes, even for a simple single-sensor stud finder, a simple light is best as there is such a thing as overcomplicating the simple.

Additional features

To stand out, manufacturers will add features of varying degrees of usefulness. These bonus features can vary from being neigh-on essential (at least, for you) to being expensive price boosters. If you already have one of the best home tool kits, you will likely find yourself not needing too many extras on your stud finder.

The most common appendage to a stud finder, a leveler—a tool that finds a gravitationally level surface—is a logical choice. Much like putting a bottle opener on a corkscrew, it makes sense to plop a leveler on a stud finder.

This is especially true when it is the serviceable but simple water-and-bubble type leveler. They’re cheap and an obvious throw-in. When offered a stud finder with a more advanced laser leveler, be wary of falling for two mediocre products as one when you just wanted one good product. If you choose to go the route of getting a stud finder with a laser leveler, ensure that both are quality or get them separately.

Other stud finder bonuses include tape measures, lights, pencil caddies, and other easily attachable gadgets.

FAQs

Q: How much does a stud finder cost?

A stud finder costs anywhere from $10 to over $50, depending on functionality. A simple magnetic stud finder should only be about $10, while a successful multi-tool with multiple scan modes can easily go over $50. Expect to pay about $30 for a decent stud finder.

Q: Can you trust a stud finder?

You can trust a stud finder for the most part, but you shouldn’t do so blindly. As basic stud finders detect changes in frequency—and the most typical kinds are really only rated to do so through drywall—anything behind the wall can trigger one. More advanced stud finders can detect different substances and even live wires. Still, this doesn’t mean a stud finder will be 100% accurate. Few things are! Whenever dealing with electricity, ensure that all power in the area is out before proceeding.

Q: What kind of battery does a stud finder take?

A stud finder typically takes a 9-volt battery, AAA, or even a AA battery. Typically, stud finders (even the best stud finders) do not have the built-in batteries we’re becoming increasingly used to in our other machines (but you can still buy exchangeable rechargable ones).

Final thoughts on the best stud finders

Getting a good stud finder should not be difficult. Generally, the best stud finders come in very few distinct form factors. This means that picking one that suits your needs, has quality hardware, and a consistent customer experience, should be simple if your research is done correctly. As a result, any of the above stud finders could be the best stud finder for you.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best stud finders for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best outdoor bug zappers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-outdoor-bug-zapper/ Wed, 14 Jul 2021 07:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=374553
The best outdoor bug zappers will help keep inspects at bay.

Fight the bite and keep away the insects that would like to bug you with these outdoor bug zappers.

The post The best outdoor bug zappers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best outdoor bug zappers will help keep inspects at bay.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Black+Decker Bug Zapper is the best outdoor bug zapper overall. BLACK+DECKER Bug Zapper
SEE IT

The BLACK+DECKER is large, sturdy, and powerful.

Best budget The Ninonly Bug Zapper Light Bulb is the best outdoor bug zapper at a budget-friendly price. Ninonly Bug Zapper Light Bulb
SEE IT

Ninonly provides one of the best bug-zapping light bulbs that you can find.

Best handheld The Anne Diary Bug Zapper is the best outdoor bug zapper that's handheld. Anne Diary Electric Bug Zapper Racket
SEE IT

With the ability to swivel the killing racket head, you can effectively cover the target insect on any surface.

When you’re ready to head outside, the last thing you want to do is get bitten or swarmed by insects, so having an outdoor bug zapper is a good idea. They make your insect-fearing companions feel more at ease and can give your uncovered food and drink a standing chance against buzzing bugs. But there are many styles to choose from that, and it can be hard to pick out which bug zapper best suits your needs. To do our part, we compiled this list of the best outdoor bug zappers.

How we selected the best outdoor bug zappers

Bugs aren’t just pesky; they can sometimes be dangerous. When it comes to outdoor bug zappers, you want something that works, but you also want ingenuity. The location of the zapper, its shape, and its functional style all matter. And, despite being weapons of death against our exoskeleton-having foes, the best outdoor bug zappers don’t look like death themselves. As a result, the following list of the best outdoor bug zappers represents a variety of styles and forms of zappers that also happen to be attractive to the eye.

The best outdoor bug zappers: Reviews & Recommendations

Purchasing one of the following outdoor bug zappers should make your yard less insect-friendly. As most have lights, these insect repellents should also improve the visibility of your porch or patio a bit. However, we still recommend these solar deck lights for a brighter, more sustainable option for that purpose. Be sure to check over the whole list to find a style that suits your needs.

Best overall: BLACK+DECKER Bug Zapper

BLACK+DECKER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a large size and tough exterior, this will get the job done easily.

Specs

  • Form: Lantern
  • Size: 32 x 12 x 32 inches
  • Target species: Fly, moth, mosquito, gnat, wasp

Pros

  • Can choose between hanging or putting on table
  • Cleaning-free option
  • Tough, waterproof exterior

Cons

  • Dead bugs sometimes stick to zapping element

For a quick-killing machine with a hard, weather-resistant exterior, the BLACK+DECKER is a great choice. It can hang on your patio or sit on a table. This choice is important, too, because it’ll change how you choose to use the zapper. While on a table, you’ll want the collection tray placed in. However, if you hang the BLACK+DECKER over grass, you can leave the bottom collection tray off so bugs will fall to the ground directly, reducing cleaning. However, this is a powerful zapper, so sometimes a bug will burn directly on the element, meaning you’ll have to do a little cleaning (with the supplied brush) periodically.

Best cordless: BURLAN Solar Bug Zapper

Burlan

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You’ll never need a cord if you let the sun do most of the work.

Specs

  • Form: Lantern
  • Size: 9.4 x 5.1 x 5.1 inches
  • Target species: Fly, mosquito

Pros

  • Charges via solar power or USB plug-in
  • Bright lamp on top adds to the ambiance
  • Quiet, 25dB zaps
  • IP66 water and dustproof

Cons

  • Needs consistent sun exposure

If plugging something in and dealing with cords bothers you, turn to the power of the sun. This is the best outdoor bug zapper with a solar charging panel that we could find. On a full charge—which can be achieved in 12 hours of direct sunlight—the top lantern, lighting, and mosquito killer can work for between 4 and 12 hours, depending on mode of operation.

Best for mosquitoes: Elechome Bug Zapper

Elechome

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This machine puts out a ton of special mosquito-attracting light.

Specs

  • Form: Lantern
  • Size: 5.35 x 5.35 x 11.6 inches
  • Target species: Mosquito, gnat, fly, moth, wasp, spider

Pros

  • Scientifically designed for mosquito attraction
  • Large killing area
  • IP66 dust and water resistant

Cons

  • Must USB-C charge

According to Pfizer, mosquitos kill more than 700,000 people each year. While we’re waiting for advanced mosquito control to deactivate their reproductive process, there are other things to try. While some are washing up with a soap mosquito repellent, others are turning to special wavelengths that attract mosquitos, which the Elechome Bug Zapper puts out in extreme degree. It’s also got a larger killing area than most lantern types, with its top exposed, allowing for more bug killing.

Best for patio: Endbug Bug Zapper

Endbug

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The bottom-facing light on this zapper is a plus for any patio.

Specs

  • Form: Lantern
  • Size: 5.7 x 5.7 x 10.6 inches
  • Target species: Mosquito, gnat, fly, moth, wasp, etc.

Pros

  • Includes a bright light on the bottom to light your patio
  • Is IPX6 waterproof to ward off rain issues
  • Excellent bug attraction ability

Cons

  • Loud

The Endbug Bug Zapper is the best outdoor bug zapper for your porch or patio, as it provides excellent lighting for you and powerful killing for bugs. It’s a powerful 4,200V, so it kills quite effectively but is rather loud. Our advice is to hang it up high near the middle of your porch or patio area so you can get the maximum benefit from the provided light. However, if you do choose to put it closer to the edges, it’ll still be safe in the rain as it has IPX6 water resistance.

Best handheld: Anne Diary Electric Bug Zapper Racket

Anne Diary

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The racket head swivels, letting you cover the scariest bugs safely.

Specs

  • Form: Racket
  • Size: 17.5 x 9.7 x 1.5 inches
  • Target species: Wasp, bee, fly, mosquito

Pros

  • Long handle keeps you away from dangerous pests
  • Auto zap mode while in stand
  • Swivel head provides maximum safety
  • Simple USB-C charging

Cons

  • Auto zap mode depletes battery in 5 hours

If you have really scary insects like bees, wasps, or hornets, you’ll want to be more proactive in your killing. Waiting for the bug to mosey into a light just won’t cut it. That’s why you should try out the best bug-zapping racket, this one from Anne Diary. You can swivel the zapping head to be parallel with the surface the offending insect has lit on, then cover it. This method keeps you safe and gives the insect no escape. When not in active use, you can turn on a passive zapping mode as well, but we only recommend this if the Anne Diary is plugged in, as the power drains after about five hours.

Best indoor/outdoor: PRODCA Bug Zapper

Prodca

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The small size of this bug zapper makes it great to tuck into a kitchen or bedroom corner, too.

Specs

  • Form: Lantern
  • Size: 3.8 x 3.8 x 5.5
  • Target species: Mosquito, fly, gnat, bee, moth, etc.

Pros

  • Small size fits anywhere
  • Can be made to be discreet
  • Lamp light for better outdoor vision
  • IP66 water- and dust-resistant

Cons

  • Not great for all indoor pests (such as fruit flies)

Though a lot of the best outdoor bug zappers could technically be used indoors, you wouldn’t necessarily want them to be there. They’re big, can’t be placed just anywhere, and scream to others that you have an insect problem. As a result, we like the more discreet nature and size of the PRODCA, which can do great work on the porch, but also be tucked away in a kitchen corner when you want it to be.

Best budget: Ninonly Bug Zapper Light Bulb

Ninonly

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is the best bug-zapping light bulb you can get.

Specs

  • Form: Light bulb
  • Size: 3.14 x 3.14 x 6.3 inches
  • Target species: Fly, mosquito

Pros

  • Small, convenient form
  • Sloping trap stays clean
  • Multiple modes
  • Long lifespan

Cons

  • Must be put into a lamp

Most of the best outdoor bug zappers cost between $35 and $60 apiece, depending on current deals available. That can be frustrating if you want many of them or aren’t ready to spend a lot on bug zapping. Light bulb-style bug zappers, then, are a great option, though they tend to have worse functionality. The Ninonly has high-quality zapping, multiple lighting modes, and a sloping inside that helps bugs fall out after death. As a result, it is one of the best cheap outdoor bug zappers… if you have a lamp available.

What to consider before buying outdoor bug zappers

Outdoor bug zappers might seem relatively straightforward, and they are, but there are still some things to consider before buying one. The most important thing to consider is the form of the zapper.

  • Lantern styles are the most popular as they can be hung or placed on tables, add light and ambiance to the area, and are good passive killers that work well on porches and while camping.
  • Handheld “electric fly swatters” are another style, great for targeted killing, but suffer in that they typically are made for consistent pest removal.
  • Finally, light-bulb bug zappers are cheaper and simple to install, but these mini zappers typically don’t have as much killing power as the other styles.

You should also consider how easy the zapper will be to clean. The best outdoor bug zappers typically have at least one mode or feature that allows bugs to fall out of the zapping area, reducing cleaning. Powerful bug zappers may also burn insects directly to the zapping element, requiring you to clean it directly. It is highly recommended to review real customer experiences with cleaning if this is a concern for you.

FAQs

Q: How much does an outdoor bug zapper cost?

An outdoor bug zapper will cost anywhere from $20 to $65. You should expect to pay about $35 on average for the best outdoor bug zappers if you are willing to wait for a sale and about $55 otherwise.

Q: Can I leave a bug zapper on all night?

You can leave a bug zapper on all night in most cases. Typically, they are made to be used for the whole night. Please read the instructions of your bug zapper to double-check your specific case, however. You may also wish to bring your bug zapper inside at night when it is storming if yours does not have high-quality weather resistance.

Q: How long does a bug zapper last on average?

A bug zapper should last five or more years on average. Obviously, the quality of the build, the environmental conditions of where it is placed, and usage frequency will affect the overall lifetime of the product. Most bug zappers also have replaceable bulbs, which will extend the lifetime of the product.

Final thoughts on the best outdoor bug zappers

The best outdoor bug zappers all have one thing in common; they will remove pests from your environment eventually. Whether you go for a powerful light source that attracts insects quickly or a handheld racket that lets you seek them out, you should feel more secure in your outdoor environment with one of the above products.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor bug zappers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best dehumidifiers for basements in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-dehumidifiers-for-basements/ Fri, 29 Sep 2023 13:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=575565
The best dehumidifiers for basements will help keep the air in your home cool and dry.

These dehumidifiers will help you get rid of one monster in the basement: moisture.

The post The best dehumidifiers for basements in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best dehumidifiers for basements will help keep the air in your home cool and dry.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Frigidaire 50-Pint 3-Speed Humidifier is one of the best basement dehumidifiers overall. Frigidaire 50-Pint 3-Speed Dehumidifier
SEE IT

A front-runner that pulls moisture from the air efficiently, and in diverse temperatures, up to the point you desire.

Best smart The GoveeLife is the best smart humidifier for the basement. GoveeLife Smart Dehumidifier for Basement
SEE IT

Between asking Alexa to dry up your basement and doing a lot of stat tracking, you’ll love this offering from GoveeLife.

Best budget The Mapoor Dehumidifier for Basements is the best option that's budget-friendly. MAPOOR Dehumidifier for Basements
SEE IT

If your basement is just mildly too damp, this number-1 customer pick can handle the job.

If you have a basement, you may have a problem with humidity, and the best way to handle that issue is with dehumidifiers for basements. But dehumidifiers need to cool air down to work, and, based on the simple fact that hot air rises, we know that basements tend to be cool. They also tend to be a bit damper than what the average dehumidifier encounters, meaning they’ll not only need to filter more water out of the air, but they’ll need to dispose of more of it. As a result, finding the best dehumidifiers for basements can take some sorting and searching, so we did that task for you.

How we chose the best dehumidifiers for basements

Through and through, the best dehumidifiers for basements need to be able to remove large amounts of water and deal with cool temperatures better than the rest. Still, we wanted to give readers a wide variety and some choices that had excellent qualities that would support different kinds of homes.

The best dehumidifiers for basements: Reviews & Recommendations

The following choices represent the best dehumidifiers for basements while still providing quality across a number of other categories. No matter what your individual situation, you should be able to find a product amongst those on this list. While the overall best is exemplary of the class and representative of what a dehumidifier can do in a basement, other items on the list are still worth checking out as they may pull ahead in their own niches.

Note that manufacturer specs may label their water tanks in gallons, liters, or other units. Here, we have converted all units to pints for your convenience so you can compare the maximum removal capacity of the unit with the size of its tank. While you can’t necessarily expect to get the max pull each day, it will help you gauge how labor-intensive manual draining might be in a way that isn’t misleading or confusing.

Best overall: Frigidaire 50-Pint 3-Speed Dehumidifier

Frigidaire

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is a solid product from a solid brand—it’ll take you through most situations.

Specs

  • Removal capacity: Up to 50 pints/day
  • Water removal: Drain / reservoir (16.9 pint tank)
  • Size: 16 x 24.25 x 12.2
  • Energy Star-certified: Yes

Pros

  • Works in rooms up to 3,000 square feet
  • Can work down to 41 degrees Fahrenheit
  • Adjustable humidistat
  • Remote control

Cons

  • Not smartphone connectable

Frigidaire’s 50-Pint 3-Speed Dehumidifier is a well-rounded machine that should keep the vast majority of customers happy. Its 50-pint collection is appropriate for most basements and is the sweet spot between power and pricing that you’ll find reflected in most of the best dehumidifiers for basements. Features like multiple fan speeds, a built-in humidistat, and a timer shutoff are nice to see, too.

You can set the Frigidaire to continuously drain if you have the right tubing and a spot to drain at. If that is too much effort, the 2.11-gallon tank (that’s 16.9 pints) will serve you just fine. Like most dehumidifiers, the machine will automatically shut off when the water bucket is full. However, if you’re paying attention to detail, you’ll note that it can draw 50 pints a day from the air in the right conditions. This means that when you initially start using this product, you may need to dump the bucket several times daily to maximize efficiency. However, after your basement reaches a sort of equilibrium, this will likely change.

While speaking of efficiency, one thing to note is the Frigidaire’s ability to work at temperatures as low as 41 degrees Fahrenheit. This is great for families that have briefly cool periods during the year, but remember that even the best dehumidifiers for basements still won’t get the maximum water withdrawal rate at this temperature.

It doesn’t have WiFi or smartphone connectivity, which we would have liked to have seen at this power and price range. Still, if you don’t have a home filled with smart-home devices, and use your basement regularly enough, you’ll enjoy and trust this product to get the job done. And, if operating the machine from afar (such as lowering its fan speed during TV watching) is important to you, it includes a remote.

Best for large basement: VEAGASO 70 Pints Dehumidifier

Veagaso

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you want maximum power at a good price, here it is.

Specs

  • Removal capacity: Up to 70 pints/day
  • Water removal: Drain / reservoir (8.5 pint tank)
  • Size: 10 x 11 x 20 inches
  • Energy Star-certified: Yes

Pros

  • Advanced backlit display and control panel
  • Reservoir beeps when full
  • Quick toggle child lock
  • Humidistat for 33% to 80% humidity is good for any purpose

Cons

  • Relatively expensive
  • Small water tank

The VEAGASO is made for intense drainage for larger areas, handling basements up to 5,500 square feet in size. It’ll pull 70 pints per day in the perfect climate (95 degrees Fahrenheit, 90% humidity), so it can service real problem areas quickly. Remember that even under non-ideal circumstances, a dehumidifier like this will have more pull than others.

You’ll like the VEAGASO’s backlit display and convenient control panel. On it, you can set your ideal humidity level, fan speed, choose which part of the house you’ve put your dehumidifier in (yes, there is a basement choice), and set the child lock with a single tap. It’ll also light up when the air filter should be changed and flash red, beep, and automatically shut off once the reservoir bucket is filled to capacity.

Speaking of the bucket, it is probably the only negative aspect of the highly-regarded VEAGASO dehumidifier. It’s considerably smaller than the water removal capacity, so human effort can possibly become a bottleneck in your humidity removal efforts if you use it over the drainage system. Still, there’s hardly a better value-for-the-price 70 pints unit out there.

Best smart: GoveeLife Smart Dehumidifier for Basement

GoveeLife

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you want to monitor your basement’s humidity from afar, you can do that with GoveeLife.

Specs

  • Removal capacity: Typically 50-70 pints/day, but can hit 109 pints/day.
  • Water removal: Drain / reservoir (16-pint tank)
  • Size: 11.61 x 15.35 x 24.41 inches
  • Energy Star-certified: Yes

Pros

  • App, voice, and touch panel control
  • Good water removal even without being a hot room
  • 1.6-foot drainage hose included
  • App lets you control dehumidifier and monitor results easily

Cons

  • Drain has no pump, requires gravity

For those who want smartphone and assistant integration, as well as some stat tracking, GoveeLife offers quite a few premium dehumidifiers that will do the trick. This one, the Smart Dehumidifier for Basement, pulls out between 50 and 70 pints of water per day, depending on mode and environment. At 86 degrees Fahrenheit and 80% RH, it can even get out 109 pints/day. It works in 4,500 square-foot basements but is most effective up to 900 square feet.

We particularly like how many options there are for controlling the GoveeLife. It has a touch panel for immediate control. However, it really shines with its app assistant, which will give you details of the room’s humidity over time, including across the hours of the day. You’ll get alerts when the tank is full, can set your desired basement humidity and run times, and can toggle features such as auto restart (which turns on the machine again after power outages).

Even more “smart” is the ability to integrate with your smart home system. If you have an Alexa device, Google Assistant, or IFTTT system with voice control, you can control it using those, as well as voice commands. It also receives firmware updates over-the-air via a WiFi connection.

Best quiet: Bublue DH1 Pro

BuBlue

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It is designed to stay at a decent noise level.

Specs

  • Removal capacity: Up to 50 pints/day
  • Water removal: Drain / reservoir (8.4-pint tank)
  • Size: 13.78 x 9.25 x 22.76 inches
  • Energy Star-certified: No

Pros

  • 40dB noise reduction
  • Sleep mode toggle
  • Sturdy drainage pipe

Cons

  • Heavy when full

If you use your basement quite a lot, adding a loud piece of equipment isn’t really an option. Bublue understands your issue and designed this dehumidifier around operating in a quiet way that has passed customer scrutiny. Additionally, there is a sleep mode if you happen to be a nighttime basement dweller.

The Bublue DH1 Pro is quite efficient at pulling water out of the air, with customers reporting having to dump the tank rather frequently. If possible, use the included drainage pipe to empty the machine. You can roll the DH1 Pro to your outlet on its wheels, which is good since there are a few complaints about how surprisingly heavy this dehumidifier can get. On the bright side, you won’t have to worry about it being knocked over.

Best for cold: Honeywell Portable AC, Heater, and Dehumidifier

Honeywell

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: As a heater, AC, dehumidifier combo, this can actually eliminate the cold.

Specs

  • Removal capacity: Up to 51 pints/day
  • Water removal: Drain
  • Size: 15.2 x 18.1 x 29.4 inches
  • Energy Star-certified: Yes

Pros

  • Provides year-round comfort
  • All your air-altering needs in one machine
  • Heats the air to provide better dehumidification environment

Cons

  • Expensive (but multi-functional)

Dehumidifiers don’t work as well in cold environments. Even the ones that can work in colder environments don’t work well there. As a result, the best option is to have a heater in your basement alongside one of the best dehumidifiers.

But what do you do when you don’t have the room or outlets for a heater and dehumidifier in your basement? One option is the Honeywell Portable AC, Heater, and Dehumidifier. It’s a device that can take on all of the tasks required to handle a room’s air. Admittedly, this dehumidifier is more expensive than other options and doesn’t have the same robust dehumidifier features you might expect. But, it isn’t trying to be the best humidifier for basements; it is going for being a whole lot more. Our recommendation is to pick this item if you really need the space or hookups for other things, or have a really tiny basement, but to go for other options if you can.

Best budget: MAPOOR Dehumidifier for Basements

Mapoor

SEE IT

When you search for dehumidifiers for the basement, you usually find machines that cost at least $100 and, quite often, over $200. However, the MAPOOR Dehumidifier for Basements (and other parts of the home) consistently shows high customer satisfaction at a low price.

While it doesn’t suck out as much moisture as high-end devices—you really can’t skimp on this kind of thing if you have a huge moisture problem—it is ripe with features. From sleep mode and timing mode to automatic frost shut down if you hit 35 degrees Fahrenheit or lower, the MAPOOR really has it all.

So, if your basement humidity is just a touch out of range, and you have a smaller basement, grab the MAPOOR Dehumidifier for Basements to save yourself some money. It’s small as well, so can be easily moved about the home to where it is needed most. Additionally, the tank is large enough to hold a couple of days worth of liquid, making this one of the best dehumidifiers for basements in the sense of removal capacity to tank capacity ratio.

How humidifiers work

Understanding the true difficulties of getting a good dehumidifier for your basement helps to understand the process by which standard dehumidifiers work.

Naturally, dehumidifiers are machines with dozens or hundreds of interlocking parts. Instead of going into overly complex detail, we’ll highlight the key parts you need to know about in everyday operations, especially when selecting dehumidifiers for basements. With that in mind, here are the basic steps:

  1. Moist air from the basement is drawn into the machine and cooled.
  2. The cooled air’s moisture begins to condensate out, like water on the outside of a glass of ice water.
  3. This water is collected by a reservoir or pumped out.
  4. The drier air is reheated and released back into the basement.

Using dehumidifiers in the basement

Understanding the process by which dehumidifiers work shows us a couple of the difficulties that occur when using them in the basement.

Airflow and circulation: Windows, doors opening and closing, vents, and people walking to and fro circulates the air about most rooms quite well. In a closed basement, largely used for storage? Not so much.

Cool air: Basements have cool air, typically around 50 degrees Fahrenheit, yet cooling is an essential part of the dehumidification process and essential for condensation. According to GE Appliances, dehumidifiers are unlikely to work in a satisfactory manner below 41 degrees Fahrenheit. While dehumidifier use will naturally heat a basement to some degree, some advocate for using a heater alongside dehumidifiers for more efficient moisture removal. This same combo might be beneficial for your basement if your basement is particularly cold. We recommend the non-infrared options among these space heaters for this purpose.

Capacity

Knowing how dehumidifiers work also illuminates the most confusing word involved in their usage: capacity.

In one way, “capacity” refers to a dehumidifier’s ability to remove moisture from the air. This is typically expressed as a maximum amount of water able to be pulled in a day from ideal (or average) circumstances. It’s an engineer’s standard term for the work being done by this style of machine.

In another way, “capacity” is used for the size of water storage tanks in models that use those instead of direct drainage. It’s just the most natural way to talk about reservoirs for liquids, much the same as you might talk about a gas tank’s capacity.

Unfortunately for the consumer, manufacturer resources (and, indeed, guides) do surprisingly little to differentiate the two forms of “capacity” in a way that isn’t confusing. To do our part in keeping things straight, we’ve done our best to refer to the first form of capacity as “removal capacity” while discussing tank size separately.

What to consider before buying dehumidifiers for basements

Despite the simple operating process outlined above, dehumidifiers for basements are actually quite complex from a customer’s perspective. Part of this is due to the jargon issues outlined above, but there’s also quite a bit of water logistics to plan out before you make a purchase.

Removal capacity

Higher removal capacity is nearly always better, but you’ll likely have to pay extra for the highest removal capacity possible. You should also remember that removal capacity reflects the ability of the dehumidifier to draw water out of the air in ideal temperatures and humidities.

This means that a cool basement will likely not reach removal capacity. Additionally, as the machine does its job, the humidity in the room will lower. As a result, once you’ve run your dehumidifier for a while, there is a high likelihood of reduced daily removal numbers unless there is a consistent high influx of humidity.

All this being said, a 50-pint-per-day removal capacity is likely the sweet spot for most basements. You can crank that up to 70 pints in extreme cases or down to 30 pints if your goal is to just take the edge off of a looming issue. If you have a very mild problem (and a small basement) even less will do.

You should also note that there are several reasons why a dehumidifier will automatically shut off over the course of a day, which will also reduce removal capacity. One large one is if your water disposal technique is a manually removable reservoir and it gets full. Learn more about this in the next section. 

Water disposal technique

There are two methods by which dehumidifiers for basements dispose of water, and they both have drawbacks. While it is usually better to focus on the positives, water disposal has the most potential to cause you trouble as you work with a dehumidifier in your basement.

Automatic drain: A system that collects water and channels it through a drainage hose. If you have a sink or some other place to run the water to, it can be great. If you don’t, you might need to do some tinkering and spend extra time and/or money on the dehumidifier’s installation. Another pain point of this style is the possibility of hoses or plumbing leaking.

Reservoir tank: This style of dehumidifier has a tank, usually in the form of a built-in water bucket, in the bottom half of the dehumidifier. As the dehumidifier pulls water out of the air, it fills. It’s up to you to dump it. This can be a huge pain and takes manual work.

Interestingly, dehumidifiers for the basement have a water removal capacity many times higher than the tank’s capacity, meaning you could (theoretically) need to take several trips to get maximum water removal from your dehumidifier throughout the day. Nearly all dehumidifiers with a tank have an automatic shut-off feature for when it gets too full. Also note that the tank size is typically measured in gallons or liters, but we have converted this to pints for the items in this article so you can compare the dehumidifiers’ ability to withdraw water from the air with their ability to store said water.

Most dehumidifiers for the basement have both a drain and a reservoir tank, giving you more choices.

Humidity level settings

In our review of the best humidifiers, we started by reminding people in very general terms that the EPA advises an internal humidity level between 30% and 50% for our homes. That article dealt with one half of the issue, and this deals with the other. However, both share one common thread:

You don’t want to overcorrect and run into the opposite problem.

To solve this, many of the best dehumidifiers for basements have an internal monitor that automatically shuts off the machine once the humidity arrives at a comfortable level. Others provide precise humidistats that allow you to fine-tune the humidity to your exact preferences. The former helps protect your dehumidifier and save energy, while the latter can be particularly useful if you use your basement for storing wine or have certain preferences.

Before you buy dehumidifiers for basements

As personal responsibility becomes increasingly important for protecting the environment, we’d like you to consider looking for an Energy Star-certified dehumidifier. Note that most dehumidifiers on the list above are Energy Star certified.

Saving energy can help reduce electricity used in your home and reduce environmental waste. Dehumidifiers that pass Energy Star’s energy efficiency requirements are rated to use (at minimum) 13% less energy than conventional models at minimum. While this might not sound like a lot, over the course of a year you get 1.5 months of operation for “free” if you use a certified dehumidifier in your basement. Also, note that some models use even less energy than this.

FAQs

Q: How much do dehumidifiers for basements cost?

Dehumidifiers for basements cost anywhere from just below $100 to over $500. For most homes, a good price will fall between $200 and $550, depending on the needs of the individuals who live there. It’s worth noting that great budget picks like the MAPOOR Dehumidifier for Basements are also amongst the highest rated for customer satisfaction.

Q: Can I leave my dehumidifier on all day?

If you have a good dehumidifier, you can leave it running all day. Nearly all dehumidifiers that use a water storage tank come with an auto shut-off feature once that tank gets between 80% and 90% full. It is also possible to come across dehumidifiers with humidistats that will shut off once the humidity reaches a desired level.

Q: How much water should a dehumidifier collect in a day in a basement?

A dehumidifier will collect an amount of water every day in a basement up to its “capacity” or maximum extraction amount. This is often measured in pints. The actual amount of water a dehumidifier will collect from your basement on a daily basis is highly dependent on many factors, including temperature, airflow, and even how often the dehumidifier’s tank is emptied.

Final thoughts on the best dehumidifiers for basements

The best dehumidifiers for basements are typically characterized by their ability to pull a lot of water out of the air, their ability to dispose of said water satisfactorily, and the ability to have a lot of control over their functioning. As a result, the above dehumidifiers should work well for your basement over the long run.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best dehumidifiers for basements in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best electric garage heaters of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-electric-garage-heaters/ Thu, 28 Sep 2023 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=573450
four of the bet electric garage heaters sliced together on a white background
Abby Ferguson

Tinker in comfort all year long with these garage heaters.

The post The best electric garage heaters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
four of the bet electric garage heaters sliced together on a white background
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A white and black Heat Storm Phoenix WiFi Edition heater against a white background Heat Storm Phoenix Wi-Fi Edition
SEE IT

With Wi-Fi connection, a touchscreen UI, and a moderate price, the Heat Storm Phoenix Wi-Fi Edition brings modern comforts to your garage.

Best space heater The Dyson Pure Hot + Cool HP07 heater against a white background Dyson Pure Hot + Cool HP07
SEE IT

This Dyson works for you all year, heating, cooling, and purifying air as needed.

Best budget Lasko Space Heater against a white background Lasko Space Heater
SEE IT

The Lasko Space Heater provides satisfying heat for one.

Electric garage heaters keep us going in that screen-free sanctuary that is the tinkerer’s garage. From keeping the hands warm and pliable to preventing a wobbly shiver, having a nice heater in your garage will keep you working even during the coldest winter or late autumn freezes. Plus, they reduce fumes and gasses being poured into a confined garage. After all, garages already have enough problems with exhausts and chemicals to begin with. However, styles of garage heaters vary tremendously and have a wide variety of features, form factors, and usage conditions. It can be difficult to sort through. This is exactly why we’ve collected the best electric garage heaters in a variety of styles for you to choose from.

How we chose the best electric garage heaters

More so than other types of heaters, electric garage heaters are all about functionality and niche usage. Utility is the most important factor, and, to a large degree, looks don’t matter that much. With this in mind, we found the best electric garage heaters that suit different needs while also taking a stab at an overall best pick. Want your whole garage warm? We’ve got that. Need just a touch of heat? We’ve got that, too. Need the all-so-elusive overhead heater? You get the picture.

Amidst it all, we’re also looking at varying power levels—the crunchy hard numbers of watts and volts—as well as safety features. While 240V heaters are often capable of more power, they’re typically quite inconvenient for the typical American to use, so we’ve limited how many we’re including in the list. Reviews from real customers go a long way, too, so we’ve found products that have been used and preferred by 100s, if not 1,000s, of real people. Older models even get a bonus for longevity when it comes to electric garage heaters, as the technology changes slowly over time.

The best electric garage heaters: Reviews & Recommendations

While we’ve attempted to find the best electric garage heater, we know that many situations, power levels, and types of electric garage heaters might interest you. The vast majority of garage owners will find a suitable electric garage heater on this list.

Best overall: Heat Storm Phoenix Wi-Fi Edition

Heat Storm

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: 1500 watts
  • Size: 4 x 19 x 16 inches
  • Placement: Wall mounted
  • Heating style: Infrared

Pros

  • Easy to install at only 9 pounds
  • Remote, WiFi control
  • Child lock, tip-over, air filter, and overheat shutoff safety features
  • Robust touchscreen UI

Cons

  • Feet for freestanding mode are sold separately

The Heat Storm Phoenix Wi-Fi Edition is perfect for those dreary cold mornings when the thought of leaving the comforts of your home for even a minute fills you with dread. You can remotely turn it on via WiFi to warm up the garage before you even get there. It will provide good heat for 150 square feet around it and supplemental heat for a full 1,000 square feet. It attaches firmly to the wall, so if you have it installed in the area near your house door and your car, you’ll be able to hop in your car with maximum comfort.

The Heat Storm Phoenix Wi-Fi Edition has robust safety features, including a child lock and automatic shutoff in case of overheating. If you decide to buy the optional feet that convert the wall mount into a freestanding model, there is even tip-over protection. Furthermore, the Heat Storm Phoenix Wi-Fi Edition has an internal air filter that can help clean your air and increase environmental safety while using this heater.

Another bonus of the Heat Storm Phoenix Wi-Fi Edition is its inclusion of an actual UI. For the most part, even the best electric garage heaters include only a knob or two, with low/high heat settings at best. On the other hand, this electric garage heater has a full touchscreen UI with a built-in digital thermostat. It’s just a lot better, presentation-wise, than most of the competition.

Best space heater: Dyson Pure Hot + Cool HP07 

Dyson

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: 1500 watts
  • Size: 9.76 x 8.07 x 30.08 inches
  • Placement: Freestanding
  • Heating style: Convection

Pros

  • HEPA filter cleans air
  • Heats and cools
  • Bladeless fan design
  • Can control via Alexa

Cons

  • Louder than necessary

When we looked at the best space heaters, a Dyson stood out for its multitool-like ability to get a lot done in the hobbyist’s garage setting. Namely, it warms up your locale when it’s cold, cools when it’s hot, and constantly removes dust and other particles.

The air that runs through the Dyson HP07, a step-up model from our original space heater pick, also gets run through HEPA and Carbon filters, which trap up to 99.97 percent of allergens as small as 0.3 microns (one of the reasons a Dyson also places so highly in our best air purifiers roundup). The small LCD screen identifies pollutants and shows the air quality of the room as well as the current temperature. Then, it uses a bladeless fan (aka “air multiplier”) to disperse warm or cool air at a rate of 77 gallons/second in an oscillating pattern.

At the end of the day, this makes the Dyson HP07 the best year-round electric garage heater. It is the perfect way to treat your garage’s air throughout the year, and unlike a lot of heaters, you won’t feel like it is merely taking up space for half the year (or more).

Best ceiling mount: Comfort Zone CZQTV5M 

Comfort Zone

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: 1500 watts
  • Size: 5.25 x 26.5 x 14.3 inches
  • Placement: Overhead
  • Heating style: Infrared

Pros

  • Concentrated infrared heat
  • Halogen lamp and heat combo
  • 90-degree tiltable lamp head
  • Safety grill protects lamp and heater

Cons

  • Only two heat settings

There are two reasons to have a ceiling-mounted garage heater: Saving floor space and having a way to concentrate heat onto the top of a workbench. The Comfort Zone CZQTV5M handles both and avoids the frustration of overhead heat rising, not falling onto the person below it.

The secret is that the Comfort Zone CZQTV5M is an infrared heater. Awarded the “best ceiling-mount” category in our assessment of the best infrared heaters, the infrared heat travels in a beam-like fashion, heating what it hits, not the air. In practice, this means that your hands, busy at work, will stay well-heated and comfortable.

Another issue the Comfort Zone CZQTV5M circumvents is lighting. Having a freestanding lamp close to a heater could be awkward or unsafe. The included halogen lamp is what makes this one of the best electric garage heaters. No matter what time it is or how cold it is, you can see and feel your warm and toasty hands while using the Comfort Zone CZQTV5M.

Best freestanding: Briza Infrared Patio and Garage Heater 

Briza

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: 1500 watts
  • Size: 35.5 x 4 x 4 inches (element)
  • Placement: Freestanding
  • Heating style: Infrared

Pros

  • IP55 rating withstands shop dust and outdoor conditions
  • Includes a tripod stand
  • Automatic shut-off feature
  • 1-9 hour timer

Cons

  • 6-foot range of effectiveness

The Briza is a tripod-mounted infrared heater that can withstand quite a beating. We’ve already reviewed the Briza as one of the best patio heaters, in large part due to this ability to take on the elements. With an IP55 rating, it should be able to withstand some water but also dust. And that’s what makes it great for your garage, too. If you’re into woodworking, for example, having a machine that is rated to withstand a bit of dust is quite critical.

It’s really quite convenient, too. At only 6.6 pounds, you should be able to move the Briza wherever you want in your garage with ease. That includes outside the garage, too, if you want to work out in the open and take advantage of its weatherproofing.

Further convenience comes from its remote control and the fact that it has a one to nine-hour timer that you can set. This makes it the perfect heater for the tinkerer who gets completely in the flow and then forgets to turn things like the heater off. Plus, it has safety features like an automatic turn-off in case things get too heated. 

Best 240V: Dr. Heater DR966

Dr. Heater

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: 6000 watts
  • Size: 14.5 x 13 x 14.5 inches
  • Placement: Wall-mount
  • Heating style: Infrared

Pros

  • Tough, steel exterior
  • UL-certified for safety
  • Heats well even 12-feet away

Cons

  • Internal thermostat is finicky

If you are willing to go the 240V way (or live in a region where 240V appliances are more accessible), you should consider the Dr. Heater DR996. It is tough, thanks to the hard metal exterior that can take a knocking or two. But it also provides good heat, with high and low settings at an impressive 3,000 and 6,000 watts, respectively. 

While the fan helps a bit with space heating, the Dr. Heater DR996 is an infrared heater, so it will tend to give directional heating. This is a good thing in many ways, with customers reporting receiving quality heat even from as far as 12 feet away or more. At the same time, reports of a finicky thermostat are less surprising due to the heating style.

Best budget: Lasko Space Heater

Lasko

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: 1500 watts
  • Size: 9.2 x 7 x 6 inches
  • Placement: Freestanding
  • Heating style: Convection

Pros

  • Lightweight with handle
  • Small size fits anywhere
  • 8-foot cord for easy placement
  • ETL listed safety

Cons

  • Only enough heat for one

This affordable space heater provides one person with enough heat anywhere in the garage. Its small size makes it suitable to place on tabletops or down by your feet next to the workbench.

This is one of the best electric garage heaters for a small space, and usually just one person, so you’ll likely want to move it about quite a bit. That should be easy with the Lasko, as it is only 2.9 pounds and has a carry handle embedded in the back. Finding a place to put it should also not be a challenge. Attaching a heater to an extension cord or power strip is generally frowned upon, but the Lasko has an 8-foot cord, giving you a large amount of control over placement in your garage, so long as it has adequate plugs.

Finally, the Lasko is a very safe machine, at least as far as heaters go. It is ETL-listed for safety and has tip-over protection. So, if you do happen to place it somewhere unstable, which is bound to happen if you move it as often as is intended, you won’t have to worry (as much) about a major incident occurring as a result.

What to consider before buying electric garage heaters

Getting electric garage heaters can be trickier than expected. As you’ll likely see, many sites will recommend high-powered heaters that won’t work (at least here in the States) without tricky installations or electrical work being done. Furthermore, due to the nature of electric heat styles, you might often find yourself a bit confused as to how different methods of heat delivery are given via electricity versus gas. We’re here to clear up the muddiness of these topics.

Lastly, there is the all-important issue of safety. Looking at how safe a given device is turns out to be quite important. As a result, we’ll analyze the different safety features you might encounter as you work with the best electric garage heaters.

Electrical considerations

Whenever we hear terms that remind us of power (think words like horsepower, volts, and amps), we tend to think that more is better. However, chasing higher numbers will not necessarily give us the best result when it comes to finding the best electric garage heaters. Here, let’s examine two common words dealing with electric power—watts and volts—and explain what they mean in the context of your electric garage heater.

Watts can pretty much be directly tied to power and heat output. The more watts used, the more power used, and the more heat released. Getting more sounds better, but you’ll want to ensure there are controls to lower heat settings if you get too high wattage. Thermostat shut-off is also handy in these cases. If you’re in a small garage or just need personal infrared heating, 1,500-watt heaters will probably do.

Volts, on the other hand, are not so straightforward. In the US, we use 120V appliances. You’ll often see anything from 110V to 120V listed on most products. But other places (think the UK and other commonwealth countries) often use 240V products, this time with a range of 220V to 240V being the most common listed.

Higher voltage products are capable of putting out higher wattage than heaters with lower voltage. However, the more complex installation (we cannot use 240V products in the US natively) and electrical work required to prepare a space for them make them a more complex choice for most.

And this voltage issue can cause a lot of frustration when searching for an electric garage heater. Many of the top-level product recommendations are 240V products, usually because they have the highest wattage. Again, though, a high wattage isn’t always necessary, especially for localized work or smaller garages. The additional work of using a 240V heater will likely have limited gains for most people.

All this being said, there are more people than just Americans in this world. Plus, some people may already have a 240V set up in their garage or just want the extra power. As a compromise, we’ve focused on listing the best 120V electric garage heaters but have also included a 240V one.

Heating method

The best electric garage heaters typically have one of two heating styles: Convection or infrared. Choosing between these two heating styles is not a simple matter.

Convection heating is closer to the kinds of heating you’re likely used to. This heating style heats and circulates air around an area to provide an enveloping warmth. Convection garage heaters are best for small, enclosed garages.

Infrared heating is a bit more complex but operates more like the heat of the Sun. In effect, a ray is sent out that heats what it hits. However, that isn’t the full story, either, as you’ll notice that many of these heaters also have fans to disperse “stray” heat. Infrared garage heaters are best for large, open garages and individual people.

Safety

In many ways, the best electric garage heaters are already safer than other types of heaters. They don’t give out gasses, and you don’t have to worry about preventing Carbon Monoxide poisoning as you might with traditional heaters. Still, heaters can be dangerous, and if you have a high-efficiency electric garage heater, you should be on the lookout for varying safety measures that can keep you safe if that heat happens to get out of control.

Tip-over protection: This is most important for freestanding electric garage heaters. When a heater is in its normal functioning state, typical models will release concentrated heat out of the front. When tipped over, this “front” can quickly become a surface not intended to get a blast of extreme heat. Tip-over protection gives you an extra layer of security; when it functions properly, the heat will shut down if it happens to get knocked over.

Overheating shut-off: Everything malfunctions occasionally, and even heaters shouldn’t get too hot. This feature will shut an electric garage heater off when it gets too hot to function. This is not to be confused with thermostat control, however.

Safety certifications: There are several possible safety certifications that you might encounter when browsing the best electric garage heaters. The Lasko Space Heater, for example, is ETL listed. This means it meets certain safety requirements for electric heaters in Canada and the U.S. Note that a lack of certification does not mean that a device is unsafe (they’re optional tests, at least for the time being), but they can give you extra peace of mind, which is always worth something.

Shut-off timers: While shut-off timers aren’t safety features, per se, they can help. Their main function is to help you save dollars off of your electric bill and not save your life. But they certainly will help the absent-minded ensure that their electric garage heater gets turned off. If you’ve ever turned the car around to double-check if you’ve locked the front door or turned off the oven, the best electric garage heater for you may well be one with a shut-off timer.

FAQs

Q: How much does an electric garage heater cost?

An electric garage heater can cost anywhere from $50 on the low end to over $1,000. The sweet spot seems to be around the $100 to $200 mark. That being said, electric garage heaters with interesting features or cool mechanisms can go for $600 without being excessive.

Q: Where is the best place to put a garage heater?

The best place to put a garage heater is where there will be the most human traffic. These heaters typically provide the best heat in a radius around them. For people who enter their garage only to get in the car, placing the heater near the door is ideal. That’ll give you maximum warmth as you step into your garage. If you spend a lot of time in your garage doing hobby work, try getting a mobile or overhead electric garage heater.

Q: What temperature should a garage be in the winter?

A garage’s temperature in the winter should be whatever is comfortable to you but not necessarily as warm as indoors. A lot of the best electric garage heaters are made to provide warmth to a solitary person, meaning they don’t necessarily provide a ton of heat to the whole garage. According to Garage Finisher, using climate control (such as an electric garage heater) can help reduce condensation in the garage during the wintertime.

Final thoughts on the best electric garage heaters

Garage heaters have various features, form factors, and usage conditions. However, an electric garage heater in the list above should suit your needs wherever you go and whatever activities you do in your garage. There are even some, such as the Dyson Pure Hot + Cool HP04, that will also serve you during the summer. Keep a solar generator charged up somewhere nearby, and you’ll be ready to keep operating under any circumstances.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best electric garage heaters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best DisplayPort cables of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-displayport-cables/ Sat, 23 Jul 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=457575
Best DisplayPort cables sliced header
Stan Horaczek

Looking for a great DisplayPort cable for your new monitor? Let us connect you with the best interconnects.

The post The best DisplayPort cables of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best DisplayPort cables sliced header
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall KabelDirekt – 15ft is the best overall DisplayPort cable. KabelDirekt – 15ft
SEE IT

Featuring a locking connector and 3-year warranty, this cable can reliably reduce flickering without reducing your available funds.

Best Quality FURUI Nylon is the best quality DisplayPort cable. FURUI Nylon
SEE IT

Highly durable (said to can survive over 16,000 bends) and supporting DisplayPort Version 2.0, this attractive VESA-certified cable is a future-proofed pick.

Best Gaming Capshi DP Cable is the best gaming DisplayPort cable. Capshi DP Cable
SEE IT

When you want to play games with your friends but not your gear, this nicely priced VESA-certified cable brings with it high customer satisfaction.

DisplayPort cables, often described as the computer’s counterpart to television’s HDMI port, help connect your computer to other devices. That much is obvious. However, like all cables, DisplayPort cables include a million different brands, types, lengths, and more to select from, so getting a high-quality one isn’t as obvious. The DisplayPort digital A/V interface—a replacement for DVI, VGA, and even HDMI—is a high-bandwidth standard you’ll find on many top-tier GPUs, so you want to get a good cable to take advantage of all that graphical goodness. Sorting through all of the factors, we’ve picked the best DisplayPort cables so you can spend less time staring at specs and product pages and more looking at whatever content gives your monitor life.

How we chose the best DisplayPort cables

Most DisplayPort cables are going to mechanically work relatively the same, so the primary thing to look for is if you have the physical connection on your PC or laptop that will let the cable work with your favorite ultrawide monitor, that nice secondary monitor you’ve bought for working from home, or one of the best gaming monitors around. Once that’s out of the way, we wanted to look for other factors that could make the cable stand out, such as high-quality wiring, a budget price, or some other special “wow” factor. We scoured specs, peer suggestions, and user impressions in our quest for the best. In the end, any consumer will be able to find an affordable, workable cable in our selection.

The best DisplayPort cables: Reviews & Recommendations

Our list of the best DisplayPort cables will cover a wide range of lengths and cord styles, but all of the cords should retain high quality and reasonably high-resolution capacities. The average consumer will be happy with any cable on the list, but there are also some great alternatives for specific situations that the discerning buyer might face.

Best overall: KabelDirekt – 15ft

KabelDirekt

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The KabelDirekt is a lengthy, officially certified cable with a long lifespan and the capacity to reduce flickering in your screens.

Specs

  • Length: 15 ft.
  • Version: 1.4
  • Resolution capacity: 8K@60Hz, also works for 240Hz and 144Hz

Pros

  • Locking connector
  • 3-year warranty
  • Easily reduces flickering

Cons

  • No built-in cord control

The KabalDirekt is the standard DisplayPort cable of the 1.4 version style. As it comes VESA certified, you know that you are getting the standard 1.4 experience and nothing less. This level of quality is compounded with a 3-year warranty and a multitude of customers raving about having reduced monitor flickering while using this KabelDirect.

KabelDirect also has a USB-C to DisplayPort version if you happen to be using a USB-C monitor that supports a DisplayPort signal, such as the Acer Nitro XV282K KVbmiipruzx.

While the 15-foot length of the cable is impressive with the given specs, I was a bit disappointed by the lack of built-in cord controls. That being said, this cable works wonderfully and will make the majority of people very happy. If you’re looking for something that excels in other ways, though, please read on.

Best quality: FURUI Nylon

FURUI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The FURUI Nylon is the best version 2.0 DisplayPort cable you can buy. 

Specs

  • Length: 6 ft.
  • Version: 2.0
  • Resolution capacity: 16K@60Hz, 10K@60Hz, 8K@120Hz

Pros

  • Highly durable cord can survive over 16,000 bends
  • Uses the highly quality 2.0 DisplayPort version, capable of 16K resolution
  • VESA certified

Cons

  • No locking mechanism

The FURUI Nylon presents us with a superb DisplayPort cable that is capable of producing an 8K resolution quality even at 120Hz. For the high-end monitors of the future, it can even go up to a whopping 16K. It can be hard to believe how high the quality of the FURUI’s resolution capacity is, far surpassing the needs of most consumers, but you can rest assured … the FURUI comes VESA certified.

Talking about high numbers, the FURUI is promoting a stat most companies do not: max bends. According to FURUI, the cord can withstand over 16,000 bends without degrading. While I doubt anybody has taken the time to independently test this with their own two hands, the nylon-braided exterior certainly seems durable! And triple shielding helps block out electromagnetic interference (EMI).

So, what is the FURUI Nylon lacking? One of those click-button locks to secure the cable in its port. That’s it; otherwise, this is the next-gen DisplayPort cable your futuristic monitors deserve.

Best gaming: Capshi DP Cable

Capshi

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This cable from Capshi was made with gamers in mind, and they seem to like it!

Specs

  • Length: 10 ft.
  • Version: 1.4
  • Resolution capacity: 8K@60Hz, 4K@144Hz, 1080P@240Hz

Pros

  • Made with gamers in mind
  • Good price
  • High customer satisfaction
  • VESA certified

Cons

  • No locking mechanism

The Capshi DisplayPort cable is made with gaming monitors in mind, targeting frequencies thought to be best for gamers. A high user rating shows that PC gamers do, indeed, approve. It also happens to be VESA certified, so you know exactly what you’re getting when it comes to quality.

The cord is thin and bendable so that you can snake it around tricky setups. It will also stay relatively discrete with the black, nylon outer covering. Lastly, for appearances, when you put the Capshi into storage, you won’t have any difficulty knowing what it is when you retrieve it months or even years later as “8K” is largely and prominently displayed on its head.

If you really like the locking-in mechanism that so many DisplayPort cables have, you’ll probably be a bit sad that it isn’t there. You’ll quickly recover when you see the price tag, though, as the Capshi DisplayPort cable is somewhat cheaper than other similarly capable cables.

Best premium wiring: UGREEN 8K

UGREEN

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The UGREEN 8k is multi-layered to protect the wires inside and look nice while doing it.

Specs

  • Length: 10 ft.
  • Version: 1.4
  • Resolution capacity: 8K@60Hz, 4K@144Hz, 2K@165Hz

Pros

  • Outer braided shielding is a stylish, shiny black
  • Click-button locking

Cons

  • Wide plugs (could be a plus)

For those of you looking for a snazzier cord, the UGREEN 8K should do the trick. The wires inside the cable are triple-layered, using layers of tin, aluminum, and nylon braids to reduce EMI. That outer nylon braid layer is a rich, shiny black that will compliment your battlestation’s LED light strips.

The plugs themselves are a touch wider than the average. For most people, this won’t be a problem and will allow for a snugger fit in looser ports. However, if you’re using a port that isn’t allowing room for a bit extra, you might not have as good of a time.

Best budget: Amazon Basics 8K

Amazon Basics

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This basic cable is in the single-digit price range and comes from Amazon, ensuring Amazon-level support.

Specs

  • Size: 6-feet long, 1/4-inch thick
  • Version: 1.4
  • Resolution capacity: 4K@120Hz, 8K@60Hz

Pros

  • Can achieve 4K and even 8K on a budget
  • Amazon Basics level of customer care
  • Consistently delivers

Cons

  • No locking mechanism
  • Very wide cord (this could be a plus)

For our budget pick, we once again turn to the Amazon Basics store. In my mind, this is already a plus, since you’re likely already used to the brand and know what to expect from their customer service. The Amazon Basics DisplayPort cable provides a consistent DisplayPort connection and decent customer service, but how does it stack up in terms of functionality?

Just about the same as any of the other 1.4 DisplayPort cables on this list—4K@120Hz and 8K@60Hz really shouldn’t be making you blink an eye at this point. The wires themselves are quite standard.

Where Amazon cuts back and saves money is through the wire’s coating and head. Instead of using fancy nylon or metallic coverings, Amazon just uses a thicker wire. While this could be good for people worried about damaging their cable’s inner components, the thickness greatly reduces flexibility and can make running it through tight spaces challenging. The connector heads are also lacking the clicking lock mechanisms, which can also serve to disappoint.

While these setbacks make the Amazon Basics DisplayPort a difficult recommendation for a portable second monitor, it excels in just about every other way.

Things to consider before buying DisplayPort cables

DisplayPort cables are not super complicated, but there are some things that you’ll need to take into account before making a purchase. Your room or office setup will be one of the more critical factors. The distance between your monitor and the CPU, how many twists and bends the cord will need to make, and what kind of equipment you’re connecting all play a relevant role in this, too. To make it simple, we’ve broken this all down into three key things to consider when finding the best DisplayPort cable for your setup:

Length & width

An obvious reminder here first: You need to get a cable that is, at minimum, long enough to reach between the two devices you’re connecting. So, you absolutely have to remember to check the dimensions of your space against the length of the cable before purchasing it. Be sure to get something that will afford you a bit of wiggle room, too, as you don’t want to be unable to adjust your setup later on.

However, can you get a DisplayPort cable that is too long? Actually, yes. Beyond becoming a tripping hazard, the quality of a DisplayPort cable will go down the longer it is. Fortunately, this isn’t really a problem for customers because DisplayPort cable manufacturers will give you the resolution capacity (see below) of the cables they sell for the size they are sold in. If you buy a wire that fits your resolution needs and length needs, you’re good to go!

Now, what about width? Thicker cables are less bendy but are less flimsy and less prone to wear and tear bending. Thinner cables can be snaked into smaller places and bent at sharper angles, but will always be more susceptible to damage. High-quality coatings and protective materials on the outside of the cable improve durability for cables of all widths.

Version

Primarily, you’ll hear about DisplayPort 1.2, 1.4, and 2.0 cables. Our recommendation is to get 1.4 and higher DisplayPort cables. DisplayPort version 1.4 is able to take advantage of 8K video resolutions and supports nearly all audio formats, making it a fine choice for most consumers.

All of our recommended DisplayPort cables run 1.4, except for the FURUI Nylon, which runs DisplayPort version 2.0. Version 2.0 is capable of beyond 8K resolution, transmitting image data at lightning-fast speeds, and is backward-compatible with 1.4 if you need it to be. Still, at this point, you are unlikely to be in a position to truly need such a cable.

Resolution capacity

We’ve been alluding to it this whole time while discussing cable length and version, but one of the biggest defining features of a DisplayPort cable is its resolution capacity. Depending on the refresh rate used, cables have different max resolution capacities.

That sounds a bit confusing, so let’s use the Capshi cable’s stats to explain: 8K@60Hz, 4K@144Hz, 1080P@240Hz. At a refresh rate of 60Hz (60 frames per second), you can get an 8K resolution, while at a refresh rate of 240Hz you can only get 1080P.

Two things to note are the inverse relationship between resolution quality and refresh rate and the fact that your monitor will also be a major limiting factor. Just because your DisplayPort cable is capable of an 8K resolution, doesn’t mean your monitor will support such a thing.

FAQs

Q: How much does a DisplayPort cable cost?

A DisplayPort cable usually costs around $10 to $20. The materials that go into the cables aren’t too expensive, so manufacturers are able to keep them cheap. If you see a DisplayPort cable going for over $50, approach that cable with a wary eye.

Q: Are DisplayPort cables all the same?

No, DisplayPort cables are not all the same. While they all have a similar appearance, the wiring can have different standards or versions. Today, most people will want at least version 1.4 and possibly 2.0. That bargain-bin DisplayPort cable at your local office supply store might appear to be just like any other DisplayPort, but could easily be a version 1.2, capable of transferring much lower resolutions than modern DisplayPort cables.

Q: Do DisplayPort cables matter for gaming?

DisplayPort cables might matter for your gaming setup. All DisplayPort cables have differing capabilities in resolution capacities at various refresh rates. If you have a gaming monitor with fantastic specs, just don’t use a low-quality DisplayPort cable to connect to it.

Final thoughts on the best DisplayPort cables

Getting a DisplayPort cable shouldn’t be a headache. While there can be some nuance for some situations, you are unlikely to not find satisfaction with at least one cable from this list. DisplayPort cables themselves are relatively simple, with the devices they connect with usually being the source of any difficulties.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best DisplayPort cables of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best home weather stations of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-home-weather-stations/ Wed, 10 Aug 2022 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=461393
Best home weather stations sliced header
Tony Ware

From wind speed to local humidity, these home weather stations will have you feeling like a meteorologist.

The post The best home weather stations of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best home weather stations sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall Ambient Weather WS-2902C WiFi Smart Weather Station is the best overall. Ambient Weather WS-2902C WiFi Smart Weather Station
SEE IT

A solar-powered, connected measurement system that’s quick to setup and easy to monitor.

Best For The Money Tempest Weather System is the best for the money. Tempest Weather System
SEE IT

With a downward-facing intake and 1,000-plus feet of wireless data transmission, this solar-powered, Google Home-equipped station meets all needs.

Best Basic EZRead Headwind Consumer Products 840-0052 5-in-1 Weather Station is the best basic home weather station. EZRead Headwind Consumer Products 840-0052 5-in-1 Weather Station
SEE IT

Easy to install and clean, this inexpensive and highly educational station measures more than you’d expect.

With summers getting hotter and hotter each year, wanting a personalized weather statement each day is starting to make more sense. However, if you’re new to the home weather station game, you might not know what you want yet. There are quite a lot of options to choose from, wired and wireless models to deal with, and even some viable analog products out there. When paired with samey-looking digital displays, it can be difficult to decide the overall best product. That’s why we’ve worked diligently to determine customers’ needs in a home weather station, while also avoiding common flaws these systems might have. The result is our list of the best home weather stations purchasable this year.

How we chose the best home weather stations

I have experience with consumer weather station usage in a field environment, as per my previous career in the sciences. Used for much the same reason that anyone would want a personal home weather station—the desire to know very local meteorological conditions—I have a bit of insight into what you might desire from a home weather station. Not to mention what problems you might face! For, as it turns out, when you have instruments measuring weather, you also have to open them up to the weather, a not always friendly beast. I combined that experience with critical reviews and online user impressions to select our top five models for home weather stations.

The best home weather stations: Reviews & Recommendations

The home weather stations we’ve collected vary in style, functionality, and pricing so that you’ll be able to find something that fits your desires. We’ve also looked at what you’re looking for, such as compatibility with the Google Home system, and found top-ranking products that match those desires.

Best overall: Ambient Weather WS-2902C WiFi Smart Weather Station

Ambient Weather

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Ambient Weather WS-2902C is Amazon’s best-rated home weather station and has robust weather monitoring capabilities.

Specs

  • Measures: Wind speed and direction, temperature, humidity, rainfall, UV and solar radiation
  • Power supply: Solar with AA-battery backup
  • Sensor size: 15 x 11 x 10 inches

Pros

  • Solar-powered measurement station
  • Connects with Ambient Weather system
  • Quick setup

Cons

  • Measurement station and display device use different types of batteries

The first home weather station, and the overall winner on our list, is the Ambient Weather WS-2902C. The WS-2902C earns this distinction by having appealing features and being the best-rated home weather station by online shoppers.

First and foremost is the easy setup-and-forget nature of this home weather station. After taking a few minutes to place it on a pole and connect it to your WiFi network, you won’t find yourself fiddling with it often. Part of this is because of its hybrid solar and battery-powered measurement unit. Another important aspect is how easily accessible your data is via the Ambient Weather app environment.

One of the main problems I found with the product was that the display device and measurement stations used different types of batteries—the former taking AAA’s and the latter taking AA’s (may we recommend rechargeables). Admittedly, this is a minor problem, as the display device can be plugged in and the measurement station only needs batteries for cloudy days.

At the end of the day, this is a fantastic wireless weather station that also has nice power-saving features, making it amongst the best eco-friendly home weather stations as well. All for a sub-$200 price point!

Best for the money: Tempest Weather System

WeatherFlow

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Tempest Weather System provides information on par with a professional weather system but at a much more affordable price.

Specs

  • Things measured: Temperature, “feels like” temperature, solar and UV radiation, wind speed and direction, dew point, humidity, barometric pressure, lightning strikes, rainfall
  • Power supply: Solar with lithium-ion battery backup
  • Sensor size: 11.70 x 4.23 inches

Pros

  • Downward-facing intakes on measurement device
  • Solar-powered
  • Works well with Google Home
  • 1,000+ foot wireless data transmission range

Cons

  • Periodic measurement quirks

The Tempest Weather System provides a myriad of data points in a well-designed package. With the Tempest reporting around a dozen weather stats, it is hard to believe that it has no moving parts, reducing the impacts of age and wear and tear on the system. Furthermore, the design ensures any openings are downwards-facing, reducing the chances of clogging.

Unlike many home weather systems, the Tempest Weather System does not have an indoor display unit. Instead, the Tempest Weather Station is “smart” and updates every 3 seconds to 1 minute to a wireless transmission hub you can locate within 1,000 feet of the weather station. From there, info is sent to your smartphone(s) and Internet-of-Things devices. This includes Google Assistant, making it the best weather station for Google Home. You can then use the data to program your smart home, such as by having fans turn on or off depending on temperature readings given by the device.

All of this advanced measurement isn’t 100% perfect, but once you understand the quirks, you’ll be able to get a good read. The rain gauge, for example, uses touch-based vibrational sensors to get a reading. Each pitter-patter of rain on the side gets interpreted as a raindrop. That’s great, but sometimes other vibrations or small things hitting in on the windiest of days will also set it into rain gauge mode. The lightning detection has its own quirks, with user reviews mentioning that the Tempest Weather Station has mistaken gunshots for lightning. However, once these small quirks are acknowledged and accounted for, you are left with the best home weather station for the money due to just how much it can do.

Best with wind speed: WeatherFlow WEATHERmeter

WeatherFlow

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The WeatherFlow WEATHERmeter is your personal handheld view into the world of wind.

Specs

  • Things measured: Average wind speed, wind gust, apparent wind speed, true wind speed, wind direction, temperature, humidity, pressure, dew point, heat index, wind chill, etc.
  • Power supply: Internal battery
  • Size: Handheld

Pros

  • High mobility
  • Works directly with your phone
  • Gives detailed wind speed analysis
  • Multiple app integrations

Cons

  • Uses phone’s compass instead of providing one

If you’re here just to know about wind speed, you’ll be delighted with the handheld WeatherFlow WEATHERmeter. This version is the newest update to the popular 2019 model and has the capability to give you a detailed look at your immediate wind conditions, making it a perfect golf, kiting, or overall nature companion.

One interesting thing that the WeatherFlow WEATHERmeter will tell you is both the apparent wind speed and true wind speed. The apparent wind speed tells you how fast the wind is going relative to the device, while the true wind speed gives a measure of how fast the wind is actually going. The WeatherFlow WEATHERmeter also reports gust wind speeds and average wind speeds.

The makers of the WeatherFlow WEATHERmeter clearly have the hobbyist in mind and that shows more in the selection of apps you can use it with than with any other factor. Pair this weather station with any of the following six apps: Wind & Weather Meter, iKiteSurf, iWindSurf, SailFlow, FishWeather, and WindAlert.

What might disappoint you about the WeatherFlow WEATHERmeter is the lack of an internal compass. Instead, you must rely on your phone’s compass for accurate wind direction readouts. However, we wouldn’t count this as too bad of a tradeoff, considering phone compasses are getting better every year, and you are able to get such an advanced wind meter in such a convenient-to-carry form.

Best basic: EZRead Headwind Consumer Products 840-0052 5-in-1 Weather Station

EZRead

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This analog weather station gives you a hands-on read of your local weather conditions.

Specs

  • Things measured: Temperature, wind chill, rainfall, total rain, wind speed and direction
  • Power supply: N/A; completely analog
  • Item size: 1 x 8 x 10 inches

Pros

  • Highly educational
  • Easy to install and clean
  • Measures more than expected
  • Inexpensive

Cons

  • Tiny measurement display can’t be read from window

For the weather hobbyist who wants to understand the weather in a way that transcends digital charts and displays, the EZRead 840-0052 is the best home weather station. Considering that it is only ~$20, the EZRead can also be bought in bulk, making it also ranked as the best weather station for kids and student projects.

To get started using the EZRead the only thing you’ll need to do is mount it and wait for weather to happen. The mounting process is relatively simple, as the metal frame has two preconfigured holes in it, which Headwind Consumer Products recommends affixing to a fence or patio support, but feel free to be creative.

The EZRead measures a surprising quantity of things, including total rain and wind speed, and does so in both the good ole American Imperial units and the more scientifically customary metric units. The EZRead has a wind chill chart directly on the device, to help you convert the thermometer’s temperature to a “feels like” number. In this way, this home weather station will become an arithmetic booster for your kids and bridge the gap between science, math, and reality.

Finally, for all that has been said about cleaning tubes and open holes in home weather stations, it must be said that nothing can be easier to clean than the rain gauge on the EZRead. It is essentially a removable graduated cylinder and can be cleaned with a vase or pipe cleaner quickly. The manufacturer recommends this rain gauge part be turned upside down during freezing weather to prevent damage, but it can just as easily be moved inside.

Best budget: Newentor Weather Station

Newentor

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This home weather station provides you with the reading and stats you really want without the extra costs and hassles of a premium model.

Specs

  • Things measured: Temperature and humidity
  • Power supply: AA batteries
  • Display size: 7.5 inches

Pros

  • Also includes the atomic clock, weather forecast, and lunar phase
  • Display unit can accommodate up to 3 sensors
  • Gets the fundamentals right without charging you extra

Cons

  • Limited valid sensor placements

If the main thing you want to know is how hot of a summer day you are about to face and how much humidity will be bearing down on you, consider looking no further than the Newentor Weather Station. You aren’t being charged extra for delicate wind meters and rain gauges, and the whole apparatus is supplemented by local weather forecasts. This is definitely the best home weather station for those in rural areas where the local station’s rain forecast is good enough, but local humidity and temperature change wildly based on local hills, mountains, rivers, and lakes.

This home weather station’s indoor display unit will also give you additional information, such as the time from the WWVB atomic clock system, a weather forecast, the current moon phase, and a mini calendar. A happy/sad/neutral face system will tell you about the outside weather conditions, and there are optional temperature alerts. The Newentor should sync with the WWVB system within about 24 hours of initial use, after which all time-based additional features will begin working.

The sensors (this package comes with one, but you can order up to two more for the system) can be installed within 200 feet of your indoor display unit, but some care must be taken in this. Newentor recommends a North-facing wall and that the unit be out of the way of rain and direct sunlight. In my eyes, this makes a North-facing patio the best place for installation, but your personal circumstances may vary. Additionally, the unit requires two AA batteries.

Finally, while our best basic product (the EZRead, discussed above) is technically the cheapest home weather station on our list, we’ve listed this as our best budget pick. The reasoning is simple: The Newentor Weather Station is the best digital weather station under $50.

Things to consider before buying the best home weather stations

When you first decided to buy a home weather station, you probably excitedly asked yourself a few questions, such as: Can a home weather station measure more than temperature and humidity? Can I get one that is affordable? Where will I be able to put the measuring devices?

As it turns out, there are quite a few things that you will need to consider when making a home weather station purchase that aren’t that obvious, including:

Things measured

The big four for home weather stations are temperature, humidity, wind speed, and wind direction. Nearly all home weather stations can measure these, but there are things that you might want to measured, such as the UV radiation level, that are nice to know and can add extra usefulness to your system. Some of our best home weather station picks can also measure other stats, such as dew point, lightning strikes, and gust wind speed.

One issue is that you may discover you don’t really want or need all the measurements provided by a given home weather station. While being able to measure a lot of different things looks great for marketing, it also drives up costs. For many people, a home weather station that is able to measure a few things well is better than a home weather station that can measure dozens of things.

Additionally, as we’ll see in the next category, you should also consider the ability of each thing to be measured properly based on your local environment. Based on the instrument positioning, see below, measuring rainfall might be difficult if you’re wanting to set up your home weather station near a small-leafed bush.

Instrument positioning

Instrument positioning will likely be the most important, but also most obscure, factor that determines your overall happiness with your home weather station. One of the unfortunate parts of being a weather machine is that you have to experience a lot of, well, weather and nature. You’ll want to think about where you are going to put your home weather station’s measurement device as well as where any intake holes are placed on it.

Commonly, difficulties with instrument positioning will present themselves in an upward-facing hole, usually as part of the rain gauge. One aesthetically pleasing, but operationally sub-optimal installation onto a pole that has a bird feeder or bird house, and you’ve got a major problem: bits of seeds or bird excrement clogging up your home weather station.

Other sources of problems include foliage blocking wind meters, mowed lawns kicking up grass into side-facing holes, and overheating equipment. Not all devices are made to withstand all conditions. You want one that’s durable and then you want it positioned thoughtfully so you can, say, find out how much action your home wind turbine might get today or whether you need to be worried for your solar generator’s panels.

Power supply

Are you going with a battery or a wire for your home weather station? The answer to this question is going to be very important for the quality of interactions you have with your home weather station.

While you might think that the choice will come down to having a wired model or something with a battery, the reality is a bit different. Some models tend to work off of solar power, with a battery used as a backup, while other models use solely batteries. We’ll be presenting a mixture of both styles to you, as each can be appealing at certain price ranges and functionalities.

We also have a very basic analog product, the EZRead Headwind Consumer Products 840-0052 5-in-1 Weather Station. This one forgoes the whole power supply problem altogether and relies solely on the power of wind and gravity to make it work.

FAQs

Q: How much does a home weather station cost?

A home weather station can cost anywhere from $20 for an analog reader to over $300 for an advanced digital model. Modern-day weather enthusiasts should aim to find something that is around $300, but anyone can find a great, workable model for less. When pricing home weather stations, balance your needs with what the station provides. For example, avoid paying top dollar for a home weather station that will count local lightning strikes if all you want is something that can tell you the current temperature and humidity.

Q: Where should home weather stations be located?

Home weather stations should be located near the home, in the environment specified by the manufacturer. Budget-friendly home weather stations might do worse in direct sunlight, while solar-powered home weather stations clearly need direct sunlight. Our write-ups on each of the best home weather stations should give you an idea of whether the station is right for your home.

Q: Are home weather stations worth it?

Home weather stations are worth it if you have a burning desire to know about hyper-local weather, typically get inaccurate results from your local weather station as a result of special geographic concerns, or certain weather factors influence your life heavily. For example, if you live on the East side of a mountain, but your local weather station is on the West side of it, a home weather station will turn out to be more accurate. Another example is golf and gardening enthusiasts, who will find very local wind and humidity readings very useful.

Final thoughts on the best home weather stations

Getting one of the best home weather stations means getting quality without having to spend the sometimes exorbitant amounts for professional weather stations that meteorologists use. Even basic analog weather stations like the EZRead can provide value to the right person, but we recommend the Ambient Weather WS-2902C WiFi Smart Weather Station for the right blend of quality and cost.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best home weather stations of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best enclosed 3D printers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-enclosed-3d-printers/ Mon, 18 Sep 2023 16:45:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=571461
four enclosed 3D printers sliced together
Abby Ferguson

Even the best 3D printers need a stable environment to create a picture-perfect model.

The post The best enclosed 3D printers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
four enclosed 3D printers sliced together
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Dremel 3D45 enclosed 3D printer Dremel 3D45
SEE IT

An overall favorite that also happens to be an enclosed 3D printer.

Best budget FlashForge Adventurer 3 enclosed 3D printer FlashForge Adventurer 3
SEE IT

A slightly older, well-tested model that still gets the thumbs-up from enthusiasts.

Best under $1,000 FlashForge Adventurer 4 Pro enclosed 3D printer FlashForge Adventurer 4 Pro
SEE IT

The design includes some of the best extras for enclosed 3D printers.

As average people are getting more used to 3D printing, it becomes easier to see how enclosed 3D printers help ensure quality prints. Keeping the inner environment of the printer stable—with no temperature fluctuations from air vents or heaters—prevents irregularities in the cooling of PLA or other filaments in your design. It also keeps mosquitoes, houseflies, and other unwanted visitors from destroying a multi-hour print. Likewise, as parents are eager to show older children the wonders of 3D printing, an enclosure protects the curious fingers of younger siblings from a horrible accident. But 3D printers come in many types, and, as a result, there are many varieties of enclosed ones. Here is a collection of them, representing the best enclosed 3D printers.

How we chose the best enclosed 3D printers

In many ways, finding the best enclosed 3D printers is the same as finding the best 3D printers as a whole. In effect, you can look at a fantastic 3D printer and check if it has an enclosure. Simply put, if you find one of the best 3D printers with an enclosure, it follows that it would also be one of the best enclosed 3D printers.

While this logic works to some degree, and we’ve definitely made picks that reflect its wisdom, it is a bit simplistic and reductionist. So we’ve also had to ask ourselves what people are looking for in an enclosed 3D printer that makes the category different.

In many ways, we’ve found this reflected by price and complexity. Oftentimes, enclosed 3D printers are a bit pricier than the competition. A small bit of this is because of the enclosure (plastic is a material cost, after all). But it can also be because printers with built-in enclosures also have more advanced hardware and capabilities. As a result, we’ve also included the highly sought-after enclosed 3D printers that hit certain price benchmarks and/or are more appropriate for average users.

The best enclosed 3D printers: Reviews & Recommendations

In the following list, you’ll find the best enclosed 3D printers, suitable for a wide variety of people. Items on this list are designed to appeal to customers of varying experience levels, needs, and purchasing power.

(Please note that the following list is composed of fused deposition modeling, or FDM, printers only, which come in enclosed and open varieties. Due to their nature, the best resin 3D printers are all enclosed.)

Best overall: Dremel 3D45

Dremel

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Our overall favorite 3D printer this year happens to have an enclosure.

Specs

  • Size: 18.75 x 23 x 18.75 inches
  • Build volume: 6.7 x 10 x 6 inches
  • Materials supported: PLA, Nylon, ECO-ABS, PETG

Pros

  • Premium heated glass build plate
  • Internal HD camera
  • Comes with PETG and ECO-ABS filament spools
  • Very quiet

Cons

  • Expensive

An overall top pick for the best 3D printers already, the Dremel 3D45 is an enclosed printer. And it makes a ton of sense because, as we discussed, the printers that typically benefit the most from being enclosed are also those of the highest quality.

This printer regularly tops lists due to its quick setup, high quality, and reliable prints. It can be controlled via the touchscreen, web app, or a USB-connected device. Using its variety of compatible filaments is easy with RFID tagging, which guides the machine into using the best settings for each connected filament type. This takes a lot of the guesswork out of choosing the best 3D printer filaments for your printer.

The Dremel 3D45 comes across as one of the best enclosed 3D printers in a literal sense, too, as the enclosure provides a good seal. That seal produces an internal environment that is not only quite stable but also rather soundproof. This results in a quieter printing process.

Additionally, there is an internal HD camera, allowing you to peek in and see how progress is coming easily. This could be for fun, as it is always neat to see how things are progressing. Or it can save on time and material costs in the case of a mistake or malfunction.

Best under $1,000: FlashForge Adventurer 4 Pro

FlashForge

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The price is right on the best of the popular Adventurer series from FlashForge.

Specs

  • Size: 500 x 470 x 540 mm
  • Build volume: 220 x 200 x 250 mm
  • Materials supported: ABS, PLA, PETG, PLA-CF, PETG-CF

Pros

  • Intense 30-point auto-leveling sensor
  • Up to 300mm/s build speed
  • HEPA 13 air filter
  • Internal camera allows for time-lapse video production

Cons

  • Finicky WiFi connection

Currently, we recognize FlashForge 3D printers as popular, easy-to-use models that produce consistent results. The FlashForge Adventurer 4 Pro is no different, creating at speeds up to 300mm/s through a 0.4mm nozzle.

The FlashForge Adventurer 4 Pro provides the perfect level of quality for the price. It brings in many features that are effortless to use but inevitably improve the quality of your print. While it only takes three points to make a plane, this 3D printer uses a 30-point leveling system automatically.

One of the most frustrating things about having an enclosure is the reduced visibility of the print area. The FlashForge Adventurer 4 Pro avoids this by providing an internal camera view accessible via the PolarCloud app. While this in and of itself isn’t too special, the FlashForge Adventurer 4 Pro provides a 100-image time-lapse build video for you to see the finer points of the creation of your printer. These features easily place the FlashForge Adventurer 4 Pro as the best enclosed 3D printer for those wanting to analyze model building in detail.

Best high speed: Bambu Lab X1-Carbon Combo 3D Printer

Bambu Lab

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This enclosed 3D printer can print up to 500mm/s in four simultaneous filament outputs.

Specs

  • Size: 389 x 389 x 457 mm
  • Build volume: 256 x 256 x 256 mm
  • Materials supported: PLA, PETG, TPU, ABS, ASA, PVA, PET

Pros

  • Holds four filament spools at once for multi-color action
  • Anti-failure detection systems
  • 7-micron lidar resolution
  • AI-based first-layer inspection

Cons

  • Chamber camera sold separately

As far as commercially available enclosed 3D printers go, the Bambu Lab X1-Carbon Combo 3D Printer features some of the best technical specs. With a default of four filament inputs (it can go up to 16), this printer puts out up to 32 cubic millimeters of filament at a rate of 500 horizontal millimeters per second. This, combined with a great resolution, makes this device high-powered, technically sound, and the best 3D printer for cosplay and other hobbies.

If you’re familiar with entry-level models of 3D printers, you’ll certainly be familiar with first-layer issues. Sometimes, that first bit of filament just doesn’t stick properly or will come out a bit weird. With any luck, on an open printer, you can pull a bad blob of filament away. It’s not so easy on an enclosed printer. However, this is not an issue with the Bambu due to an AI-based inspection system that detects problems with the first layer in a calculated manner.

One of the few problems with the Bambu Lab X1-Carbon Combo 3D Printer is that our ability to inspect its insides during printing is somewhat limited. While there is a slot for the chamber camera, you’ll have to purchase it separately.

Best simple: Monoprice Voxel

Monoprice

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Ready to grow in complexity with you, this 3D printer can be bought at a very reasonable price.

Specs

  • Size: 15.7 x 15 x 15.9 inches
  • Build volume: 6.9 x 6.9 x 6.9 inches
  • Materials supported: ABS, PLA, Wood Fill, Copper Fill, Steel Fill, Bronze Fill

Pros

  • Internal HD camera
  • Internal memory
  • Easy nozzle replacement
  • Very reasonable pricing

Cons

  • Relatively slow print speed

If you want the environmental advantages of the best enclosed 3D printers but don’t want to splurge on high-end specs, the Monoprice Voxel provides a good middle ground.

For example, the hand-holding and restrictions that might be associated with a for-kids printer are absent, but features like quick nozzle changes are not. The Monoprice Voxel gives you the room to grow with it, suggesting you start with PLA prints, but comes ready to tackle other projects as well once you get your footing.

The Monoprice Voxel has very reasonable pricing for an enclosed 3D printer, especially for one that comes with an HD camera. This does come at the price of being a bit slower to print, but the tradeoff is worth it. If you’re new to the hobby but know you want to start with an enclosed printer, it’s hard to find a better starting point.

Best budget: FlashForge Adventurer 3

FlashForge

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This model will get you printing quickly, with help always at hand.

Specs

  • Size: 22 x 22 x 22 inches
  • Build volume: 150 x 150 x 150 mm
  • Materials supported: PLA and ABS

Pros

  • Plug-and-play setup
  • Lifetime technical assistance
  • Built-in HD camera

Cons

  • Not the newest model
  • Slow print speeds

FlashForge’s Adventurer 3 remains one of its top models due to its quick setup time, easy-to-understand layout, and possibility to use with kids. With more advanced software, it is easy to become overwhelmed, but the FlashForge Adventurer 3 uses highly comprehensible software to promote consistency of results no matter your experience or age. It also contains the all-important HD camera within so that you can get a good look as your prints form.

One thing to note is that the FlashForge Adventurer 3 is not the latest model in its line. In some ways, this can be not good, as it recognizes an end to development for the product. However, you can also expect the experience to be complete upon purchase, as its form is still approved by many others. Plus, you’ll still have access to lifetime technical support from FlashForge.

What to consider before buying enclosed 3D printers

The first question to ask yourself will always be if you want an enclosed 3D printer in the first place. If you, or the person you’re attempting to gift a 3D printer to, already have a 3D printer, consider buying an enclosure to add to it. This third-party enclosure for Ender 3 series 3D printers will add a lot of longevity to your existing printer, for instance.

That being said, if you are about to enter your foray into the world of enclosed 3D printers, here are some things to look out for.

First layer quality

One of the few disadvantages of enclosed 3D printers is restricted access to the first layer as it is being built. This is important because a healthy first layer is both critical for the success of your print and a common point of failure.

One way that enclosed 3D printers cause difficulty with the first layer is due to reduced vision. If you can’t see the print easily, you will have difficulty finding out if the layer has an issue.

The other issue is that there is no physical access to the print. If the first part of your filament comes out a bit “blobby,” you can often use a twist tie or other instrument to save the print on open printers. It isn’t so easy with enclosed 3D printers.

The best enclosed 3D printers will circumvent these issues altogether by providing a quality first build. They can achieve this via high-quality build plates, nozzles, and filament dispensing tech. The Bambu Lab X1-Carbon Combo 3D Printer uses an AI-based system to determine the first layer’s quality mathematically, but you can also do a bit of your own calculating via a camera (see below).

Build volume

To the uninitiated, it can seem like a 3D printer with a built-in enclosure will simply build within the entire area of the enclosure. Instead, it really is just an enclosure meant to keep internal conditions constant. Bigger printers do not directly correlate to bigger prints.

Instead, keep a lookout on build volume (also referred to with terms like print volume or build area) to get an idea of how big your prints can be. While bigger build volumes are generally considered better, you also have to pay for them.

Since compact sizes (of the 3D printer bodies) are beneficial for your own space, try to look for smaller-bodied 3D printers with larger build volumes when all other things are equal.

Internal features

The best enclosed 3D printers will have features on the inside that you are less likely to see on open 3D printers.

The most common of these will be a camera, with HD being the quality standard of most manufacturers. These cameras help you see the first layer quality and detect if there are problems with the print mid-production (such as a lack of support with your custom experimental build). Plus, they are just plain cool to view. One highlight of the FlashForge Adventurer 4 Pro is its ability to make a 100-frame time-lapse video of your print being made.

Another feature you might see is a filtration system to prevent particles from getting in (or out) of the enclosure. However, this feature is less common and may even be excessive for average consumer-grade 3D printers.

FAQs

Q: How much does an enclosed 3D printer cost?

An enclosed printer can cost anywhere from around $300 to well over $1,000. Enclosed 3D printers can be seen as a subsection of 3D printers as a whole but typically have a larger minimum entry price than open printers.

Q: Are enclosed 3D printers better?

Enclosed 3D printers are better than their open counterparts when all other things are considered equally. The enclosed environment provides for a more consistent print and reduces the chances of print failure. When picking a random enclosed 3D printer and a random open 3D printer for comparison, the enclosed 3D printer will likely also be better. This is because an enclosed 3D printer is more likely to have the hardware to make an enclosure worth adding.

Q: Does PLA print better in an enclosure?

If the rest of the 3D printer is high quality, PLA will print better in an enclosure. If you feel your spool of PLA filament, you will notice it is hard plastic. To make a 3D print with PLA, this hard plastic is heated to the point of pliability and then rapidly cooled to make a firm object. Just as a fan keeps one side of our body cool, the same thing can happen to PLA. The result? An uneven print. Enclosures help prevent this unevenness and, therefore, produce better prints.

Final thoughts on the best enclosed 3D printers

While typically more expensive than open 3D printers, the best enclosed 3D printers cover a wide range of prices. There are also a lot of different styles and levels of capability you can get across the varying enclosed 3D printers on the market. However, with the preceding list, you should be able to find something worthy of your needs.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best enclosed 3D printers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best backup cameras of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-backup-cameras/ Sat, 10 Sep 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=468712
best backup camera sliced header
Tony Ware

After being spoiled by modern rental cars, we had to bring some of that situational awareness to our older models.

The post The best backup cameras of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best backup camera sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall AUTO-VOX T2 is the best overall backup camera. AUTO-VOX T2
SEE IT

With a full-color instruction manual and a complete kit that works with most cars, this dust- and water-resistant camera is the easiest wired install.

Best for RV Furrion Vision S FOS07TAPM is the best backup camera for RV. Furrion Vision S FOS07TAPM
SEE IT

Offering a four-camera, complete vision design, plus motion sensor tech with microphones, this IP65 camera can handle a crosscountry adventure.

Best budget LeeKooLuu LK3 is the best budget backup camera. LeeKooLuu LK3
SEE IT

Great installation options and above-average weather resistance make you feel like speeding less didn’t mean compromising.

With backup cameras being mandated in newly made U.S. vehicles starting in 2018, it is inevitable that you’ll find yourself in a car with one, if you haven’t already. Whether you’ve been an Uber passenger or used a backup camera in your latest rental car, your immediate reaction may have been to wonder if there is an easy way to retrofit your car with this newly ubiquitous feature. We were curious, too, and spent some time researching what the market has to offer. The good news is that there are a wide number of types, brands, and price levels for the best aftermarket car accessories, and from these, we’ve selected our top picks for the best backup cameras.

How we chose the best backup cameras

Backup cameras are a strange breed, in that what makes a good backup camera is completely different from what makes a good digital camera (or even a good dash cam). While the latter will be all about PPI and the other hallmarks of high-quality imagery, including lenses and the like, the best backup cameras focus on functionality. Don’t get us wrong, we care about high-quality imagery from our backup cameras, too, but in selecting the best backup cameras we reoriented from the basics and sought out the special qualities that make backup cameras function so well. We combined this research with critical reviews, peer suggestions, and user impressions to narrow down our choices to five use cases.

The best backup cameras: Reviews & Recommendations

The following recommendations and write-ups come after some careful review of the aftermarket backup camera market and combine the top picks of today with specific customer needs. As a result, you’re going to see a mixture of great general-use backup cameras and products that only support a particular car model. In this way, we’ve covered at least one product that will work for just about anyone.

Best overall: AUTO-VOX T2

AUTO-VOX

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The AUTO-VOX T2 has the best features a backup camera can provide, all wrapped up in a simpler design.

Specs

  • Connection: Wired
  • Power source: Reverse brake light
  • Angle of view: 170 degrees

Pros

  • Full-color instruction manual
  • Easiest wired install
  • Complete kit works with most cars
  • Dust- and water-resistant camera

Cons

  • Only works when in reverse

The incredible specs of AUTO-VOX’s T2 make it the go-to for a simple backup camera experience. The camera, which sits atop your license plate, has a wide view of 170 degrees, automatically adjusts for brightness, is rated IP68 to protect from dust and water damage, and provides vivid night vision colors. These top-of-the-line qualities carry the T2 heavily, but there’s a bit more going on here.

The T2’s internal display also makes it the best rear-view mirror backup camera. Instead of using a separate view panel, the T2 gives you a new rear-view mirror with a special electronic surface. When you engage in the reverse gear, a portion of your mirror turns into a camera display so you can check the digital view and the real mirror view side-by-side. When you shift out of reverse, the panel disappears and you have a full rear-view mirror again.

While the wired connection might put you off as there is a bit of installation work (if that’s you, check out the BOSCAM SunGo Pro, our best wireless backup camera and a solid “green” pick) you should also understand that the wiring on the T2 is in a league of its own. For one, the wires are limited by relying heavily on your reverse brake light’s power. You won’t even need a wire down to your cigarette lighter up front with you. This one-wire design keeps a lot of the trouble away from you and into the rear of your car.

Additionally, the provided kit comes with a lot of gear, including all of the wire casing and clamps you’ll need, plus different bracket adapters to make the T2 compatible with over a dozen of the leading car manufacturers. From Toyota and Nissan to Acura and Cadillac, the T2 will likely work with your car. Between the detailed instruction manual that includes full-color images and the plentiful YouTube videos showing the installation, you’ll be able to handle it.

Best for Garmin products: Garmin BC40

Garmin

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Garmin BC40 wirelessly delivers a clear backup view with easy installation.

Specs

  • Connection: Wireless
  • Power source: Two AA batteries
  • Angle of view: 160 degrees

Pros

  • Wireless connection makes for easy installation
  • IPx7 waterproof rating
  • Offers simple voice command control

Cons

  • Requires a separately-sold Garmin Navigator unit to function

The Garmin BC40 is one of the best wireless backup cameras designed for use with Garmin navigator systems, delivering a 160-degree rear view of your vehicle with very little installation effort. The camera unit clips into an included license plate mount and powers on using two separately-sold AA batteries, after which it pairs easily with any compatible Garmin navigation device that’s brought within a 5-foot radius of the camera. After this easy setup process, the camera stays paired at ranges of up to 25 feet, powering on anytime the GPS device is activated and turning off automatically when forward motion is detected. The BC40 also allows users to program custom voice commands for hands-free activation and deactivation, giving it an edge in safety over touch-only backup camera devices.

Best for RV: Furrion Vision S FOS07TAPM

Furrion

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Furrion Vision S is pre-made to attach to over a dozen popular brands of RV and trailer, provides four cameras for complete coverage, and assembles completely wirelessly.

Specs

  • Connection: Wireless
  • Power source: Wired to marker lights
  • Angle of view: 120 degrees x 4

Pros

  • Four-camera, complete vision design
  • Ready-to-attach mounting
  • IP65 dust- and water-resistant
  • Motion sensor tech with microphones

Cons

  • Expensive

For those of you into mobile homes, RVs, campers, and trailers of immense length, even the thought of stopping for gas can send you into a rage of panic. One spouse at the wheel and the other outside the vehicle aggressively signing to come back, stop, or turn—the whole event is quite stressful.

That’s why you need something more intense for RVs than a standard backup cam … you need four of them! With the Furrion Vision S FOS07TAPM, you’re getting exactly that: four high-quality cameras with night vision and excellent weather resistance that beam images directly to a 7-inch anti-glare monitor. Now you can know your vehicle’s rear-view, as well as make sure your left flank, doesn’t clip that branch as you reverse out of trouble.

The thing that sets Furrion products above the rest is how many more big brands come Furrion-ready compared to others in the market. This includes Keystone, Starcraft, East To West, and Heartland. In other words, many of these models already have mounting brackets installed, at least for the rear camera. Plus, the entire thing is wireless, meaning no drilling through your vehicle to install your RV backup camera.

With all that you’re getting, it should come as no surprise that this is the most expensive product on our list at over a grand, but remember that you’re getting four times the cameras and equipment, so the price largely balances out in the end.

Best green: BOSCAM SunGo Pro

BOSCAM

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Finally, we have a solar-powered camera option that really works.

Specs

  • Connection: Wireless
  • Power source: Solar exterior, cigarette lighter interior
  • Angle of view: 170 degrees

Pros

  • Speedy install
  • Low-light night display
  • IP68 dust- and water-resistant
  • Customer service winner

Cons

  • License plate bracket tight

If you’re looking for the most sustainable backup cam, check out the BOSCAM SunGo Pro, which features a solar-powered camera and a low-light night display. It’s all wrapped up in a nature-resistant IP68 shell, as well, so you freely explore nature while putting a little less stress on the environment.

The BOSCAM SunGo Pro is able to be charged from your car’s exterior using a single-crystal silicon solar panel. Also known as monocrystalline solar cells, single-crystal solar panels are the most commonly used and convert sunlight more efficiently than polycrystalline designs. In a worst-case scenario, such as having your car parked under a tree for a week, an alternative USB charge port is available.

One of the things to note about the BOSCAM SunGo Pro is that the bracket mount for the camera, the part that goes around your license plate, is rather tight. Basically, there is a sense that it almost won’t fit, but it does. Don’t let this turn you off of a great product, though, and know that BOSCAM is there for you to help.

Speaking of help, when researching products online, the write-ups often bring up a lot of customer problems. What is much rarer is an honest discussion of solutions that amounts to more than “I fixed it myself.” One of the very promising things about BOSCAM as a company is how often you hear that a customer complaint led to real dialogue and reasonable help from the company.

Best for Jeep Wrangler: EWAY Backup Rear-View Spare Tire Mount

EWAY

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The EWAY modifies the traditional rectangular license plate mount and circle-fies it for the iconic Jeep Wrangler rear spare tire.

Specs

  • Connection: Wired (RCA)
  • Power source: Reverse brake light
  • Angle of view: 150 degrees

Pros

  • Made for Jeep Wrangler specifically
  • Anti-fog lens
  • Low impact installation
  • Rearview-mirror display

Cons

  • Included instructions lacking

The Jeep Wrangler’s iconic hatchback look, with the large spare tire affixed to the back, creates a sense of style and adventure for the driver but also an immediate problem: Where should I put a backup camera on my Jeep Wrangler? The truth is, the options are somewhat more limited for Wrangler drivers, but the EWAY camera is here to fix that problem by mounting directly behind that spare tire and peering beyond it.

Of course, it takes more than just proper, simple mounting to make something worthy of the title of best backup camera for a Jeep Wrangler. What gives? For one, the camera is in crisp HD, provides a full 150-degree angle of view, and sends the view to a 4.3-inch display on a modified rear-view mirror. It’s also using an anti-fog lens and pulling in an official IP68 rating, making it dust- and water-resistant. Essentially, the EWAY gets carried by stats, numbers, and overall value for the cost.

As far as wired backup camera installations go, the EWAY is relatively low impact. For example, the guideline view can be toggled without cutting, and you are provided with ample cable length. What is difficult is dealing with the instruction manual, which can be a real head-scratcher. Definitely supplement the instructions with a very visual YouTube tutorial.

Best budget: LeeKooLuu LK3

LeeKooLuu

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With the LeeKooLuu LK3 you get a 1080p, 149-degree, IP69 camera quality for under $50.

Specs

  • Connectivity: Wired
  • Power source: Reverse brake light OR cigarette lighter
  • Angle of view: 149 degrees

Pros

  • Great installation options
  • Above-average weather resistance
  • Strangely superior camera

Cons

  • Unusual angle of view

The LeeKooLuu LK3 is your super-affordable go-to if you’ve gotten used to backup cameras and want quality, but don’t want to spend extra for advanced features when upgrading your old car. Instead, what you’re getting with the LK3 is one of the best backup cameras with a relatively simple system.

Two qualities to immediately look at when assessing the LK3’s camera are picture quality and angle of view. At 1080p, you’re getting a really high-quality backup camera in a sub-$50 shell, which is nothing to sneer at. However, this is where we need to remind you of the more important factor: angle of view. And, wow, the LK3 sports an unusual 149-degree angle of view. If you’ve used a newer car’s built-in 150-degree angle of view and gotten really used to it, this will probably feel just slightly off.

Another unusual feature of the LK3, though this time in a positive way, is the IP rating. IP69 is unusually high for a backup camera, with most peaking at IP68. So, what does an extra numeral mean? Well, for the typical backup camera user, not much. This basically just means that the LK3 can spend extra time underwater, a situation that would be so catastrophic for you that the livelihood of your LK3 would be the least of your worries. At the very least, you can rest assured that the LK3 will survive your next torrential downpour.

Things to consider before buying the best backup cameras

Since a backup camera is going to be installed on your car in some place, oftentimes just behind the license plate, there are a lot of different logistical issues to consider than whether it feels comfortable in your hand like a traditional camera. You’ll also be viewing the typical fish-eye lens in a completely different light when you realize how important angle of view becomes to a backup camera’s functionality. Here’s our in-depth guide for each quality:

Power source

Expect quite a few different power sources for backup cameras. These range from connecting to your rear brake lights to being solar-powered. And that’s just for the camera part! Remember that the internal viewing unit will also need a power source. Again, there’s quite a bit of variation here, from cigarette lighter plug-ins to wires that sneak under your dash. We’ll detail our top picks here, but if you venture out to make your own choice, do the extra time to research this thoroughly so you know what you’re getting into.

Wired vs. wireless

The debate over whether to get a wired or wireless backup camera is another subjective matter. While wireless backup cameras remove the hassle of wires and are just about the only way to go for trailers and exceptionally long vehicles, they do have the potential to introduce more lag into your system. If we lived in a world where people solely relied on backup cameras for backing up, that would be quite dangerous. The reality is, though, that backup cameras are a single tool in a multi-step process of backing up.

If you prefer an essentially lagless wired backup camera, be mindful that the wire will need to connect the camera (on the outside of your vehicle) to the camera inside your vehicle. This might seem like a hassle, but it can be worth it for a quality backup camera, such as our top pick, the AUTO-VOX T2, which also happens to have a streamlined wire system. If you do get a wired model, be sure to check out the instructions thoroughly before attempting to install it to avoid damaging your vehicle.

Angle of view

In this list, you’ll see HD, 1080p, and all other kinds of assorted camera qualities. Remember, though, that these will only help you so much. You aren’t shopping for beginner travel cameras to come with you on vacation; you’re looking for the best backup camera. Instead, the main measure of quality here will be the angle of view.

A high angle of view will allow you to see more in one picture than you could by looking through a single mirror and will greatly reduce the overall chances of danger to your vehicle while backing up. Expect to see values between 150 to 170 degrees for angle of view in high-quality backup cameras.

FAQs

Q: How much does a backup camera cost?

A backup camera costs between $50 for a simple design for the standard sedan to over $1,000 for a multi-camera unit design for a lengthy truck/RV. Standard designs with all of the best backup camera features will typically cost between $120 and $200. Remember that the manufacturer is delivering not only a camera but also the wiring (or wireless connection tools), mount, internal display, and other components to help with installation. Backup cameras are multi-part devices and are priced accordingly.

Q: What is a good resolution for a backup camera?

A good resolution for a backup camera is whatever you can see clearly. That answer is a bit cheeky, but there’s something to it. Typically, you’ll only be viewing what your backup camera captures through a small monitor; some made small enough to fit in a portion of a rearview mirror, so resolution isn’t as important as when selecting a TV. The result is that resolution isn’t as important for backup cameras as it is for other cameras. In other words, you don’t need an ultra-high-definition camera just to look at the image through a 4-inch screen. Instead, prioritize a quality angle of view so you can obtain the most information possible.

Q: How to install a backup camera?

To install a backup camera, you must first determine what type of camera you are buying—wireless and wired backup cameras install differently. Wireless backup cameras are typically simpler and follow specified mounting instructions given by the manufacturer. For wired backup cameras, however, you’ll need to run a wire from the outside of your vehicle (where the camera is located) to the inside of your vehicle for the monitor. This can take some mechanical know-how, a good instruction manual, or a video tutorial. Where the instructions are noted as being unclear, I’ve included links to quality YouTube tutorials in the writeups above.

Final thoughts on the best backup cameras

Getting the best backup cameras on your slightly older car does not need to be challenging or take an overly thorough amount of analysis. It is understandable to have some fear in regards to installing a product like this, especially with wired models, but offered with quality instruction manuals, online video tutorials, and even wireless models, backup cameras are indeed for everyone. Lastly, our picks for the top backup cameras, including the fantastic budget option from LeeKooLuu, will suit your needs perfectly well, except in some special fringe cases.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best backup cameras of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best monitors for trading in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-monitors-for-trading/ Wed, 22 Jun 2022 22:10:42 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=451293
The best monitors for trading
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Whether you’re HODLin’ in place or shooting for the moon, these are the monitors to do it with.

The post The best monitors for trading in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best monitors for trading
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall BenQ SW272U BenQ SW272U
SEE IT

An adjustable all-around comfort pick that reliably facilitates trading in all conditions.

Best for crypto trading AOC C24G1 AOC C24G1
SEE IT

Whether you work or play late into the night, or a little bit of both, you’ll find something to like in, and on, this monitor.

Best budget Acer SB220Q Acer SB220Q
SEE IT

If you’re looking for great value for the dollar, this is your safest, smartest investment.

If you’re trading frequently, you know that monitors for trading are the ones that let your mind directly enter the screen, not just notice what’s ticking across it. They don’t distract you as you dive headfirst into the world of crypto, dividends, or corporate mergers. With West Coast stock trading hours opening at 6:30 a.m. and crypto being a 24-hour scramble for the best, there are a lot of environmental conditions to consider. So, what can bring you the best in terms of eye health, easy reading, and, of course, financial gain? We’ve delved into what’s available and found the best monitors for trading, no matter your purpose or needs.

How we chose the best monitors for trading

To compile our list, we combined personal experience, peer input, respected critics, and user impressions. We also considered the environment of the modern work-from-home trader and what they needed. The reality is that there is a lot of diversity in these needs. For example, the stock trader is the most likely to complain of morning light due to the early nature of market openings. On the other hand, the day trader needs to assess information rapidly with the most readable and information-dense screen possible.

To make the cut, each monitor had to fit the profile of individual user types. Questions were asked that took us into an individual trader’s point of view: What are the potential pain points of this trader, what lighting will this person’s monitor most likely need, etc.? Along with those questions, the following are things we believe you should keep in mind before buying monitors for trading:

The best monitors for trading: Reviews & Recommendations

We have quite a selection of monitors, across quite a range of prices and styles. Ultimately, all of them are top-of-the-line modern monitors, which can be used for all daily purposes. Still, some monitors perform just slightly better at certain times of day and give your eyes that extra bit of comfort you desire:

Best overall: BenQ SW272U

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This BenQ monitor offers a reflection-free finish, a large display with minimal bezels, and a hotkey puck for quick settings adjustments.

Specs

  • Resolution: 4K
  • Screen surface: Anti-glare matte
  • Refresh rate: 60 Hz
  • Size: 27 inches

Pros

  • Matte finish results in zero reflections or glare
  • Ergonomic stand allows for vertical or horizontal orientation
  • Minimal bezel and 27-inch size provide plenty of screen real estate
  • Offers HDMI, DisplayPort, or USB-C connectivity

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Photography-specific features may not be needed for most

The BenQ SW272U is a fantastic, well-rounded monitor rich in features and high-end specs. The large 27-inch screen size and the minimal bezel design give you plenty of room for seeing all the details of your trades. The 4K resolution means that text will be sharp, clear, and easy to read. 

BenQ built this monitor with a Fine-Coated anti-reflection panel. This results in essentially zero glare or reflections, so your focus can remain on the important stuff. And should you want even fewer distractions, it comes with an easy-to-install hood. The included monitor stand features an attractive leatherette base for organizing your desk. It can be turned 90 degrees if you prefer vertical orientation. And the height, tilt, and swivel are also adjustable to fully fine-tune your setup. 

The SW272U offers two HDMI 2.0 ports and a DisplayPort 1.4 input. Additionally, you can transfer data to your laptop using the USB-C connector. And the two-port USB-A 3.1 Gen 1 hub and built-in SD card reader add convenience. The monitor also comes with BenQ’s Hotkey Puck G3, which makes adjusting settings even more convenient. 

BenQ designed this monitor for photographers and video editors. As a result, it offers lots of photography-specific features, such as highly accurate colors, Paper Color Sync for accurate print results, and  P3 color space for accurate video work. If you plan on using the monitor strictly for trading, you may be paying for unnecessary features. But it’s an extremely high-quality and versatile monitor for those who want the best.

Best for stock trading: Dell P2419H

Dell

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This Dell is an anti-glare, flicker-free monitor that goes beyond just getting the job done.

Specs

  • Resolution: 1080p
  • Screen Surface: Anti-Glare
  • Size: 24”

Pros

  • TUV-certified, ComfortView display port
  • Great connectivity options (HDMI, VGA, USB)
  • Dell Display Manager access
  • Rotates to portrait and landscape modes

Cons

  • Could have a better refresh rate
  • Dullish blues

The Dell P2419H works perfectly for those mornings when you want to jump straight out of bed and head straight to the trading desk. Open your blinds fully and harness the power of the rising sun without fear of glare and eye strain with the anti-glare screen.

In fact, this screen should work wonders for your eyes throughout a heavy day of trading, reading business reports, and keeping up with the news. Being TUV-certified, the screen has passed tests showing it to be flicker-free and a reducer of blue light, which affects sleep. While the blue light adjustment does seem to have bled over into the color quality a tad, the trade-off seems well worth it.

In addition to rotating into portrait mode, as the HP VH240a did above, the Dell also has access to the Dell Display Manager. This software allows you to subdivide your screen as you wish, as if it were two screens in one. This is perfect for the trader with low desk space, or that wants to compare two charts side-by-side.

Best for crypto trading: AOC C24G1

AOC

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It provides a fantastic low-blue mode for those crazy trading nights.

Specs

  • Resolution: 1080p
  • Refresh Rate: 144Hz 
  • Size: 24”

Pros

  • Uses AOC’s Low Blue mode
  • AMD Freesync tech
  • Sharp text for easy reading
  • Ready for post-trade gaming

Cons

  • Occasionally experiences slight ‘ghosting’

The AOC C24G1 is a powerful monitor made for late nights in the trenches of crypto forums, NFT debates, and r/SatoshiStreetBets memery. Plus, while waiting for the Musk tweet that will send DOGE to the moon again, it can double as a great gaming monitor to service your other addiction.

Part of this comes down to the Low Blue mode software built into the monitor, so you can adapt your monitor for nighttime use easily. It is paired with AMD FreeSync tech, which adjusts the refresh rate to match the FPS of used programs, and you have a system that is easy on the eyes.

Whether you find yourself working or playing late into the night, or a little bit of both, you’ll find something to like about the AOC C24G1. The sharp contrasts, but soft colors of the monitor allow for easy reading and the monitor is a great gaming monitor in its own right. One of the few downsides is that you might experience a tad bit of “ghosting,” or image-trailing artifacts, when gaming. Overall, this rates as a way above-average pick for a standard price.

Best for day trading: LG Ultrawide WN80C

Why it made the cut: If you can afford it, this monitor is a great ultrawide with easy on-screen splitting for quick information access when it counts most.

Specs

  • Resolution: 1440p
  • Screen Surface: Anti-Glare
  • Screen Size: 34”

Pros

  • Cool On-Screen control options
  • USB-C connectivity for MacBook Pro
  • Great height adjustability

Cons

  • Could have a higher refresh rate
  • Expensive

The LG 34WN80C-B is an ultrawide that proves itself wonderfully in the world of work-at-home productivity. The software included creates a powerful office display that will make you want to work. Easy USB-C connectivity makes it one of the best monitors for MacBook Pro trading, with the extra screen space making it all that much more enticing.

LG’s On-Screen control options allow you to choose a grid for various apps and windows, divvying up your screen like new residential lots. Just drop everything into place and go. The whole thing gives a pseudo-multi-monitor feel without all of the extra desk space, installation, or neck movement required.

Speaking of neck movement, the monitor has a great overall height adjustment at 6.3 inches with a spring-loaded mechanism. Just lift or push down and release; the monitor won’t move or slowly sink as time progresses. If that doesn’t work for you, there is always the 100 x 100 millimeter VESA mounting mechanism that is compatible with most monitor arms. Like most of the best ultrawide monitors, the LG 34WN80C-B is a bit on the expensive side. Since it is mostly meant as a great work monitor for professionals, we can’t say that the price can be offset by a top-of-the-line gaming experience either. Still, the LG 34WN80C-B packs a powerful punch in the office, keeps your eyes on the charts, and supports you where it counts.

Best budget: Acer SB220Q

Acer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is a go-to budget monitor for any purpose that is also good for trading.

Specs

  • Resolution: 1080p
  • Refresh Rate: 75 Hz
  • Size: 21.5”

Pros

  • Rotates to portrait and landscape modes
  • Thin “Zero Frame” edges
  • Ultrathin, lightweight, and compact
  • Surprisingly high refresh rate

Cons

  • No VESA mount compatibility
  • A bit small

There’s a certain level of trader that looks for good value in everything, always looking to buy low while getting good value. The Acer SB220Q is the monitor for that trader. Not so ironically, the one thing that identifies it as a “trader monitor” is the great value for the dollar you’re getting when you buy it.

You can see quite a few features that other monitors on the list had, like rotation to portrait mode and thin edges (Acer calls it “Zero Frame,” which feels a bit too generous). The humble Acer even has a refresh rate over 60Hz, all without the extra cost.

One thing to note is the option to add a webcam to your purchase. Our recommendation is to not take Acer up on the offer. The webcam costs nearly half as much as the monitor itself, making it a budget-unfriendly choice. Besides, if you’re wanting to get a monitor/webcam bundle, why not get one of the best monitors with built-in webcams instead?

While the screen does come a bit small and it does lack VESA mounting and associated features, this monitor could easily fit as the budget option for just about any monitor listing it qualified for. People simply like it, and we all have to respect what it can do for the cost.

Things to consider before buying the best monitors for trading

With all of the monitors today, it can be overwhelming to assess them all. Overall quality remains a top priority, so a lot of the considerations you’ll see in our best monitors for home offices or even our best ultrawide gaming monitors guides will apply here. For the best monitors for trading, however, we wanted to push beyond the average factors.

Resolution

The higher the screen’s resolution, the better your data will appear. At a very basic level, resolution means how many pieces of information are in a given area. For your computer screen, that means that high-resolution monitors are able to display more info in a smaller space.

If your trading world is filled with candle-and-stick charts, bar graphs, line charts, and the like, you’ll be able to see the outline of the boxes with greater precision the higher the resolution is.

To give an extreme example of how this can matter for charting, imagine a monitor that is only 10 pixels tall. When viewing a bar chart of percentages on this monitor, a bar with a value of 61% would appear the same as a bar with a value of 69%. At 20 pixels tall, these two values would only appear to be one pixel apart.

Fortunately, there are no modern monitors with such terrible resolutions, but the principle remains the same. Low-resolution displays can mess with our ability to interpret charts correctly and lead to big, preventable losses in the trading world. Meanwhile, high-resolution screens can display accurate information from several windows simultaneously.

Screen surface finish

There are three main monitor finishes: glossy, matte, and semi-gloss. Sometimes individual manufacturers have their own type of monitor, too, but most screen types fall within these three categories. Let’s take a look at these three types from the perspective of an active trader:

Glossy: Glossy finish screens are smooth and have a reflective shine. Praised for their vibrant, bouncy colors, glossy screens are bright and exciting, with rich and crisp colors. Unfortunately, they also tend to reflect light and give off glare. This can be a huge disadvantage for the early morning stock trader when trying to catch up on the latest news or get in that early morning options pick as markets open. Even worse, you’re much more likely to wake up to a layer of visible dust across the screen when using a glossy finish monitor.

Matte: On a microscopic level, these screens are “rougher” than glossy monitors. The result is a slightly duller screen with somewhat muted colors, which won’t make them among the best monitors for color grading. Matte screens, however, are much less prone to glare, even when in direct light. In the mornings, you’ll be greeted to a screen that appears cleaner and less dusty. The dust will still be there and possibly more difficult to clean away due to the rough nature of matte screens, but it won’t be as much of an apparent hassle.

Semi-gloss: This type of screen is somewhere between the other two. As a result, it has some of the pros and cons of each and can be a good compromise for those who prefer a balanced approach to their purchases.

From this perspective, it can seem like matte is the only way to go for stock traders and day traders looking for that early-morning clarity. While this is somewhat true, there are also a few monitors with “anti-glare” tech. The good ole-fashioned close-the-blinds trick can work wonders as well.

Casual traders or night owl crypto experts might drift toward glossy or semi-gloss more easily, but this all comes down to aesthetic preferences.

Screen flicker

Monitors constantly flicker as a result of changing pixel colors. This flickering quality is measured in times-per-second using Hertz (Hz). Screen flicker, even when not noticeable, can pull you out of flow, make you miss important details, and give you major eye strain and fatigue (factors that are avoidable with the right monitors). Traders wanting to burn the midnight oil, either catching up on the day’s news or watching crypto markets, can be particularly damaged by this tiring phenomenon.

The lower the refresh rate, the worse the effects of screen flicker. Unfortunately, refresh rates aren’t the only issue. Even monitors with 144Hz can have flickering issues with hardware malfunctions, as our best 1440p 144Hz monitors guide sadly had to mention about the experiences of the early buyers of the Samsung Odyssey G7.

So, don’t look at refresh rates as the sole reducer in screen flicker. Take a close look at customer reports of hardware issues, especially months after purchase. Similarly, look for “anti-flicker” tech to make sure the monitor has your eyes’ best interest at hand. Still, there is nothing wrong going with a monitor with a high refresh rate and we won’t be considering those below 60Hz.

OLED vs. LED vs. LCD

These three acronyms are commonly used for screen lighting technology and should be properly understood by the trader before making a monitor purchase. Here is the relevant background on each type:

OLED stands for Organic Light-Emitting Diode. OLED monitors are relatively new and do away with backlighting in favor of thin screens. They are capable of the lowest response times and highest refresh rates.

LED stands for Light-Emitting Diode and is probably the type of lighting you are most familiar with. After all, the typical Christmas tree lights are LED. When used in monitors, they have great viewing angles and reduce eye fatigue when compared to LCD screens.

LCD stands for Liquid-Crystal Display and uses backlighting to help you see the display. Typically, this type of monitor will use more power, have a lower viewing angle, and be slightly worse for your eyes than LED screens.

Typically, most traders will want OLED or LED screens for a high-quality, low-energy product that also reduces eye strain. For a majority of cases, that will mean using an LED screen, but we’re excited about the potential for more OLED monitors to make the cut as more and more are produced.

FAQs

Q: How much does a monitor for trading cost?

In 2022, a monitor for trading can cost anywhere from just over $100 to well over $500, with most settling in around $200. Of note is that recent inflation is making monitor prices go up compared to just a couple of years ago, even when comparing the exact same model. This, combined with an ensuing bear market, should make any trader wary of going after the top-dollar purchases.

Q: How many monitors do I need for day trading?

You should probably have at least two monitors for day trading, like most office work. Another option is getting an ultrawide with On-Screen sectioning, like our day trading choice, the LG Ultrawide WN80C. Day traders might also consider getting one of our best portable monitors choices for when they want the adrenaline rush of swing trades on the go.

Q: How many Hz do you need for day trading?

You really only need 60Hz for day trading, but more will always be better. To keep your eyes from getting tired from screen flicker, 60Hz should do the trick—screen flicker issues usually have a lot more behind them than simply refresh rate, after all. The intensity of specs needed for a day trader and a pro gamer just isn’t going to be anywhere near the same.

Final thoughts on the best monitors for trading

With so many monitors to choose from, it can be hard to come out feeling that you are getting the best deal. For traders, who want to feel like they are getting their money’s worth, sticking to the fundamentals and looking for eye health options are always a great start. Our favorites will get you headed on that path so your head can stay in the markets.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best monitors for trading in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best monitor wall mounts of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-monitor-wall-mounts/ Tue, 14 Jun 2022 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=448867
The best monitor wall mounts of 2023
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Instantly save desk space (and your neck) with this office upgrade.

The post The best monitor wall mounts of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best monitor wall mounts of 2023
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall  Ergotron HX Single Ultrawide Monitor Arm Ergotron HX Single Ultrawide Monitor Arm
SEE IT

Heavy-duty and widely compatible, this highly maneuverable option will improve any modern monitor set up.

Best Height-Adjustable Mount-It! Sit Stand Wall Mount Mount-It! Sit-Stand Wall Mount
SEE IT

If your wall can accommodate it, your workflow will appreciate what is essentially a complete standing desk.

Best Budget VIVO Full Motion Wall Mount VIVO Full-Motion Wall Mount
SEE IT

Standard users with the time to invest will appreciate the money saved on this monitor mount.

Installing monitor wall mounts is a great way to upgrade the home office or gaming battlestation. While the best wall mounts for TVs can simply affix onto the wall once a viewing sweet spot has been established, it is often advantageous for monitor wall mounts to have swiveling arms and increased maneuverability. In this way, the monitor can be adjusted for an individual’s height. The monitor should also be able to be moved closer or further away for different purposes, such as study or casual viewing of streamed programs. These mounts will create a good environment for the home office, where people spend an increasing amount of time. From ergonomic designs to simple installations, these are the best monitor wall mounts.

How we chose the best monitor wall mounts

Both monitor and monitor wall mount sales have skyrocketed as remote work and schooling became the new normal. As a result, manufacturers have been making an increasing number of monitor wall mount models. To sort out the best, we have taken into consideration manufacturer reputations and claims, peer reviews, forums, the impressions of the large user base, as well as key features, such as weight capacity and VESA sizing. Lastly, we parsed through niche options to consider some increasingly common situations, such as those wanting standing desks.

The best monitor wall mounts: Reviews & Recommendations

As the name implies, wall mounts attach directly to your wall, so corner (or L-shaped) computer desk setups work the very best for them. When combined with monitors optimized for home office spaces, the best monitor wall mounts can create a comfortable environment for the neck and eyes while also helping clear off the top of your desk. Whether the best monitor mount for you is a solid mount with incredible flexibility in swivel and motion, a mount for a large VESA monitor, or the perfect mount for your standing workstation, we’ve found it all and more.

Best overall: Ergotron HX Single Ultrawide Monitor Arm

Ergotron

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A heavy-duty build with a wide range of motion and high compatibility with most modern monitors makes this a lasting choice.

Specs

  • Weight capacity: 42 lbs.
  • VESA sizes: 100×100, 75×75, 200×100, 200×200
  • Tilt & swivel: 180-degree pan and 360-degree rotation

Pros 

  • Works with most ultrawide monitors
  • Intense pivoting with flexible arm
  • Impressive 10-yr. Warranty
  • Bright, shiny color scheme

Cons 

  • Need extra parts for wood stud installation
  • Struggles with the Odyssey G9

This wall mount is perfect for just about any office setup due to its incredibly flexible arm. Instead of just making minor adjustments to reduce screen glare or neck pressure, the Ergotron’s arm is able to move into nearly any desirable position.

It works especially well as a mount for your second monitor when the side of your desk touches the wall. You can pull your monitor out when you want to use it, but then push it up perpendicular to the wall when you want it out of the way.

As a result of its heavy-duty manufacturing, the Ergotron is great for ultrawide monitors, including most curved ones. One unfortunate exception to this is our favorite curved ultrawide, the Samsung Odyssey G9, which has a bit too much curvature for the mount to handle easily.

Finally, an aesthetic touch. While many wall mounts are a drab gray or dull black, the Ergotron HX offers brilliant white and polished aluminum coloring. The white goes great with the aesthetic of Apple products for the modern office look. Alternatively, the polished aluminum is complimented highly by LED light strips for that futuristic gamer battlestation feel.

Best height-adjustable: Mount-It! Sit Stand Wall Mount

Mount-It!

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you can meet the structural requirements, this mount converts into a complete standing desk, with desktop support, on command.

Specs

  • Weight capacity: 17.6 lbs. monitor, 2.2 lbs. keyboard
  • VESA sizes: 75×75, 100×100
  • Height adjustment range: 19.9”

Pros 

  • Expert installation available
  • Sturdy for typing
  • Includes CPU wall mount with cable management functions

Cons 

  • Only meant for concrete walls

The Mount-It! Sit Stand combines the ideals of a standing desk with the functionality of a wall-mounted monitor. It includes a mount for your monitor, CPU, keyboard, and mouse. As per the instructions, it is only truly meant to be installed into concrete walls. That being said, it has been used in a variety of situations successfully. When in doubt, consider the expert installation option and have a chat about your particular situation before purchasing.

While it can be used as a purely standing desk, it does have the capability to be lowered up to 19.9 inches. This should be enough for most body types to take advantage of this desk as a standard “sitting” desk, too. Preferably with an ergonomic chair.

The keyboard and mouse tray feels roomy and comfortable, though it can be a tad difficult to get used to if you’re used to using a full desk. Upon first use, it feels surprisingly sturdy to type on. The tray also juts out into the room a full 41 inches from the wall. This can feel extreme at first, but the extra distance from the monitor helps reduce eye strain. Finally, the tray can be folded up while not in use.

The included CPU holder works well to reduce cord length-related difficulties. Putting your CPU halfway between the highest and lowest places on your monitor will allow for full motion with reduced worries. That being said, we still recommend getting both a wireless mouse and wireless keyboard so you can utilize the folding keyboard tray to its fullest.

Best dual: Mount-It! Dual Monitor Wall Mount

Mount-It!

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Mount-It! Dual Monitor Wall Mount is durable, affordable, and can be installed just about anywhere.

Specs

  • Weight capacity: 14.3 lbs.
  • VESA sizes: 75×75, 100×100
  • Tilt & swivel: 90-degrees up/left/right, 45-degrees down

Pros 

  • Easy adjusting arms
  • Lightweight
  • Made for brick, cement, and wood installation
  • Slide-in VESA plates for monitor

Cons 

  • Difficult to have monitors side-by-side

You wouldn’t be alone if you feel somewhat claustrophobic at the thought of one-monitor computing in 2023. Instead of installing two wall mounts for the dual-monitor effect, it is best to get one really good dual-monitor wall mount.

Mount-It!’s dual-mount arms come with a lot of flexibility, including 90-degree tilt-and-swivel control in three directions. Each monitor is maneuvered by a gas spring arm for easy, responsive, and precise manipulation.

Despite this flexibility, you should be aware of the special limitations of using a dual wall mount that still apply to the Mount-It! The monitors attached have to be a bit smaller to allow full movement. In this case, that maximum is going to be 27 inches, which is still good enough for a couple of good gaming monitors on the cheap.

Even with monitors of the right size, it can be tricky to get them in a position where they touch if that is your preference. While possible, it requires them to jut out from the wall quite a bit, which can reduce your space. To visualize why, try clapping your hands without bending your elbows. The monitors here move in a similar fashion.

Finally, expect easy installation. The product is lightweight and can be installed in many materials. The VESA attachments for the back of your monitors allow you to slip them on the arms yourself—no helper required!

Best large VESA: Mount-It! Full Motion Monitor Wall Bracket

Mount-It!

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Extreme versatility in VESA sizes and weight loads at a price anyone can afford.

Specs

  • Weight capacity: 66 lbs.
  • VESA sizes: 75×75, 100×100, 200×100, 200×200, 300×300, 400×300, 400×400
  • Tilt & swivel: 180-degrees left/right, 20-degrees up/down

Pros 

  • Expert installation option
  • Lightweight
  • Installs in wood stud

Cons 

  • Needs 8” x 8” mounting port on monitor

This Mount-It! mount provides a lot of flexibility for you to experiment with different monitors now and in the future. It has seven compatible VESA sizes that include the common 75×75 and 100×100 options but also go up to 400×400.

Another unexpected feat of the mount at this price range is its holding capacity of up to 66 pounds. In fact, Mount-It! claims to have gotten the mount to hold up to 132 pounds in testing. We do recommend keeping with the suggested weight limit, though, as the mount installs into a wood stud.

The mount has fantastic right and left swivel, due to its arm. While it doesn’t have the additional up-and-down range of motion of the best monitor arms, you’ll still be pleasantly surprised by the triple-jointed swivel on offer. If you use a small enough monitor, it can even work for setups where the side of your desk touches the wall like a budget Ergotron.

One quirk of having such an impressive range of VESA sizes is that the mounting area is quite large. Make sure that you have a mounting area of at least 8 inches by 8 inches on your monitor to accommodate this large aspect of the design.

Easy-to-assemble: Antimbee No Stud Drywall TV Mount

Antimbee

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This Antimbee is a no-studs-necessary monitor mount that can be installed in less than 15 minutes.

Specs

  • Weight capacity: 100 lbs.
  • VESA sizes: Any from 100×100 to 400×400
  • Monitor sizes: 13”-55”

Pros 

  • Includes everything needed for installation but the hammer
  • Expert installation option
  • Easy “hanging” VESA mounting bracket

Cons 

  • No arm
  • No tilt & swivel

The Antimbee No Stud is great for those situations where you need a non-invasive installation. While that does come with some downsides, if you appreciate the mount for what it is and buy it with the right frame of mind, you will be very satisfied with it.

The installation can be compared to hanging a picture, both in difficulty and mechanism. Using the only tool you’ll be required to bring on your own, a hammer, nail the base into the wall. There is even a small bubble level included, ensuring a non-tilted hang. Finally, screw the hanger into the horizontal VESA holes of your monitor and hang it on the wall. The entire installation should take less than 15 minutes and can be completed by a single person.

Overall, this makes the Antimbee a great choice for dorm rooms or other situations where your landlord wouldn’t want you drilling deep into your wall. With this in mind, consider it as a cheap secondary gift for the child you are sending off to college this fall.

An unfortunate downside of the hang-like-a-picture-frame approach to this wall mount is that the mounted monitor will also act as a picture hung on the wall. There is no arm, tilt, or swivel. Test out monitor heights before installation to avoid disappointment.

Best budget: VIVO Full Motion Wall Mount

VIVO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Has all of the basic features, including an arm, at the price you want.

Specs

  • Weight capacity: 44 lbs.
  • VESA sizes: 75×75, 100×100
  • Tilt & swivel: 5-degrees up, 12-degrees down, 45-degrees left and right

Pros 

  • Expert installation option
  • Swiveling arm
  • Cable management included

Cons 

  • Difficult tension adjustment
  • Installation is a group project

Our budget option, from VIVO, comes with standard features, a good weight capacity, and a relatively good arm for the price. If you are a standard user who is willing to invest a bit of extra effort into installation, this could be the only monitor mount you’ll ever need.

When looking at budget products, it is often the little things that the manufacturer bothers to include that make the whole experience worthwhile. For the VIVO Full Motion, that includes a three-jointed swiveling arm and a small hook to enhance cable management.

The swiveling arm works in a similar manner to Mount-It!’s Full Motion, though in a pared-down form. For example, the tension settings that hold the monitor in place require a tool for adjustment. This can be tricky to set since you will need to get the tool between the back of your monitor and the wall to access the adjuster. It is best to set this up with relatively high tension and leave it.

Speaking of setting up, expect this one to take at least two people. One person will need to hold the monitor while the other screws it into the mount. While there is optional expert installation available, the surcharge will negate the budget appeal this VIVO mount has to offer. We recommend grabbing a friend who owes you an easy favor, having a fun chat, and installing this monitor wall mount together.

Things to consider before buying one of the best monitor wall mounts

While your monitor wall mount will usually be cheaper than your monitor, a bad monitor wall mount will destroy your monitor. As a result, it really pays to be careful when selecting a mount and to make sure you are getting one that will work to support your monitor. You’ll also want to think about how you’ll be using it. How much rotation will it need to offer for your setup? We also look at the ease of installation and the possibility of expert installation add-ons with your purchase.

Weight capacity

One of the easiest factors to consider. In short, all other factors considered equal, an ability to hold a higher amount of weight on your wall is always better. While you can always weigh your monitor (or look up the weight of the monitor you’re about to purchase) in order to pick a mount with a capacity to match, we always recommend going for at least some wiggle room. As monitor technology continues to grow and change, you might want to upgrade to a heavier monitor down the line.

VESA size

The Video Electronics Standards Association (VESA) has created a standardized set of hole patterns that monitors, TVs, and their mounts typically follow. The sizing is given in a pair of numbers, such as 75×75, to represent the size of the square pattern the holes create in millimeters. The first number is the horizontal distance, and the second is the vertical.

Before buying a mount, it is critical that you check your monitor’s VESA size. However, you shouldn’t stop there, as many mounts have several compatible sizes, and having this kind of flexibility will help for future monitor purchases. Very common VESA sizes are 75×75 and 100×100, though others do exist. The largest VESA sizes can go over 600×400.

Not all monitors come with VESA-compatible mounting on the back. In that case, search for the manufacturer-specific mount, if available.

Tilt & swivel

For most monitor users, there is some level tilting, nudging, and adjusting that occurs after placing the monitor on your desk. This doesn’t magically change when the monitor is attached to a wall mount. Sometimes that can even mean making micro-adjustments to your monitor position on a daily basis, such as to avoid the glare of the early morning sun.

Another common feature of wall mounts is maneuverable arms. They help to increase left-to-right tilt so your monitor can face your seat directly. Particularly high-quality arms can even work with desks that are only beside a wall instead of pushed into one. In any case, you will want to ensure the selected tilt and swivel levels hold. Strong, tight joints are critical.

Installation

Installation can be tricky and rightfully makes many buyers nervous. Incorrectly installed wall mounts can destroy your monitor, not to mention your wall. When purchasing a wall mount, consider how tricky the installation process will be and if the mount includes all of the tools and parts required for a successful mounting.

Alternatively, consider purchasing a professional installation along with your mount. Many companies offer this service, but be warned that it can be very expensive, potentially many times more expensive than the mount itself.

FAQs

Q: What is the best wall mount for monitors?

The best wall mount for monitors is the Ergotron HX Single Ultrawide Monitor Arm. While it is more expensive than other wall mounts, it comes in first place as the best monitor wall mount due to its incredibly flexible arm and compatibility with most ultrawide monitors.

Q: Is it a good idea to mount a monitor on the wall?

It is a good idea to mount a monitor on the wall if you want to free up desk space or simply think it looks cool. However, if you install a wall mount, it must be done well, or you will end up destroying your monitor and wall. If that at all makes you nervous, you can still get the advantages of using an arm with one of our best monitor arms for desk mounting.

Q: Can you mount computer monitors on the wall?

You can mount computer monitors on the wall yourself or with the help of a professional. If you decide to DIY, you’ll want a stud finder alongside basic tools like a leveler, tape measure, and electric drill. Some easy-to-assemble mounts, like the Antimbee No Stud Drywall TV Mount, don’t require any tools beyond a simple hammer.

Q: Can I mount my monitor on drywall?

You can mount your monitor on drywall if you have the correct mount. Most wall mounts are not compatible with drywall alone and instead require a more sturdy backing to latch into. Many wall mounts that appear to be mounted on drywall are instead mounted on a wooden stud behind the drywall. Use a stud finder to locate the wooden studs behind your drywall.

Q: What monitors are VESA compatible?

Monitors with VESA patterns on the back are VESA compatible. VESA patterns are square or rectangular configurations of four holes in the back of the monitor.

Q: Can you wall mount a monitor without VESA?

You can mount a monitor without VESA, but you’ll be severely limited in what you can use for the mounting. Possibilities include model-specific mounts made by the same manufacturer. For the best possible mounting experience, it is not recommended to get a monitor without VESA holes.

Q: How much does a wall mount cost for a monitor?

A wall mount for a monitor can cost anywhere from under $20 to over $300, depending on quality, manufacturing materials, and other features. Many of the best monitor wall mounts offer a professional installation at a base cost of around $100-$150. Buyers should be aware that more lengthy or difficult installations will come with a higher charge.

Final thoughts on the best monitor wall mounts

Monitor wall mounts are space-savers that give your workstation a very comfortable feel. They can change your work or gaming area into an open space with the flick of a wrist. From the dorm-friendly Antimbee No Stud Drywall TV Mount to the incredibly flexible Ergotron HX Single Ultrawide Monitor Arm, our choices include a monitor wall mount for any purpose or budget.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best monitor wall mounts of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best invisible dog fences for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-invisible-dog-fences/ Tue, 22 Aug 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=564151
The best invisible dog fences composited
Stan Horaczek

Keep your pooch in-place without a costly fence or a cable.

The post The best invisible dog fences for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best invisible dog fences composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Pet Safe Yard Max rechargeable in-ground dog fence PetSafe YardMax
SEE IT

It requires some installation, but this kit offers the best mix of features.

Best indoor PetSafe Pawz Away indoor pet barrier PetSafe Pawz Away Pet Barrier
SEE IT

Keep your pooch out of your personal areas with a simple setup.

Best wireless Wiez GPS wireless dog fence WIEZ GPS Wireless Collar
SEE IT

It relies on GPS instead of a physical wire to create the boundary.

An invisible dog fence, when properly used, can allow your dog to run safely around your property without a costly construction project. These devices don’t require a leash or wire that could get caught around trees, mailboxes, and anything else you keep in your yard. Your pooch also won’t be able to dig its way out through an invisible fence, no matter how tempting those squirrels in your neighbor’s yard may look. At the same time, if you wind up with a bad invisible dog fence, your dog could end up lost or worse. Here, we go through all of the types, pitfalls, and training required associated with the best invisible dog fences so you and your dog can enjoy the benefits.

How we chose the best invisible dog fences

Dogs have different needs, and there are invisible fences to fit most of them. A setup that works for a 150-pound St. Bernard may not work for a pack of 20 tiny terriers. It’s crucial to understand your specific needs.

In light of this, we found the best invisible dog fences that met the criteria for some of the overall most important categories. Still, high-quality, wired products such as the PetSafe YardMax should cover the needs of a general audience quite well. Those models do typically require some hands-on installation. Others, such as the PetSafe Pawz Away Indoor Pet Barrier, are winners in relatively niche scenes. With these two products, in particular, we were also happy to find great synergy; the YardMax’s collar works with the indoor barrier, as well.

One issue that is very important in all of this is dog health and safety. Rest assured that each product in the following list has had 100s, if not 1,000s, of live customers. That doesn’t mean that you shouldn’t pay attention to your dog’s needs or follow training protocol carefully, of course. Each dog’s unique personality and body must be taken into account in a way that only an owner knows. Still, though, through these selections, you should be able to find something that rests well with your dog.

The best invisible dog fences: Reviews & Recommendations

The following invisible dog fences represent the best in their respective classes. We have chosen each based on a wide variety of characteristics. We recommend starting with our best overall pick, but if, for some reason, it doesn’t completely suit your needs, check the other categories for a product that will give you what you need. In any event, the vast majority of customers will find something that fits their needs in the following picks.

Best overall: PetSafe YardMax

PetSafe

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Define your dogs’ boundaries precisely.

Specs

  • Coverage area: ⅓ acre, expandable to 10
  • Correction method: Tone, five static levels
  • Number of dogs: 1 per collar
  • Dog size: 5 lbs.+, 6-28 inch neck
  • Wired or wireless: Wired

Pros

  • Precision control of dog’s boundary
  • Allows approach directly to wire
  • Static-free reentry
  • Lengthy battery life

Cons

  • Receiver wears down over the years

One of the first places to start with invisible dog fences is a kit like PetSafe’s YardMax kit. It’s a wired kit that lets you carefully define a yard perimeter for your dog—from 0.33 of an acre to 10 acres if you grab additional wiring. It is the precision that this wired system has that differs it from others. If you’re going to have to do a bit of digging, you may as well get perfection, right?

Traditional wired fence systems utilize warning systems when the collar is within so many feet of the wire. In effect, this creates a sort of “belt” of dog-repelling wire. If a dog does push through, the system will try to correct the dog as it re-enters the yard, which is bad. This buffer zone also reduces the overall amount of yard to which the dog has free access. The YardMax system does away with this altogether by having its wire act more as a literal barrier. The collar has two states: in and out of the yard. The correction lasts as long as the dog remains in an area it’s not meant to go to. As a result, the dog wanders all the way up to the laid wire, which extends its roaming range.

The only downside of this level of control over your dog’s boundaries is that you have to place physical wires. But burying cables is just a part of a wired system. PetSafe calls the process a “weekend project.”

In any event, when you get the line laid out just right, simply put the system’s collar on your dog (or dogs) that will go into it. After a few weeks of training, most dogs will respond to the tone or static response modes. Some customers complain that the collar’s hard plastic sensor unit will begin to break down over the years, though this will naturally depend on your dogs’ activity types and intensities.

Best indoor: PetSafe Pawz Away Indoor Pet Barrier

PetSafe

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: As GPS and wiring are the typical “laying” methods for invisible fences, indoor variations are a niche breed.

Specs

  • Coverage area: Indoor
  • Correction method: Tone and Static
  • Number of dogs: 1 per collar
  • Dog size: 5 lbs.+, 6-28 inch neck
  • Wired or wireless: Wireless

Pros

  • Keeps dogs out of unwanted areas of the home
  • Quick setup
  • Compatible with PetSafe YardMax collar

Cons

  • Training in the home can be difficult

Even the best invisible dog fences won’t work well inside the home. GPS signals decay when you get indoors. It isn’t feasible to lay wire under the floor. Problems abound.

PetSafe’s indoor pet barrier creates a small pocket of reinforced “no” in problem areas of the home using a smoke detector-like sensor. What’s more, it works directly with the PetSafe collar from our best overall product, making a seamless transition from outdoors to indoors with a product your dog already knows and understands. In other words, your dog should be able to go from exercising outdoors to resting on one of the best dog beds without changing collars.

Still, the indoor environment—your dog’s home where they likely feel free to roam—isn’t necessarily the easiest training environment. But if there are places that your dog knows they shouldn’t be (for example, the cat’s litter box), this could be all the reinforcement they need to avoid it.

Best wireless: WIEZ GPS Wireless Collar

Wiez

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is the option to choose if you’re averse to any installation process at all.

Specs

  • Coverage area: 65-3,281 foot radius
  • Correction method: Beep, three vibration levels, 10 shock levels
  • Number of dogs: 1 per collar
  • Dog size: One size fits most
  • Wired or wireless: Wireless

Pros

  • Quick setup
  • Easy automatic shutoff feature
  • Variety of correction levels and methods
  • Highly affordable

Cons

  • Cannot be submerged in water

If you don’t want to fool with wires, the WIEZ is an affordable GPS solution that can keep your dog in a safe radius around a set point. By connecting the collar to GPS satellites, you can quickly define an area with a radius as small as 65 feet or as large as 3,281 feet for your dog to roam in. It takes minutes, not an entire weekend of digging.

The WIEZ offers a surprising number of training mode combinations (the manual claims 32) for its price. These modes offer varying tone, vibe, and shock levels for the corrections. They all work similarly, with 16-second periods of activity followed by 30 seconds of rest. After three 16-second activity periods, the correction is shut off to preserve the safety of your dog.

Best for large dogs: Pet Control HQ Dog Fence System

Pet Control HQ

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It specifically supports XL dogs and has enough degrees of correction to support them carefully.

Specs

  • Coverage area: ¾ mile remote, up to 10 acres wired
  • Correction method: 1-10 correction levels of vibration or shock
  • Number of dogs: 1 per collar (up to 3)
  • Dog size: S, M, L, or XL (11-154 pounds, 8-27 inch neck)
  • Wired or wireless: Wired border / wireless remote

Pros

  • Wired portion has three levels of increasing shock to meet your dog’s needs
  • 10 levels of correction with a remote for up to three dogs
  • 8-second safety shutdown
  • Customer service

Cons

  • Short battery life

Large dogs can often push through weaker stimuli to escape a typical invisible fence. It just comes with the territory of being bigger. At the same time, you don’t want to subject your pooch to overzealous corrections.

The Pet Control HQ system acknowledges this issue in a couple of ways. The wired system it comes with has three levels of correction that increase as your dog nears the barrier. There’s an 8-second safety shutdown, so if they truly don’t “get it,” they won’t be hurt. The other way the Pet Control HQ system helps the needs of bigger dogs is the 10 levels of training that come via its remote control system, varying all the way from a spooky tone to shocks.

One thing to note is how people rave about Pet Control HQ’s customer service. While our call to technical support was unanswered due to a lack of technician availability, we received both a call and personalized text without even needing to leave a message. The company’s intensive index of tutorials, plus FAQs and troubleshooting videos, should give some insight into the company’s support philosophy.

Best for small dogs: PetSafe Elite Little Dog In-Ground Pet Fence

PetSafe

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This system is made with the little ones in mind.

Specs

  • Coverage area: ⅓ acre (can be expanded to 25 acres)
  • Correction method: Tone and four static levels
  • Number of dogs: 1 per collar
  • Dog size: 5+ pounds, 6-16 inch neck
  • Wired or wireless: Wired

Pros

  • Specifically designed for small dogs
  • Reflective strap on collar helps you quickly find your dog
  • Lightweight collar

Cons

  • Some extremely tiny dogs may still come in under the weight requirement

While most systems can accommodate dogs as low as 5 pounds, few are made with their needs in mind. When you’re that tiny, everything is intense. Special options need to be made for you.

The PetSafe Elite Little Dog makes these adjustments in order to support particularly small breeds like Yorkies. While this collar and its corrective capabilities work on a smaller scale, there are limits to how far the company can tone them down. So, if your dog comes in under 5 pounds, it’s still too small and you’ll risk the collar coming off. They might also find the corrections too intense.

Otherwise, the system works very similarly to other PetSafe wired underground systems, just attenuated to smaller dogs. One notably nice bonus, though, is a reflective strap on the collars that help you find your small dogs, even at night.

Best budget: BHCEY GPS Wireless Dog Fence

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A simple GPS wireless fence on a budget.

Specs

  • Coverage area: 98-3,280 foot radius
  • Correction method: Tone, vibrate, and shock
  • Number of dogs: 1 per collar
  • Dog size: 6-28 inch neck
  • Wired or wireless: Wireless

Pros

  • Very reasonable pricing, especially when on sale
  • Overcorrection protection
  • Slim design

Cons

  • Large minimum radius size

The BHCEY is another wireless, GPS-based invisible dog fence that works by setting up a radius from the device. Without overstating details, it works in a very similar manner to the WIEZ, our choice for best wireless model. It even has a max of three activation periods for safety.

The differences lie in cost and size. The BHCEY runs a bit cheaper and can regularly hit the two-digit price mark when on sale. It also has the issue of having a large minimum size for the radius, making it not suitable for smaller play areas. If it suits your needs, however, it is a steal and a great way to start training your dog with invisible fences.

What to consider before buying invisible dog fences

While invisible dog fences have plenty of benefits, such as letting your dog run freely without a rope and not forcing you into having a physical fence, they do present some difficulties as well. Picking out a correction method that will suit your dog’s needs and safety is paramount. Then, you have to consider installation. Should you go with a wired or wireless system? Finally, each fence comes with a learning curve that you and your pup need to navigate.

Here’s an overview of each major factor so you can get a handle on what you need to know to get the most out of your invisible dog fence.

Correction method

The most important aspect to get right and be comfortable with in the whole process is the correction method. Typically, we find three correction methods in the best invisible dog fences:

  • Tone: This gives a noise that alerts your dog. It might work with training to remind the dog to stop or even startle the dog.
  • Vibe: A vibration. This method works better than a tone for dogs that are hard of hearing.
  • Shock: Also referred to as “static” correction. This gives the dog a zap to alert their attention and signify danger.

While tones and vibration are meek enough, the words “shock” and “static” evoke different feelings. The World Animal Foundation acknowledges the controversy associated with this type of collar but asserts that shocking collars can be humane. It’s all about proper usage and good training. The most salient advice? Once the dog can feel the shock, don’t raise the level anymore; focus on training instead.

Be sure to look at how many levels of shock or static the invisible dog fence provides. Another thing to look for is how the collar responds to continued misbehavior. Some collars will automatically shut off, for instance.

At the end of the day, invisible dog fences are not for every dog. All correction methods from the device should be delivered with empathy and combined with consistent, correct training.

Wired vs. wireless

Invisible dog fences come in two main styles: with wires that you bury under the ground to specify an exact place for dogs to go and with more circular area control methods. Technically, it makes it a selection of wired vs. wireless, like so many other things in today’s world, but here it is completely different.

For wired (or “underground”) invisible dog fences, the wire doesn’t actually connect to your dog. That would defeat the entire point of these freedom-loving devices, after all. Instead, wired means a bit of busy work for you—having to lay it out around the yard and possibly do some digging—in exchange for precision control. The underground wire represents the barrier around the space.

Wireless devices, on the other hand, are simpler to use, but typically result in circular areas. Most either use a GPS marker (similar to what is found in pet GPS trackers) or a centrally-located beacon, around which dogs can stray for a user-determined distance before being corrected. With these systems, you save a lot of work, but the typically circular areas they enclose can be frustrating in the square, boxy world we live in.

There’s no perfect choice here. The wireless GPS devices are great for large yards and renters, while wired systems are good for suburban homeowners. Remember, once you’ve installed the wiring, the system should be good for several years.

Training

Even the best invisible dog fences are going to require some training for your dog to get used to the system. Imagine if you got beeps and static shocks, seemingly at random, when you moved … it’d be scary and confusing. Dogs need to be helped to know where their borders are.

In other words, invisible dog fences are NOT Plug’n’Play.

This instruction manual contains a 31+ day training regimen that includes protocols for when you take the dog outside of the given area. Note that days 15 thru 30 are considered the “Pet Monitoring” stage, as the training process becomes increasingly hands-off over the course of the program. This training regimen comes from a PetSafe product (specifically the PetSafe Elite Little Dog In-Ground Pet Fence), but it is safe to assume other products have similar training times. Grab some great dog treats to make the process more enjoyable for everyone.

FAQs

Q: How much does an invisible dog fence cost?

Invisible dog fence costs typically start at around $100 for cheaper kits that only support one dog. Mid-tier kits will run around $200 to $300 but are often modular, meaning you can get a price that suits your needs exactly. Then, products such as the SpotOn GPS collar for dogs, which allows you to fine-tune what GPS coordinates your dog can roam in, can cost north of $1,000.

Q: Can a dog escape an invisible fence?

As with physical fences, a dog can escape an invisible fence. To do so, however, would require the animal to ignore correction signals they are trained to avoid prior to usage. Even with training, some dogs will ignore the warnings of an invisible fence. Much like with people, every dog is different.

Q: Can I install an invisible fence myself?

You can install an invisible fence yourself. The most tricky part of the process is running the dog fence wire if you’re using a wired model. To do this properly, it may require digging a shallow runway to bury the wire under. For average yards, this should be completable within the span of a weekend, weather permitting. Alternatively, grab a wireless model that “throws” a radius around a central point for your dog to roam through.

Final thoughts on the best invisible dog fences

Invisible dog fences are dog products, things that are meant for some of the most defenseless and selfless members of our family. As a result, we must take care to choose the very best invisible dog fences, match them up to our dogs’ needs, and be prepared to adjust as necessary.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best invisible dog fences for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best infrared heaters in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-infrared-heaters/ Mon, 07 Aug 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=561110
Best infrared heaters sliced and diced header
Tony Ware

Don’t be afraid to lose your cool and get excited about these heaters.

The post The best infrared heaters in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best infrared heaters sliced and diced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Dr. Infrared Heater DR998 best overall infrared heater with a remote control Dr. Infrared Heater DR998
SEE IT

This is an infrared heater that packs more features than the rest and delivers best-of-both-worlds heating from behind a stylish exterior.

Best ceiling-mounted Comfort Zone ceiling-mounted infrared heater with mounting bracket and cord Comfort Zone CZQTV5M
SEE IT

This combination of ceiling heater and halogen lamp is perfect for a shed or screened in porch.

Best budget BLACK+DECKER Quartz Tower budget infrared heater glowing yellow BLACK+DECKER Infrared Quartz Tower Heater
SEE IT

Pure radiant goodness perfect for that one family member who is always cold.

If you’ve had cold feet dealing with your cold feet, it may be time to get one of the many infrared heaters that are currently available. They use a slightly different technology—and are a ton quieter—than your standard space heater. Plus, they seem quite energy efficient and have a delightful radiant heat feel, similar to that of the sun. At the same time, “infrared” reminds us of radiation, which is scary. And they excel at spot heating. So what should we get and how should we use it? Our deep dive into the best infrared heaters and the science behind them will get you up to speed!

How we chose the best infrared heaters

We found what you wanted, and maybe a few things you didn’t know you wanted but will be delighted to learn about, in an infrared heater. Through our research, we’ve discovered a number of styles of infrared heater that people keep coming back to again and again. Fan (or fanless) favorites, so to speak. Then, we found smart tech, safety features, and extras that you might want if you knew about them and ensured we got a few products with those as well. Finally, we ensured we got the best infrared heaters for any location, inside and out, on your wall or at your deskside.

The best infrared heaters: Reviews & Recommendations

The following list of infrared heaters should get you started on your journey to finding the best option(s) for your home and patio. There’s one on this list for practically every location you could think of. So, wherever you need a heat source, you can look here to find something that will work for you and let you save the best heated socks and gloves for outdoors adventures.

Best overall: Dr. Infrared Heater DR998

Dr. Heater

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is an infrared heater that packs a bit more than the rest, has a super stylish exterior, and gives you best-of-both-worlds heating.

Specs

  • Wattage: 1500W
  • Size: 16 x 11 x 16 inches
  • Placement: Floor, on wheels
  • Heating: Infrared + PTC

Pros

  • Extraordinarily stylish
  • UL certification and tip-over protection
  • Features humidifier
  • PTC heating with oscillation

Cons

  • Humidifier is fiddly, only good for a few hours

One of the premier infrared heaters for a number of reasons, the Dr. Infrared Heater DR998 takes into account a lot of issues the typical user might have and adds features that complement these systems well. It also comes in a highly stylish free-standing wood cabinet with wheels that you can position as you like.

The number one thing to know about the Dr. Infrared Heater DR998 is that it uses both infrared quartz heating and more traditional heating elements. These combined heating systems provide a best-of-both-worlds scenario. You get the boosted-by-being-close radiant heat you desire from infrared and ambient air warmth. For this reason, the DR998 was featured among the best space heaters and considered a choice for large rooms.

Further bonuses of the Dr. Infrared Heater DR98 include a 12-hour shut-off timer and the humidifier, which is supplied by a bottle tank and can work for several hours. This reduces the dryness often associated with heating homes and further improves the coziness of the space. 

Like most of the best infrared heaters, the Dr. Infrared Heater DR998 includes heat-related safety features. While the manual recommends keeping the heater at least three feet away from flammable objects (such as blankets) at all times, it does include overheating protection. While not unusual for infrared heaters in general, it is nice to see tip-over protection on an infrared heater of this size.

All in all, due to the combined heating methods, bonus features, and stylish looks of the Dr. Infrared Heater DR998, it was the best infrared heater we could find by a large margin. Unless the price or requirement of placing it on an indoor floor turns you away, this is the infrared heater to get.

Best panel: Wexstar Infrared Heater

Wexstar

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This panel mounts anywhere, stays 100% quiet, and has a modern white finish.

Specs

  • Wattage: 800W
  • Size: 23.5 x 47.3 x 1 inches
  • Placement: Wall or ceiling mounted
  • Heating: Wide panel

Pros

  • Large heating area
  • 100% quiet
  • Naturally quite safe
  • Multiple placement options

Cons

  • Quite expensive
  • Controls lacking

Another favorite type of infrared heater is the panel. Panels, which can be affixed to walls or the ceiling, provide a nice supply of consistent heat for multiple areas of your home. Of this type, the Wexstar Infrared Heater is particularly appealing due to its size, modern white appearance, thinness, and relatively simple installation.

Wexstar Infrared Heater panels release rays evenly and uniformly across the large panel, which does well to heat rooms evenly. The panels’ width, for example, reduces the phenomena of “cold spots” lurking behind objects produced by thinner infrared heaters. Use in rooms 250 sq. ft. or less for maximum effect.

The Wexstar Infrared Heater is best paired with the Wexstar Electric Wall Heater Thermostat Kit (scroll to ‘BETTER TOGETHER’ to add to cart) to give you more fine-tuned control of the system. Note, however, that this is an 800W system, so most people will feel fine without extra temperature fine-tuning.

Additionally, adding the thermostat will add to the cost, one of the few things to dislike about this system. Infrared panels are great in their safety. They can’t be touched easily if off the ground, the elements aren’t visible to stare at, and it is hard to get flammable objects too close to them if installed properly. They’re also completely quiet due to being purely infrared. But you pay for what you get. As a result, we’re also following up with specifically wall-mounted and ceiling-mounted options that have reduced flexibility in location but are somewhat more affordable.

Best wall-mounted: Dr. Infrared Heater HeatStyle

Dr. Infrared

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This Dr. Infrared provides ample heat, an above-average UI, and excellent safety.

Specs

  • Wattage: 1500W
  • Size: 11.33 x 6.33 x 15.07 inches
  • Placement: Wall mount (2-foot above floor) or freestanding
  • Heating: Infrared + PTC

Pros

  • Way above par LED control panel
  • Safe, cool exterior
  • Smart sensors detect overheating, tipping, blocked vents, and nighttime
  • UL safety certified

Cons

  • Freestanding rather flimsy

Dr. Infrared’s HeatStyle, aka the Dr. Infrared DR908, is the best wall-mounted infrared heater, though it technically “hangs” on the wall and has a freestanding mode. Much like the DR998, the DR908 has complementary PTC heating to ensure areas of the room not directly adjacent or visible to the infrared panels get their fair share of heating too. Once again, with this Dr. Infrared heater, you get the special warming of radiant heat alongside ambient air heat in a quite balanced way.

The Dr. Infrared Heater HeatStyle has advanced sensors that can detect a wide variety of situations. These include hazardous situations, such as tip-overs and blocked vents, that no doubt helped it earn a UL safety certification. It also detects nighttime, during which it will reduce noise.

Still, the Dr. Infrared Heater HeatStyle is not without flaws. While its exterior is made of cool materials that won’t burn if you knock into it, the freestanding mode is a bit flimsier than we would like. This is a wall-mount infrared heater that is best left on-wall when possible.

Best ceiling-mounted: Comfort Zone CZQTV5M

Comfort Zone

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Here’s an infrared heater for overhead spaces … and getting work done!

Specs

  • Wattage: 1500W
  • Size: 5.25 x 26.5 x 14.3 inches
  • Placement: Overhead, ceiling mount
  • Heating: Infrared

Pros

  • Bonus halogen lamp
  • Safety grill and overheat detection
  • 90-degree angle adjustment

Cons

  • Only two heating settings 750W and 1500W, no in between.

The Comfort Zone CZQTV5M combines a ceiling heater and halogen lamp to keep you warm while working away on projects. The perfect infrared heater for garages, work rooms, and workshops, the Comfort Zone CZQTV5M has a protective metal grill over the front to protect it even if you’re moving something (such as a piece of lumber) and happen to give it a tap.

With the ability to tilt it 90 degrees, you can angle yourself for great vision and heat in most parts of the used room. One area where it is less flexible is the heating, which is stuck to strictly 750 or 1500 watts. While this usually wouldn’t be as huge of a deal, if you do end up using this as a work lamp and heater, a bit more fine-tuning and control is always appreciated if you’re doing the kind of heavy work that will build up a sweat.

Best for large rooms: EdenPURE CopperSMART Infrared Heater

EdenPURE

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This infrared + PTC heater has great power and great ratings.

Specs

  • Wattage: 1500W
  • Size: 17 x 13 x 16 inches
  • Placement: Freestanding
  • Heating: Infrared + Copper PTC

Pros

  • Reputation for longevity
  • A customer favorite
  • ETL safety listed with tilt protection and dual overheating sensors
  • Winning infrared and PTC combo

Cons

  • Expensive for the power

If there is an infrared heater to rival our top Dr. Infrared, it is the EdenPURE CopperSMART. It has the same PTC heater addition that makes it usable—especially as supplemental heat—for even large rooms, giving both radiant heat for those nearby and a bit of extra toast to the surrounding air. You’ll feel comfy and also very assured of your safety due to the EdenPURE CopperSMART’s ETL listing.

Contrasting with the Dr. Infrared DR998, the EdenPURE CopperSMART is jet black and could easily blend in with studio sound equipment if you weren’t looking too closely. Its front-facing UI interacts promptly with its simple remote to show you exactly what is going on with the heater. Otherwise, the EdenPURE CopperSMART has a very similar box-on-wheels form factor that, when compared with its cool exterior, is very convenient for moving about the room.

In many ways, the EdenPURE CopperSMART is a premium choice. Brand loyalty is abound from customers that love their EdenPURE heaters nearly a decade ago that are just now getting updated. According to EdenPURE, the CopperSMART should last for 80,000 hours of use, making it another part of that legacy for many. However, this premium flavor is also reflected in the price. And, at the end of the day, 1500W of heat is 1500W of heat, no matter the form it takes.

So, if you’re looking for the surety that comes with brand loyalty and longevity, the EdenPURE CopperSMART is a great choice. If balanced prices are still your mainstay, go with Dr. Infrared.

Best budget: BLACK+DECKER Infrared Quartz Tower Heater

BLACK+DECKER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Pure radiant goodness, best served to one.

Specs

  • Wattage: 1500W
  • Size: 12.2 x 8.5 x 23 inches
  • Placement: Freestanding
  • Heating: Infrared with air

Pros

  • Easily movable; only 5 pounds, has handle
  • ETL Certified
  • Tip-over and overheat protection
  • Great price for the power—inexpensive!

Cons

  • At its best when used for one person

BLACK+DECKER provides the perfect foil to complex infrared heaters. It’s the best purely infrared heater and a great budget pick. At nearly two-foot tall but still under five pounds, and with a handle, you’ll be able to take it with you as you move around. This will eliminate most of the positional disadvantages of infrared heaters that lack additional heating elements. Still, this form of heater does get hot, which “leaks” out into the air around it. In this way, the BLACK+DECKER, which also has a fan, can do okay with ambient heating in small rooms.

The BLACK+DECKER Infrared Quartz Tower Heater still functions at its best when serving one. That’s okay, however, considering its price. In fact, this arrangement can be quite convenient for a family that has a seemingly always-cold member that could stand a blast of radiance to warm them without overly affecting others.

What to consider before buying infrared heaters

Infrared heaters are a criminally under-discussed product category, which can often lead to disappointment when purchasing them. Understanding them fully, and what makes for the best infrared heaters is not simple, making it all too easy to rely solely on manufacturer claims.

In reality, the heating style of an infrared heater is quite special. Radiant heat acts—to simplify it greatly—more like a lamp than a traditional heater: it puts out rays. These rays are then absorbed by what they hit, warming it. If you’re hit by infrared, you’ll be warmed. Understanding this alone will put you ahead of most consumers and help you get radiant, sun-like heat that is actually quite satisfying.

To investigate further, we will look at the heating types used by infrared heaters and how that interplays with infrared heater placement. We also want to delve into safety a bit more, which is both more complicated than initially meets the eye and another perennially under-explained aspect of selecting the best infrared heaters.

Heating types

The best way to end up disappointed with an infrared heater is to not fully understand it. Too many manufacturers sell them as space heaters. There are infrared heating types that we’ll go into in a moment that can function like space heaters, but it is a fundamental error to conflate the two.

Instead, to truly grasp the beauty of the best infrared heaters, you must approach them as they really are. Infrared heaters use radiant—a word that can also be used to describe the sun’s heat—energy to heat you. It’s why many people describe the feel of an infrared heater as something special.

This radiant heat travels more like light than the air-burning heat of typical space heaters and patio heaters. While we cannot see infrared, it does help to visualize plain infrared heaters as light sources, but instead of giving off light, they give off heat. But, much like lightbulbs, small but pure sources of infrared heat can cast “light” but also leave “shadows,” which can leave the uninformed confused and dissatisfied.

To alleviate this issue, the best infrared heaters typically use one of two heating types. The first is pairing the infrared heater with a PTC heater. “Positive temperature coefficient” heating is a type of standard heating that self-regulates by getting colder when hot and warmer when cool. This heating complements infrared by providing a base layer of heat while still letting radiant heat shine.

Next, large panel infrared heating acts much in the same way that the lengthy fluorescent tubes of your high school worked. In a word, by being lengthy and large, rooms get better coverage. Using one or more large panels in a room reduces the chances of a “dark” cold spot.

Infrared heater placement

Infrared heaters should be placed in such a way that the rays of the infrared machine will be able to reach the user.

Again, PTC heating will help, but that is not why we like infrared heaters. We like infrared heaters for their efficiency. Translating as much energy into direct warmth on the skin as possible.

As a result, highly movable infrared heaters—especially lightweight ones that include handles and/or wheels—can be highly desirable. Don’t let this scare you from wall-hanging ones or large panel types that face the family. Infrared heaters that connect to the same wall the family TV abuts are likely to perform well. 

Infrared safety

Infrared from infrared heaters is safe. At least as far as heating elements go.

Some practitioners even advocate for infrared therapy. You’re certainly familiar with infrared saunas. Additionally, there are no emissions. Still, this isn’t the full story.

The short story, and the end for most guides to the best infrared heaters, will be that many (if not most) infrared heaters have some sort of UL or ETL certification. These two highly similar, and highly related, certifications indicate a product is capable of passing stringent safety regulations. They also indicate that a product is manufactured in a way that will provide a safe customer experience.

However, the long story is a bit more complex. This primer on infrared will declare that infrared comes in three styles: near, mid, and far. Far, it says, is of little or no practical concern in any condition. Yet glassblowers and welders must wear protection due to the intense near-infrared associated with their professions. Even near-infrared is thought to do more good than bad for our health when supplied at the right intensity.

In any event, the quartz filaments used in most infrared heaters put out almost pure far infrared. Panel types have the bonus of having no visible heating element. At the end of the day, however, that’s why we look to UL and ETL certifications and read instructions. The science is difficult.

Heater unit safety

A much more pressing, but infinitely less confusing, safety issue with infrared heaters is that they are quite hot. Naturally, this is a quite desirable feature for a heater, but nonetheless dangerous. While a nearly ubiquitous feature of the best infrared heaters is a cool-to-the-touch exterior, there are other features you may wish to look for that can boost the safety of your unit.

Tip-over protection: Also called “tilt protection,” this feature will shut off the unit if it is tilted or tipped over. When an infrared heater directly faces the floor, all of the heat intended to be “given” to you and other objects is provided to your flooring. That’s a fire hazard! This prevents it.

Overheating detection: Even heaters will start to break down when overheated. This feature cools off the device after a certain temperature threshold is achieved. As a fun fact, remember that PTC heating additions naturally self-regulate heat to some degree.

Blocked vent detection: Less common on infrared heaters as a whole, but still valuable on those that make the obvious combination with PTC heaters. Turns off the heater if a vent gets clogged.

Remember that not all heater styles will include each of these safety mechanisms. For example, panel heaters meant to be affixed to the wall won’t benefit from tip-over protection.

FAQs

Q: How much does an infrared heater cost?

An infrared heater can cost anywhere from around $50 to over $400. Be careful when selecting infrared heaters that cost under $50, even from similar review sites, as many popular budget models don’t seem to be true infrared heaters under closer inspection.

Q: What are the disadvantages of infrared heating?

The main disadvantage of infrared heating is that its uni-directional heating may produce “cold zones” in your home if placement of the heating unit isn’t thought through properly. Many of the best infrared heaters have supplemental PTC heaters to counteract this and provide better air-based ambient heating.

Q: Can I leave my infrared heater on all night?

You can leave your infrared heater on all night, much like other heaters. Many infrared heaters have programmable 12-hour heating times, thermostats, and night modes. For overnight safety, check for features like overheating detection.

Final thoughts on the best infrared heaters

Infrared and infrared heaters are confusing to analyze due to common misconceptions and scientific miscommunication related to the technology. If properly understood, infrared heaters can provide direct heat efficiently. Once again, for most customers, the Dr. Infrared Heater DR998 will be the infrared heater. But don’t entirely discount the others, as their form factors or styles can be appealing in the right circumstances, such as the Wexstar panel on a home looking for a modern look that also happens to have ample open wall space.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best infrared heaters in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best monitor stands in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-monitor-stands/ Thu, 13 Jul 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=556791
Peripherals photo

Whether you want to save desktop real estate or improve your posture, a properly positioned monitor stand, shelf, or arm can help.

The post The best monitor stands in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Peripherals photo

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Grovemade desk shelf with a computer monitor on it Grovemade Desk Shelf
SEE IT

An elegant desk topper made of quality materials for a rich look and stylish space management.

Best budget Simple trending monitor stand with supplies underneath Simple Trending-Metal Monitor Stand
SEE IT

Incredible for a student desk or to just get things organized.

Best dual-monitor arms Mount It! Dual monitor arms with monitors on them Mount-It! (MI-1772) Dual Monitor Arm
SEE IT

Perfect for getting your second monitor in the perfect spot.

Having a monitor stand can transform your boring, stable computer desk into a dynamic platform for creativity and efficiency. Instantly clear space to sort through a pile of documents or tackle that art project. Additionally, if you have the perfect monitor but the height adjustment is difficult, a stand or arm can help preserve your posture and reduce neck strain. Unfortunately, depending on your situation, you may need one of several different builds to fit your monitors. If you read on, though, we’ve collected an assortment of the best monitor stands for just about any configuration.

How we chose the best monitor stands

Over the past months, we’ve sorted through several categories of monitor stands (think dual- and triple-monitor setups, etc.) and selected the best monitor stands, shelves, and arms for respective categories. In many ways, the following write-up is a compilation of the best of the best for each of those situations.

In fact, if the given product for a category doesn’t fit your particular situation (perhaps it’s equipped with the wrong VESA configuration—a standard for mounting interfaces), there will likely be a link to a broader range of preferred picks for the category. Of course, there are also situations where a full article would be beyond the scope of what is reasonable, and we’ll try to cover a couple of those here, as well.

Note that both stationary monitor stands and arm-style monitor stands are represented within our picks for best monitor stands.

The best monitor stands: Reviews & Recommendations

The following collection represents a best-of-the-best situation. Additionally, a wide variety of materials, lift heights, and even VESA compatibilities will be presented. There truly should be something for everyone in this listing of the best monitor stands.

Best overall: Grovemade Desk Shelf

Grovemade

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This gorgeous monitor stand is made with care from premium materials.

Specs

  • VESA / Size:  9 x 31.5 inch top
  • Material: Wood and aluminum
  • Lift Height: 4.5 inches
  • Maximum Tilt: N/A

Pros

  • Carefully crafted from your choice of walnut, oak, maple, or plywood
  • Supports monitors weighing up to 50-pounds
  • A truly stylish piece
  • Quick assembly

Cons

  • More expensive than you might like

A premium choice, made with high-quality materials, the Grovemade Desk Shelf gives your monitor a slight lift and a stately look. With enough room below to tuck away one of the slimmer keyboards (mechanical, wireless, TKL, 60%, something’s sure to fit) plus a paper shelf, the Grovemade Desk Shelf gives you the ability to make your desk look tidy and stately quickly. The fact that it sits on top of your desk—as opposed to arm types that must be clamped or put through a desk hole—makes it one of the best monitor stands for antique desks. Add to that the variety of wood styles (and matte-colored versions), and you can make a truly great visual statement out of your desk.

Of course, it isn’t all just looks and a place to slide your stuff under. The Grovemade Desk Shelf’s build is quite solid. For example, the wood is powder coated, which improves durability, scratch resistance, and chemical resistance. Elements of the Grovemade Desk Shelf made of cork are stained with Japanese calligraphy ink. It’s all made premium, through and through, and (if it matters to you) the whole process is done by hand right here in the USA.

Best dual-monitor arms: Mount-It! (MI-1772) Dual Monitor Arm

Mount It!

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This will give you the ultimate freedom to maneuver your dual monitor setup in whichever way you like.

Specs

  • VESA / Size: 75×75 and 100×100 VESA
  • Material: Aluminum and Steel
  • Lift Height: Up to 13 inches
  • Maximum Tilt: 90 degrees

Pros

  • Easy rotation for portrait or landscape modes
  • Great clamping to the desk
  • Gas spring arms for fine-tuning
  • 90-degree tilt and 180-degree swivel create perfect placement

Cons

  • Must tighten tightly to lock monitor arms into place

Mount-It’s MI-1772 is the best monitor stand for those of us that like using two monitors. To summarize, the Mount-It MI-1772 uses a pair of classic triple-jointed monitor arms and connects them together around a clamping base. Despite being connected at the base, the maneuverability of a gas spring triple-jointed arm gives the two monitors a life of their own. Configurations such as vertical, side-by-side, and even diagonal alignment are all possible.

In our review of the best dual-monitor stands, the Mount-It MI-1772 reigned supreme due to its economical use of desk space (it has a small clamp that is surprisingly effective) and movement mechanism. The gas springs allow both fine-grained control of the monitors’ positioning and make them easy to move. Be warned, however, that you will need to tighten them tightly to truly lock them in place.

Best dual-monitor stand: Grovemade Desk Shelf – Dual

Grovemade

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Grovemade has created the most beautiful wide stationary monitor stand your eyes can find.

Specs

  • VESA / Size: 9 x 46 inch top
  • Material: Wood and aluminum
  • Lift Height: 4.5 inches
  • Maximum Tilt: N/A

Pros

  • One of the most stylish large stationary monitor stands
  • Your choice of many styles
  • Relatively quick assembly

Cons

  • While quality, still pricey

If you have a dual monitor setup but don’t want arms, Grovemade has you covered. Similar in construction to the Grovemade we made our top choice, this monitor stand is made of quality wood and cork. Likewise, it has powder-coated wood finishing, and the cork is still stained with Japanese calligraphy ink. What makes the “Dual” version of the Grovemade Desk Shelf different is its size. Not many monitor stands—if you exclude those with arms—exist in this size that maintain this level of quality. By this size, most seem to turn into slender bars of hole-filled metal, but the Grovemade keeps up the quality. Unfortunately, this quality comes at a premium price, so if you’re looking for something that works well but doesn’t cost as much, the best monitor stand for your dual-monitor setup might very well be a pair of monitor arms.

Best triple-monitor arms: Mount Pro Triple-Monitor Desk Mount

Mount Pro

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It has a feature-to-price ratio that is just right.

Specs

  • VESA / Size: 75×75 and 100×100 VESA
  • Material: Metal
  • Lift Height: 4.5 to 27.8-inches
  • Maximum Tilt: 35 degrees

Pros

  • Can mount to table via hole or clamp
  • Precision movements with gas spring arms
  • 17.6 pounds per monitor weight limit

Cons

  • No depth adjustment for middle monitor (like most triple-monitor setups)

The Mount Pro Triple-Monitor Desk Mount is perfect for those wanting to go to the next level and have three monitors. In a similar style to the best monitor stands for dual-monitor setups, the Mount Pro Triple-Monitor Desk Mount has two multi-joint gas spring arms attached towards a central point. From here, a central pole rises for the middle monitor. The result is a triple-headed beast of a monitor array that can be moved about and tilted to face you at many angles. 

One of the few issues with this monitor stand is how the middle monitor lacks depth adjustment. In other words, you can’t pull it closer to you or push it away from you at will. Unfortunately, this appears to be a failing of the category and not just the Mount Pro, as we repeatedly encountered this problem in our investigation of the best triple-monitor stands.

Best monitor arm for standing desk: VIVO Sit Stand Monitor Mount and Desk Riser

Vivo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This monitor stand converts your mobile desk into a standing desk.

Specs

  • VESA / Size: 75×75 and 100×100 VESA
  • Material: Metal arms
  • Lift Height: 4.5 to 20 inches
  • Maximum Tilt: 45 degrees

Pros

  • Converts any desk into a standing desk
  • Can handle dual-monitor setups
  • Single arm edition also available
  • Slidable keyboard tray included

Cons

  • Manual lift

One of the nice things about having a monitor stand is that it can lift your monitor up to higher places. Unfortunately, even if the typical monitor stand can rise really high into the air—high enough for you to use it comfortably while standing—it won’t raise your keyboard, too. That’s where the VIVO Sit Stand Monitor Mount and Desk Riser comes in. When in “sitting” mode, it acts as a regular single (or dual, there are two versions) monitor stand. When it is squeezed it rises, bringing a tray for your keyboard up with it.

The whole thing gives you a lot of flexibility in how you use your desk. The one downside with it is that—unlike the best standing desks, which more often than not feature motorized height adjustment—you’ll have to manually convert this monitor stand from sitting to standing mode. If you want the luxury of standing at the push of a button, you might have to consider ditching your stationary desk altogether.

Best monitor wall mount: Ergotron HX Single Ultrawide Monitor Arm

Ergotron

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This mount works with a ton of VESA patterns, meaning it won’t limit your future monitor choices.

Specs

  • VESA / Size: 75×75, 100×100, 200×100, and 200×200 (more with adapter)
  • Material: Metal
  • Lift Height: 11.5 inches
  • Maximum Tilt: 

Pros

  • Multiple mounting options
  • Future-proofing
  • 10-year warranty
  • Arms fold down to 6 inches next to wall, very compact

Cons

  • Requires separate accessories to accommodate ultrawide monitors

The Ergotron HX Single Ultrawide Monitor Arm is our favorite monitor wall mount due to its extreme compatibility and wide variety of monitors it is compatible with.

Unlike traditional monitor stands, which are on the desk, wall-mounted monitor stands tend to be more permanent fixtures, which means they need to be made tough. They also need to have increased compatibility, so you won’t have to replace them with each technological leap you have with your monitors. The Ergotron HX Single Ultrawide Monitor Arm handles both of these requirements with ease.

For durability, the Ergotron HX Single Ultrawide Monitor Arm underwent intense quality testing in its design phase and has a 10-year warranty. And as for compatibility, it natively comes with four different VESA patterns it can connect to and has an (unfortunately not included) VESA adaptor kit for larger patterns. Furthermore, there are additional kits you can get to make it a dual or triple monitor setup, should you so choose in the future.

Best budget: Simple Trending-Metal Monitor Stand

Why it made the cut: This inexpensive monitor stand is highly reviewed, doubles as a desk organizer, and is perfect for young students.

Specs

  • VESA / Size: 16 x 10 inch top
  • Material: Metal
  • Lift Height: 6.25 inches
  • Maximum Tilt: N/A

Pros

  • Includes three tray organizer
  • Has a shelf for keyboards, notebooks, etc.
  • Suction cup bottom for stability
  • Very affordable

Cons

  • “Cheap” appearance
  • Holes in metal can be annoying

If you’re looking for the best monitor stand on the cheap, the Simple Trending Monitor Stand should probably be your go-to. At a considerably lower cost than any of the other best monitor stands on this list, you’ll find an object that raises your monitor just over half a foot, provides organization for desk doodads, and has room for your keyboard or notebooks to be placed inside.

Overall, the appearance is rather basic, and it feels functionary to a fault. Meaning it is one of the best monitor stands for children, especially young students. Combine it with a proper kids’ desk and you have a great learning station, which is very easy to keep tidy, on your hands.

What to consider before buying monitor stands

You have a two-monitor setup. So, you just need to find the best dual-monitor arms to use as a stand, buy it, and you’re good to go. Right?

Unfortunately, it isn’t so easy. Not all monitor stands are compatible with all monitors, so that’d be a big “oops” moment if you got in a hurry. And that’s just the start. When it comes right down to it, the best monitor stands for you will not only be compatible with your monitor but also able to put your monitors at your ideal height and provide a stable viewing experience.

Monitor compatibility

Both stationary monitor stands and arm-style monitor stands have some possibilities for compatibility issues. With the more stationary, surface-heightening style, it is a bit easier to figure out. Just make sure your new monitor stand’s surface size will fit your monitor’s base securely. In general, this is not a problem, but some budget or “space-saving” monitor stands in this style will be overly thin and potentially cause issues.

Monitor arms, however, need to have monitors mounted to them. Fortunately, most monitors (and monitor arms) have a square pattern of holes referred to as VESA holes or a “VESA pattern.” These are in standard configurations, measured in millimeters, with 100 x 100 being the most common. Nearly every monitor has them, at least nowadays, but you might find different pattern sizes depending on your monitor size. Always ensure your monitor’s VESA pattern and monitor stand align if you want to use monitor arms.

Your ideal monitor height

If your monitor stand has an arm, then you will likely be able to adjust it into a position that is a comfortable level for your head and eyes. Less mobile monitor stands may run into more trouble, but this can be avoided if you determine your ideal monitor height.

One of the easiest ways to determine the most natural and comfortable viewing height for you is to copy the height from a desk you’ve used before that was comfortable. In general, this tends to be with the top of the screen being just below eye level when you are sitting tall and straight. Monitor placement tends to be a bit subjective, if personal.

Still, if you are looking for a more rigorous suggestion than “whatever feels right,” the Canadian Centre for Occupational Health and Safety (CCOHS) has a tip for you. According to a CCOHS guide to office sitting, the “working object” (monitor) should be about 10 to 30 degrees below the line of sight when sitting properly and looking straight ahead.

In any event, ensure that (whatever it may be) your monitor stand can deliver your ideal monitor height.

Stability

Finally, a word on the importance of having a solid structure for your monitor stand. The best monitor stands will keep your monitor(s) in a completely still position while in use.

For monitor arm stands, this means that they will have tightening systems in place at the joints. This will keep your monitor from slowly sinking or jostling millimeter by millimeter every time you bump your desk. In the absolute best case, you’ll be able to somewhat tighten the monitor arm so you can adjust the exact positioning to your liking from moment to moment but avoid accidental movement. That being said, complete locking is better than unwanted movement.

More stationary monitor stands might have less trouble with this problem overall, but caution should still be taken. If the stand is too lightweight or the legs of the stand are made from low-friction hard plastics, each bump of the keyboard could slowly move the stand. Heavy-duty materials and quality high-friction bottoms will keep these stands immobile.

FAQs

Q: How much does a monitor stand cost?

A monitor stand can cost anywhere from around $25 on the low end to over $300. Monitor stands have a surprisingly wide variety of styles, builds, and even functionalities and features. As a result, prices can vary widely.

Q: Is it better to have a monitor stand?

It is better to have a monitor stand than to look at your monitor in an awkward position or have the default stand take up too much space on your desk. In other words, having one of the best monitor stands on your desk is generally considered better than not having one. This being said, you don’t necessarily have to get one right away. If you have one of the best computer desks already, feel comfortable looking at your monitor, and have plenty of space to do what you want, you might be fine.

Q: What are the best monitor stands for gaming?

The best stands for gaming monitors are those that enhance what setup you already prefer and likely include dual-monitor arms. For example, the Mount-It! (MI-1772) Dual Monitor Arm lets you tilt and swivel two monitors easily. This is great for casually playing a game on one screen and having a Discord or stream on another, or even tilting your monitor 90 degrees to display mobile games on the big screen.

Final thoughts on the best monitor stands

In today’s world, there are tons of options for getting monitor stands. In fact, it is the abundance of good choices, not the lack of them, that might make this process difficult. As long as you get basic things (such as a matching VESA pattern configuration) correct, there is a lot to enjoy. Combining our efforts and combing through what’s out there, we’ve sorted this selection of the best monitor stands so you can improve your setup affordably.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best monitor stands in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Toybox 3D printer review: A fun factory for kids and beginners https://www.popsci.com/gear/toybox-3d-printer-review/ Fri, 30 Jun 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=552375
Toybox 3D printer set up on a wooden table.
John Alexander

This simple 3D printer is a great option for those looking to jump into the hobby.

The post Toybox 3D printer review: A fun factory for kids and beginners appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Toybox 3D printer set up on a wooden table.
John Alexander

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The Toybox 3D printer is an affordable, legitimately easy-to-use device that works quickly and intuitively even for total novices. Aimed as much at parents wanting to give their kids a leg up on new tech as it is at toy lovers of all ages, the Toybox 3D printer offers a short path from unboxing to printmaking. Furthermore, Toybox’s printing app and web tool give you legal access to proprietary figures—such as Universal Pictures’ Minions—making it an excellent 3D printer for cosplay accessories.

Toybox

SEE IT

Overview

  • A whimsical presentation gives a sense of discovery right away and continues to deliver throughout the process of using the printer.
  • The printer explains itself and trusts you to make good decisions.
  • You can hop in and start printing immediately, taking perhaps 30 minutes from box opening to having an entirely usable small toy in your hands.

Pros

  • Using this printer is very intuitive, and common sense will guide you through nearly every interaction
  • Most toys just work as printed
  • App provides plenty to print and do, giving you options to make predesigned toys as well as easily design your own
  • Starter bundle’s included “printer food” (aka filament) adequate to make dozens of toys—no need to buy more right away
  • When you do buy more printer food, it is very reasonably priced
  • Easy to remove freshly printed toys from the printer
  • Access—with paid subscription—to third-party intellectual property
  • The sense of joy, wonder, and discovery as you go through the printer and app cannot be understated—cute little messages on the bottom of boxes, playful sounds during printing, usage of your own images to make certain toys, etc.

Cons

  • Could use slightly more documentation, especially during initial setup
  • Not all “create” tab toys worked perfectly

Verdict: The Toybox 3D printer is a fantastic entrance into the new world of consumer-accessible 3D printing and a creative tool the whole family can enjoy, utilize, and learn from.

The setup

One of the first concerns when getting a 3D printer, especially one to be used with young people, is the setup. However, the Toybox 3D printer comes together quickly and easily. This is a 3D printer made for beginners, not experts. In general, this works out, though I admittedly wish my hand had been held a little harder as I began working with the $299 carefully calibrated cube.

Everything comes securely packed to protect sensitive electronics, but it’s easy to remove from the box. I wasn’t concerned in the slightest about seeing a damaged product or removing things delicately from the packaging. Instead, I was greeted by cute messages—the bottom of one box memorably taunts you for staring at its bottom—and “plant food,” what Toybox calls its PLA (Polylactic Acid) build medium filament.

Like an increasing number of modern electronics, the Toybox 3D printer is paper manual-free, through and through. Instead, a welcome placard sends you to the Toybox website. Here, a few-step guide will take you through removing the safety packaging from the inside of the printer, installing the “printer food” into the print head, and connecting the machine to your WiFi network via a smartphone.

Toybox 3D printer unboxing image with John's hand illustrating his confusion
John Alexander

This initial setup guidance is in the form of short bits of text accompanied by small, looping gifs. In general, this is enough. However, when it comes to yanking things out of pricey plastic, more guidance would have alleviated some anxiety. Take the two segments my fingers are pointing to above. Despite blending in quite well with the frame of the Toybox 3D printer (and doing so even better before I had moved them around a bit), these two pieces are to be removed. Despite small things like this, where a little bit of extra messaging would have been useful, the setup was incredibly easy.

Overall, a confident and careful teenager should be able to set up the Toybox 3D printer alone or with limited parental guidance. Within about 20 minutes, I fed my spool of thermoplastic “coconut printer food” in (there are nearly two-dozen flavors, aka colors, available) and was done with an initial calibration print. The leading edge of this initial print was a bit funky. I also didn’t feel 100% confident in exactly how it was supposed to look, but I knew it wasn’t supposed to look like what you see below. So, I made the executive decision to rerun the print.

Peripherals photo
John Alexander

Somewhat satisfied with the second print, I called it a day on that. It then dawned on me that this product was designed to just work. A new philosophy of just lean in and try things took over, and I headed to the Toybox app to see what I could print.

Note: In addition to the initial setup and calibration, a safety guide is included with the app, which I never felt the need to consult. If you encounter serious difficulties, there is a help forum linked from the app where you can discuss issues and make suggestions for future Toybox improvements/products.

The app

Once finished with the initial setup, you’ll want to poke around the app for a bit to find things to print. The main navigational tools you’ll want to use to find things to print are Explore, Create, and Play Packs.

Peripherals photo

The Explore tab gives you access to premade prints that have been tested and approved by the Toybox team. These are your best bet for quality prints that work every time and are the best place to start with your Toybox 3D printer. Options include completely free prints, prints that require “Bolts” (the app’s currency), and prints for Toybox Plus members. Prints that have third-party intellectual property are typically locked behind Bolts or a subscription.

Note: For the purposes of this review, Toybox provided a Toybox Plus membership.

Play Packs are a unique way to use the Toybox 3D printer and include parts that cannot be 3D printed but that can be customized with printed parts. If you’re not feeling particularly creative or want to do something a bit extra with your Toybox 3D printer, these guided activity kits are the way to go. They must be purchased separately, however, and are not included in this review. I highly recommend playing around with your printer, as is, for a while and doing your best to come up with your own ideas before springing for a Play Pack.

One of the most exciting parts of the Toybox app is the Create tab. It’s fun, but it can also lead to some frustration. While all of the other toys printed during the course of this review worked perfectly, I was unable to get the puzzle maker’s slide puzzle to work, even after several changes to the configuration and going back to default settings. To put it into perspective, though, this was my only negative interaction with the Toybox 3D printer.

Peripherals photo

Many Create tab creations, such as the printer pal shown above (a Toybox Plus exclusive), utilize sliders and are quite dynamic. The printer pal above—who I’ve named “John Guy”—was created through a series of menus that felt reminiscent of The Sims or Dark Souls character creator. Creating a printer pal that looked, and even appeared to feel, like me was intuitive and easy.

Other Create tab creations involve putting in an image—which the program will convert to grayscale and then use to AI-generate a 3D contour, which works well—but you can also choose your own pictures or even draw something directly in the app. Other image prints work by altering the insides of the print to create a “magic photo” that appears in the light. Some create tab toys are free, and others are exclusive to Toybox Plus members, though both are easy to find, locate, and use. The Create tab is also where you can, without a subscription, input your own (or third party) stl, obj, 3mf, or gcode files to make custom prints. 

The print performance

When you’ve selected what you want to print, make sure the magnetic tray is fully inserted and press print. After a brief period of heating the nozzle, your print will begin, with a countdown to completion timer appearing on the app. You can check the progress by visiting the website on your phone, tablet, or computer. It’s always useful to watch the initial bit of the print to make sure it starts well, but once the print is successfully started, you are free to go.

Eager to get something out of the printer quickly, I found a selection of “quick print” options and went with something usable: a whistle. Quite appropriately, the Toybox 3D printer begins the printing process with a delightful robotic noise before beginning, and within a few minutes, I responded by blowing a very loud, usable, and annoying whistle (seen here).

John Alexander outside blowing a coconut white whistle he 3D printed with the Toybox
John Alexander

Within about 45 minutes of touching the Toybox 3D printer, I was using a real toy. It can’t get much quicker or simpler than that. Next, I went for a larger toy, a big dinosaur glasses holder, which allowed for a better peek at the insides of a typical Toybox 3D Printer print.

A lattice formation under the head of the Toybox 3D printer
John Alexander

The insides create a sort of “lattice” that makes the prints even more cost-efficient. Each spool of printer food, which typically costs $11 or $15, can make dozens of reasonably sized toys (the printer does not have a giant build area) from the Toybox Labs app. The hollow insides keep the final product light, as well, but do reduce their structural integrity. When finished, the dinosaur glasses holder was hard as a rock despite its largely empty interior.

A Toybox 3D printer figure right after production and following some cleanup
John Alexander

When finished, the prints are ready to be taken out immediately and should already be in a hardened form. The prints are surrounded by a perimeter line that needs to be cleaned away and may have some webbing, even on the best of prints. This can be easily cleaned away. Except for the aforementioned slidey puzzle, all prints with moving parts worked upon removal from the printer.

Two coconut white Toybox 3D printer figures on a green notebook
John Alexander

Finalized pieces look generally rather impressive, with the pieces’ key features showing up clearly. The plant food PLA gives off a very clean shine. Expect exposed upper surfaces to appear somewhat voxelized or reminiscent of a geographical height map when inspected up close. It isn’t uncommon to find imperfections that resemble small animal scratches on the undersides of pieces with larger bottoms, though toys that display—or are affected by—these imperfections are few and far between.

The conclusion

For a machine that fits snugly into the best 3D printers under $500 category, I could not imagine a more delightful start into the world of additive manufacturing. You can generally just expect things to work and not get overburdened with settings, tinkering, or the minutiae that might have scared you away from 3D printing in the first place.

Associated costs with the printer, such as subscription fees for full access, make the Toybox 3D printer less of a casual entry point but still a very likely launching point for a 3D printing enthusiast creating toys and other small objects. This is a 3D printer for kids and teens—though I, as an adult, enjoyed it immensely and will likely continue to use it—so the ability to grow out of it is only to be expected. Toybox’s environment encourages exploration, self-confidence, and discovery and will help you on your 3D printer journey, whether that leads to sci-fi-like food replicators, fabricating concept cars, or just adding to a collection of adorable caricatures.

The post Toybox 3D printer review: A fun factory for kids and beginners appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best 3D printers for cosplay in 2023, according to experts https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-3d-printers-for-cosplay/ Tue, 16 May 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=541385
Best 3D printers for cosplay sliced header
Tony Ware

From raw beginner to content creator extraordinaire, you can bring your cosplay character to life with a 3D printer.

The post The best 3D printers for cosplay in 2023, according to experts appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best 3D printers for cosplay sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for beginners Flashforge Adventurer 3 best for beginners 3D printer for cosplay product image Flashforge Adventurer 3
SEE IT

This is a 3D printer that can be up and running in the space of an afternoon, not a weekend.

Best for pros Anycubic Kobra Max best for pros 3D printer for cosplay product image Anycubic Kobra Max
SEE IT

As a large 3D printer, it can print out pieces that the most dedicated cosplayers might want.

Best budget Ender 3 Max Neo best budget 3D printer for cosplay product image Ender 3 Max Neo
SEE IT

It has a large enough printing area to get decently sized pieces out without breaking the bank.

More and more, cosplay enthusiasts are looking to 3D printers for themed clothing and accouterments. Cosplay—embodying a fictional character through costume and makeup—is a hobby that can be done at any level, with any material. Want to be a robot? A cardboard box and tinfoil aren’t an awful place to start. But, as your performance art progresses, getting more precision cuts and customized looks becomes a top priority—especially if you’re attending big conventions and entering competitions. For that, having one of the best 3D printers can seriously help. Notches on sword sheaths, perfect polygon placement, and more can all be achieved with one of the best 3D printers for cosplay, and here are our top picks for the most accurate accessorizing.

How we chose the best 3D printers for cosplay

When we search for the best 3D printers, we look for 3D printers that could be used by a wide assortment of people and a wide number of use cases. Many of these printers will be great for cosplay as well. Others, not so much. To help us sort the list, we got pointers on the best 3D printers for cosplay directly from a cosplay artist before making our final picks.

Alex Norimaki, a content creator (Twitch/Instagram), engages with her audience by doing the things that young her would like. Whether showing her viewers an older game that she enjoyed as a child or by cosplaying as her favorite characters, she can share her love of creativity. And she shared her love of 3D printers with us to help inform our selections.

The best 3D printers for cosplay: Reviews & Recommendations

The following 3D printers for cosplay cover a wide range of required skill intensity, cost, and overall ability to accommodate the widest range of cosplayers possible. Whether this is your first time using a 3D printer for home designs or you’ve been in the hobby producing costume play props for some time, you should be able to find something to up your craftsmanship in the printers that follow. While you’re at it, check out the best 3D printer filaments to put into your lovely new 3D printer.

Best overall: Bambu Lab X1-Carbon Combo 3D Printer

Bambu Lab

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is the “dream 3D printer for cosplay,” according to experts.

Specs

  • Speed: 500 mm/s
  • Filaments: 4 filament inputs (PLA, PETG, TPU, ABS, ASA, PVA, PET)
  • Size: 256 x 256 x 256 mm output
  • Auto-leveling beds: Dual Auto Bed Leveling
  • Enclosure: Yes

Pros

  • Four filament holders mean user efficiency and multi-color printing
  • Best out-of-the-box printer
  • Upgradeable frame
  • Advanced anti-fail detection systems

Cons

  • On the expensive side

The Bambu Lab X1-Carbon Combo 3D Printer has it all and is the best 3D printer for cosplay if you want to start with the best and get something that can scale with your prowess. In a large way, this is due to its most simple feature—the four filament feeders—but the accompanying tech that comes with the machine will help you tremendously. The fact that it is built to go fast and has a built-in enclosure obviously helps, too.

Still, the main reason why Alex and other cosplayers like her look at the Bambu Lab X1-Carbon is due to the filament threads you see at the top of the machine. They allow you to use multiple colors in your print, up to four with the base model but more with upgrades. While Alex is very forthright that 3D-printed cosplay pieces are quite easy to paint with acrylics, she still values multicolored printing due to time reduction. Plus, if you want sharp edges on your colors but don’t have painting skills, this is a great way to do so. The Bambu Lab X1-Carbon Combo 3D Printer can also use a wider range of materials than most 3D printers due to its advanced nozzle, drive, and cooling mechanics.

You’ll also have access to some more advanced anti-fail checks on the progress of your prints. Sometimes traditional 3D printers will output something that’s just a tad off-center. For cosplay, that’s not acceptable, as wearables and fan-favorite designs highlight these sorts of imperfections quickly, and judges look at accuracy. To counteract this issue, the Bambu Lab X1-Carbon Combo 3D Printer has AI-assisted bed leveling. Additional AI features include first-layer inspection and “spaghetti monster” (the term for stringy coatings on 3D prints that have suffered failures) detection so you can leave your printer alone and know that your time is being used with maximum efficiency.

Best for beginners: Flashforge Adventurer 3

Flashforge

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Flashforge Adventurer 3 will ease anyone into the world of 3D printing.

Specs

  • Speed: 10-100 mm/s
  • Filaments: PLA, ABS, PETG, etc.
  • Size: 150 x 150 x 150 mm output
  • Auto-leveling beds: No, but uses leveling-free design.
  • Enclosure: Yes

Pros

  • Leveling-free design, built-in enclosure with camera, quick snap nozzles, and Plug’n’Play nature make it very beginner-friendly
  • Quiet, 50dB operation
  • Lifetime technical assistance
  • Price point allows you to get started without breaking the bank

Cons

  • Internet connection can be spotty
  • Smaller size

Want to get started 3D printing right away? The Flashforge Adventurer 3 will take you on that adventure without a problem. According to the manufacturer, after you unbox the Flashforge Adventurer 3, you can plug it in, follow a few simple directions, and start printing within around five minutes. In reality, that claim seems to be a sort of speedrunners edition of the setup, which includes carefully removing pieces from the inside of the machine and a several-page startup guide. Still, even for absolute beginners, this is a 3D printer that can be up and running in the space of an afternoon, not a weekend.

Beyond its essentially plug-and-play nature, the Flashforge Adventurer 3 comes with many of the hassles of 3D printing eliminated from its setup. Its build plate is factory calibrated, easing the hassle of leveling, and the build area is already enclosed. Proper nozzle cleanup—which can cause a number of printing errors if neglected—is easy due to the “snapping” nature of the nozzle connection. If, like Alex, you want to take an excited peek at the emerging product, you won’t have to take any special precautions to do so, as the Flashforge Adventurer 3 has a built-in camera specifically for this purpose. Be patient for visual feedback, though, as the internet connection quality is one of the few common complaints about this otherwise super 3D printer for beginners.

Best for pros: Anycubic Kobra Max

Anycubic

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Get the large pieces that the pros wear from the Anycubic Kobra Max.

Specs

  • Speed: 80-180 mm/s
  • Filaments: PLA, ABS, PETG, TPU
  • Size: 450 x 400 x 400 mm
  • Auto-leveling beds: Yes
  • Enclosure: No

Pros

  • Easy-to-use machine
  • Huge print volume for great gear
  • Advanced, 25-point auto-leveling functionality

Cons

  • Heavy device that requires some environmental planning

Anycubic’s Kobra Max is an easy-to-use 3D printer that can suit beginners, but that scales well for professional cosplayers. The reason is that, as a large 3D printer, it can print out pieces that the most dedicated cosplayers might want. At 17.7 inches in height, it can, for instance, print out a typical scimitar in just two pieces.

The Kobra Max uses the in-house LeviQ leveling function to ensure quality prints. This is a 25-point “inspection” for your 3D printer’s bed, which systematically double-checks and calibrates the machine’s leveling. There’s still a lot of room to demonstrate your skill when using the Kobra Max, though, as the machine is heavy, large, and doesn’t come with an enclosure. Be sure to plan around the environment of your home when using this device.

Best for prototypes and accessories: Flashforge Finder 3

Flashforge

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Flash Forge Finder 3 is a small 3D printer capable of getting precise cuts for small adornments.

Specs

  • Speed: Up to 180 mm/s
  • Filaments: PLA/ABS/HIPS/PETG/PETG PRO/TPU 95A, etc.
  • Size: 190 x 195 x 200 mm
  • Auto-leveling beds: No
  • Enclosure: Yes

Pros

  • Quick setup
  • Takes up less space than others on this list
  • Start/stop functionality (resume printing after power outage)
  • Easily removable build plate

Cons

  • Only works with Linux
  • Best for small objects only

While a lot of 3D printing for cosplay is going to be centered around printing out cool swords, impressive armor, and other large objects, the accessories are just as essential. For brooches, pendants, and other gaming objects, you should consider the Flash Forge Finder 3, which utilizes a smaller printing area well.

Bonus features included with the Flash Forge Finder 3 that make it excellent for cosplay include the easily removable build plate. This way, you can use your full hand to remove small, more delicate printed objects and not worry about knocking your valuable equipment for a loop while doing so. Additionally pleasant is the resume printing function, which allows for mid-printing stops without ruining the finished product.

Best budget: Ender 3 Max Neo

Ender

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Large size, small price.

Specs

  • Speed: Up to 120 mm/s
  • Filaments: PLA, ABS, PETG, etc.
  • Size: 300 x 300 x 320
  • Auto-leveling beds: Yes
  • Enclosure: No

Pros

  • Great size-to-price ratio
  • Quick assembly time
  • Perfect for bracers, hilts, saber blades, and more
  • Multiple options available to match your needs

Cons

  • No enclosure

If you are looking for a value pick when getting a 3D printer for cosplay, consider the Ender 3 Max Neo. It has a large enough printing area to get decently sized pieces out without breaking the bank and tends to be amongst the best choices when you compare output size to price. The manufacturer also provides alternative models of the Ender 3 that bring that value up even higher.

But can you get gorgeous cosplay-tier prints out of a budget printer? Alex thinks so, citing this pick for cheapest 3D printer as the most similar in design and functionality to the printer she has used most frequently for home use. It has the room to grow with your hobby and is affordable to use for experimentation. As Alex says of learning moments, “Don’t be afraid of trial and error because it’s gonna happen.”

What to consider when selecting the best 3D printers for cosplay

Whether you pick a 3D printer for cosplay or to print miniatures, things like speed and cost will matter. But what matters most in the specific needs of the cosplay artist? In talking to Alex Norimaki, we found three things mentioned repeatedly in relation to 3D printing for cosplay: the printing environment, the printer’s size, and automatic leveling.

Peripherals photo
If only Link could print his own armor in The Legend of Zelda: Tears of the KingdomAlex Norimaki

Printing environment

One of the first things to consider before buying a 3D printer is what kind of environment it will be placed in. Look for temperature fluctuations and air movements around the machine, which can all potentially warp the final product.

For her part, Alex says she prefers printing in her small closet to keep air flow to a minimum. That being said, she’ll still take small peaks to see how a print is coming along or to measure progress. “They’re not quite as needy as you might think they are,” she admitted after chuckling about her impatience.

Don’t have such an out-of-the-way space? That’s what an enclosure is for. Some 3D printers are already enclosed or include an enclosure attachment, and these are the best for beginners, but it really isn’t a requirement. If you discover you truly need one later, you can buy your own enclosure separately or improvise. As a result, Alex recommends not to worry too much about a 3D printer for cosplay not having an enclosure if you’re otherwise sold on the device.

Size

To put it bluntly, size matters in the world of 3D printing for cosplay. To get a big sword, mystical crossbow, or magical greaves in the most efficient way possible, you’ll want the ability to print large, whole pieces out.

Still, Alex warns that you don’t have to buy the biggest 3D printer to start with. You can always assemble from several pre-printed parts. You might also just want to print out smaller accessories. The filament responds well to glues and is pretty hard, too, so you have several options when it comes to final assembly.

Auto-leveling beds

In 3D printing, leveling is important to keep the finished products properly aligned. Without it, things can get lopsided. With small miniatures, this isn’t always such a big deal or noticeable, but things get a bit different when cosplay gets thrown into the mix. Large wearables that are printed in a misaligned way can cause a cosplay performer to look off-balance. Iconic set pieces will look off.

Alex, who does not claim that balancing and leveling by eye are amongst her many skills, highly suggests getting auto-leveling beds if you can. Since she goes on stage with her printed works sometimes, she wants them always to look correct to the audience. It’s just one less piece to worry about in the 3D printing puzzle, improves print quality, and gives you increased peace of mind from before you tap that “start” key to when onlookers are appraising your final outfit.

Peripherals photo
3D printing assists cosplayer Alex Norimaki with her crowning achievements … Alex Norimaki

FAQs

Q: How much does a 3D printer for cosplay cost?

A 3D printer for cosplay can cost from the mid-$300s to over $1,000. Several factors influence the final cost of the printer, including size, technology level, and brand. Also, be aware that the printing device isn’t the only cost factor. Filaments, and even electricity, are recurring costs associated with 3D printers that must also be considered before making a purchase.

Q: Are Resin printers good for cosplay?

Resin printers are typically not as good for cosplay as other printers. Why? Resin 3D printers specialize in making smaller things, like miniatures and figurines. If your primary cosplay 3D printing goals involve making small adornments to be attached to other materials, you can likely get away with a resin printer, but you should otherwise target a filament printer.

Q: Where can I find cosplay 3D printer files?

You can find cosplay 3D printer files in various places on the web. First, check websites like MyMiniFactory, which has a special cosplay STL files hub. Images of people holding the final product are displayed, so you can get a really good idea of how it should look. Next, try the associated software that comes with your machine for some basics that will work quickly. Finally, if you can’t find what you want, you can always try making the file yourself using a program like SelfCAD.

Final thoughts on the best 3D printers for cosplay

Getting the best 3D printer for cosplay, while not exactly cheap, isn’t as intimidating as it might once have been. With the technology becoming increasingly diversified, it is also becoming more accessible and cheaper. If you have the willpower and time, there is a 3D printer out there that can suit your cosplaying needs and match a reasonable budget.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best 3D printers for cosplay in 2023, according to experts appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best WiFi extenders for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-wifi-extenders/ Wed, 25 Nov 2020 19:11:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-wifi-extenders/
Best WiFi Extenders
Stan Horaczek

Leave no room unconnected thanks to the signal stretched by a WiFi extender.

The post The best WiFi extenders for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best WiFi Extenders
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Best WiFi Extenders Nighthawk AX8 Wi-Fi Mesh Extender (EAX80)
SEE IT

The Netgear Nighthawk AX8 is a large extender … because it can also serve as a mesh network access point.

Best long-range Best WiFi Extenders TP-Link AC2600 Range Extender (RE650)
SEE IT

The TP-Link AC2600 delivers almost as much range as our top pick, but in a compact form factor.

Best budget Best WiFi Extenders TP-Link AC750 Range Extender (RE220)
SEE IT

This plug-in isn’t fancy, but it extends your signal for a wallet-friendly price.

You may have heard of WiFi extenders, but may not know who they’re for. Think about this average home scenario: Mom and Dad are in the downstairs bedroom near the living room, the youngest daughter stays in the southwest bedroom, the older daughter has taken the upstairs bedroom to the northeast, and the teenage son has taken the attic in a stroke of independence. If the router is in a typical living room spot, here’s a clue: Somebody in this house is probably getting such poor signal their smartphone has dropped to 5G and is churning through data instead of using WiFi, which means Mom and Dad might end up with surprise charges (or at least sitting through a fit about why you should have an unlimited plan). The solution is to grab one of the best WiFi extenders to ensure the best possible reception in every corner of your home.

How we chose the best WiFi extenders

Our goal in the selection of the best WiFi extenders comes down to products that we feel consumers will be able to use easily with their existing equipment and feel satisfied with in the long run. It can be a bit daunting thinking about linking up a WiFi extender with your currently existing system. These connections tend to be easiest when the brands of the WiFi extender and the router it accentuates are the same, so expect to see healthy brand overlap between what you see below and our recommendations for the best routers.

That being said, we aren’t above niche picks and discarded products from the list that check the right branding boxes but don’t have the skills to perform. It’s important that a WiFi extender doesn’t make your network too slow, die quickly, or cause unnecessary security issues to your home network.

The best WiFi extenders: Reviews & Recommendations

Hopefully, you know whether you should be looking for a WiFi extender, a WiFi booster, or to replace your router completely. You’ve come to the right place if you’re just looking to fill a gap in your wireless network. We’ve picked out the best WiFi extenders you can buy right now, with options for various price points and user needs.

Best overall: Netgear Nighthawk AX8 Wi-Fi Mesh Extender (EAX80) 

Netgear

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: Amazon

Why it made the cut: The Netgear Nighthawk AX8 offers an incredible range boost, extra ports, and more.

Specs

  • WiFi Version: 6 (802.11ax)
  • Coverage: 2,500 sq ft
  • Ports: 4 Gigabit Ethernet
  • Data transfer rate: 6 GB/s

Pros

  • Great performance and range
  • Mesh compatibility with Netgear routers
  • Security and customization features

Cons

  • Large 
  • Expensive

Unlike most outlet-mounted WiFi extenders, the Netgear EAX80 is a large, freestanding monolith that resembles a regular router or modem. It’s pricey and can’t be wall-mounted, so you’ll need to find some table or shelf space for this imposing slab, but it’s the best-performing WiFi 6 range extender out there. It adds up to 2,500 square feet of coverage and features four Ethernet ports, giving your home network a solid and fast new foothold. It also offers a generous suite of security customizations through an app or browser, including access control for individual devices. It can even serve as an access point in a Netgear-powered mesh network, giving you the option to upgrade if a simple extender doesn’t give you enough coverage.

TP-Link

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: Amazon

Why it made the cut: You won’t find range like this anywhere else.

Specs

  • WiFi Version: 6 (802.11ax)
  • Coverage: 14,000 sq ft (estimated)
  • Ports: 1 Gigabit Ethernet
  • Data transfer rate: 2.6 GB/s

Pros

  • One of the largest coverage areas we saw
  • Great performance
  • Mesh compatibility with TP-Link routers

Cons

  • Bulky plug may take up whole receptacle

The TP-Link AC2600 Range Extender RE650 plugs into an outlet and sends out dual bands—2.4 and 5GHz—via its four exterior antennae. And they apparently do the trick, with an estimated coverage area of 14,000 square feet around the plugin. After a quick setup and a few taps on the app or your browser, the extender will be ready to go and start working, and reliably so at that. We found few WiFi extenders that could reliably push signal out further than this TP-Link with its four antennas. However, there were still a few that could dispense a stronger/faster signal or were more suitable for different scenarios. So the TP-Link AC2600 Range Extender RE650 isn’t quite the end of the line for WiFi extenders, but it comes pretty close.

Best rated: SimpTronic Tech WiFi Extender Internet Signal Booster and Amplifier

SimpTronic

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: People like this affordable WiFi amplifier that doesn’t demand a brand name price.

Specs

  • WiFi Version: WiFi 4 (802.11bgn)
  • Coverage: 5,000 sq ft
  • Ports: 1 LAN/WAN port
  • Data transfer rate: 300Mbps

Pros

  • Extremely affordable
  • Very quick setup
  • No extra frills to pay for
  • Perfect for those that want the bare minimum

Cons

  • 2.4GHz / WiFi 4 only
  • Minimalist design may be too much for some

A lot of WiFi extenders do a ton, are powerful enough to allow you to use your home WiFi at blazing fast speeds on your neighbor’s doorstep, and force you to pay for it all. But what if you just want something that works enough to keep your attic-bound teen’s TikTok scrolling and gaming sessions from eating up the data? The SimpTronic WiFi Extender will do just that. By no means is it fancy—it is, however, basically Plug’n’Play due to how simple it is—but if you’re the type of person that just wants something cheap that’s actually functional, this is it. If, however, you demand high speed and superior range, this is a firm pass.

Best portable: NETGEAR AC1900

Netgear

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Who doesn’t have a spare USB port lying around for a bit of WiFi?

Specs

  • WiFi Version: WiFi 5 (801.11ac)
  • Coverage: Unlisted
  • Ports: N/A
  • Data transfer rate: 1,900 Mbps

Pros

  • Easy installation
  • Small (0.9 x 1.8 x 4.7 inches)
  • Foldable, travel design
  • Included magnetic cradle for multiple setups

Cons

  • For computers/laptops only

If you’re on the go, and like to use coffee shop and restaurant WiFi while out and about, the NETGEAR AC1900 is a good choice. Some users report picking up multi-barred signals from their neighbors’ houses after plugging in the NETGEAR AC1900, so your attempts to get a bit of WiFi from the Starbucks parking lot should be as easy as can be. From a user’s perspective, there’s nothing too fancy about this internet extender, which is a good thing. It’s just a USB 3.0 plug that you can stuff in your laptop backpack for when the need arises. 

Best powerline: NETGEAR Powerline Adapter Kit

Netgear

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: When you need a wired option, this pick from Netgear works.

Specs

  • WiFi Version: N/A
  • Coverage: Your connected outlets
  • Ports: 2 x gigabit ethernet, 1 x wall outlet
  • Data Transfer Rate: Up to 2,000 Mbps

Pros

  • Simulates a wired connection anywhere in your home
  • Passthrough outlet
  • Easy setup, just plug it in

Cons

  • Depending on wiring, can slow connection considerably

While extending your WiFi is great for most purposes, there are times—such as when you’re gaming or on a Zoom call—when wired reliability reigns supreme. In cases such as these, a powerline adapter kit works best. The NETGEAR Powerline Adapter Kit, like all powerline internet extenders, uses your home’s existing wiring network to transmit internet signal. Just plug in one near your router and the other one where you want to use a wired connection. These adapters can be a bit slower if your home’s electrical connections aren’t solid, and they also tend to work better if the passthrough outlet isn’t used, but they tend to provide a connection every bit as steady as a standard wired connection.

TP-Link

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The TP-Link RE220 doesn’t have a ton of bells and whistles but offers a strong signal extension for a low price.

Specs

  • WiFi Version: 5 (802.11ac)
  • Coverage: 1,200 sq ft
  • Ports: 1 Ethernet
  • Data transfer rate: 1.8 GB/s

Pros

  • Great 2.4GHz performance
  • Small and discreet
  • Very inexpensive

Cons

  • Underwhelming 5GHz performance
  • Slow LAN port

The TP-Link RE220 is like a cheap slice of pizza—it isn’t high art but gives you exactly what you need for a low and accessible price. It only operates at WiFi 5, its 5GHz performance isn’t quite as stable and fast compared to the 5GHz networks on more expensive range extenders, and the Ethernet port doesn’t support Gigabit Ethernet. All that said, it adds plenty of distance to your 2.4GHz network, with enough bandwidth for basic internet use and streaming. It’s also compact and discreet, easy to stash away at any wall outlet or power strip. For less than $50, that’s hard to beat.

Why it made the cut: The D-Link DAP-X180 makes it cheap and easy to extend a WiFi 6 signal.

Specs

  • WiFi Version: 6 (802.11ax)
  • Coverage: 2,000 sq ft
  • Ports: 1 Gigabit Ethernet
  • Data transfer rate: 1.8 GB/s

Pros

  • Solid performance
  • Simple setup
  • Discreet, clean design

Cons

  • Lacks WPA3 security

D-Link’s DAP-X1870 is one of the simplest, most affordable ways to extend the power of your WiFi 6 network. It has a clean design with internal antennas, easily disappearing into your wall to do its job. Reviews praised its performance, and the only major criticism we found was some users pointing out that it did not seem to work with the latest WPA3 security format, which is supposed to be a part of the WiFi 6 specification. If WiFi 6’s enhanced security was a crucial factor in your choice to update, the cost saved on this isn’t worth it; however, it should be as secure as previous-generation routers and could improve with firmware updates.

Things to consider before buying WiFi extenders

WiFi extenders exist to create a home environment that is completely filled with WiFi signal. In the modern smart home, having a corner without WiFi is akin to a 1950s room having no source of electric lighting. Somewhat humorously, without a WiFi extender you might have a room fitted with nice smart lights that cannot be lit up due to a lack of WiFi signal … in 2023!

To alleviate the phone-numbing problem of having no WiFi reception in part of your home, WiFi extenders are essential. But what should you consider when getting one? Part of it comes down to the level of WiFi and data transfer your router is capable of. The rest is down to how far away from the extender you want to use your WiFi and how well your 2.4 and 5GHz performance needs to run.

WiFi version and data transfer rate

What do phrases like “delivers internet fast” and “powerful WiFi 6” mean when it comes to a WiFi extender? When you combine one of the best WiFi extenders with one of the best routers and best internet plans, it means your WiFi extender will give an incredible load of internet power to your devices.

But the critical word in all of this is “combine.”

A WiFi extender does just that, extend. It will only extend what you have to the best of its ability. It will not make what you have better just because it passes through it.

Part of the trick is getting something good enough to use the full power of your existing system and then maybe going for an extender that’s a tad better. Think of it like this:

  • If you buy WiFi extenders with less power than your existing system, you’re overpaying your ISP.
  • If you buy WiFi extenders with the same power as your existing system, you run the risk of buying soon-obsolete WiFi extenders.
  • If you buy WiFi extenders with room to accommodate internet upgrades, you’ve hit the Goldilocks zone and found the best WiFi extenders for you.
  • However, if you buy WiFi extenders that are excessively better than your internet, you’re overpaying for WiFi extenders.

Where will the WiFi go?

How far away do you need to get WiFi from your router? It’s another important consideration when getting a WiFi extender. Unfortunately, while it’s not impossible to figure out how far a WiFi extender will extend your internet, there are situations where it isn’t as easy as you might like.

You can look to the manufacturer’s recommendation to give you a guide about how far the WiFi extender will work. WiFi extenders express their range not by distance, but in square feet, not cubic feet as might be expected. This is primarily to help homeowners who have a good idea of the square footage of their house.

Unfortunately, we need to consider both the nature of WiFi and, possibly, the real distance WiFi will go.

Possible obstructions

WiFi is not necessarily the magic beam of internet happiness that we think of it as. WiFi is expressed in waves. While humans control the waves, we cannot 100% control the environment they travel through. Materials commonly found in homes that can partially or fully obstruct WiFi include metal, concrete, and ceramic tiles amongst many others. As a result, it may be beneficial to place your WiFi extenders in various parts of your home or to bypass WiFi altogether by using an outlet-based powerline internet extender.

The coverage formula

We can take some guidance from manufacturers, who are aware of what materials exist in homes. It is useful, however, to convert the square feet of coverage into a direct distance if you have your WiFi coverage planned out in a more linear fashion. It’s also nice for peace of mind if you know exactly where everything will go. Just plug the square footage into this radius calculator to get the direct distance your WiFi extender will extend your WiFi.

2.4GHz and 5GHz performance

It’s something we don’t think about much today, but WiFi travels in certain frequencies. As a matter of function, WiFi extenders extend the performance of the WiFi signal across those frequencies, specifically 2.4GHz and 5GHz. In an oversimplification, each of these frequencies, or “bands,” carries the internet.

Nowadays, you will nearly always find both the 2.4 and 5GHz bands together, which is called “dual banding.” It’s important to know that dual banding does not mean you are getting double internet. As mentioned in our router upgrade guide, the two bands have different advantages. The best WiFi extenders will manage these automatically for you.

Note that not all WiFi extenders are dual banding or have both bands performing at the best level. This is typically the exception in today’s world, however, and will be mentioned when necessary.

FAQs

Q: How much does a WiFi extender cost?

A WiFi extender can cost anywhere from under $20 to over $100 as they vary in functionality, power, and extra features. Remember that a WiFi extender can extend the range of your existing internet. It cannot, however, increase your existing internet’s speed. If you have slower internet, you won’t need a faster WiFi extender and can, therefore, save money.

Q: How do I know if I need a range extender?

You will know that you need a range extender for your WiFi if you move to the outer edge of your home (that is farthest from your router) and notice your WiFi gets worse or starts to fail. If your device that is trying to use WiFi is relatively close to your router, you may be experiencing interference (such as due to microwaves) or have a faulty device/router instead.

Q: How far will a WiFi extender reach?

A WiFi extender will reach a certain distance based on its coverage area. Each WiFi extender will have a different coverage area, depending on power. Oddly, considering that WiFi moves in three-dimensional space, this coverage area is reflected in sq. feet. If you want to know how far away you can be from a WiFi extender to still be covered you will need to do some math or use a circle area to radius calculator (like the one in our “Things to consider …” section.

Q: Does using a WiFi extender slow down your internet?

Yes, unfortunately. No matter what model you use, there will always be a speed drop when using a WiFi extender, as it takes time for the signal to go through additional processing/boosting in the extender to be rebroadcast in either direction.

Q: What is the difference between a “WiFi extender” and a “WiFi booster”?

The terms “WiFi extender” and “WiFi booster” refer to the same equipment. Manufacturers use the two interchangeably for networking peripherals that connect with and rebroadcast your WiFi network to expand its range.

Q: How many WiFi extenders is too many?

While there’s nothing to stop you from using multiple extenders to expand your network in multiple directions, you should avoid daisy-chaining multiple extenders to expand your network beyond the reach of an already-extended router. In theory, each extender cuts your network’s bandwidth by about half, so a double-extended signal only has a quarter of the bandwidth of your base signal. If you need more range than a WiFi extender can offer, you should upgrade your router.

Final thoughts on the best WiFi extenders

The best WiFi extenders offer a great solution to covering gaps in your home network when you don’t want to start over with a new router or mesh network. As WiFi 6 supplants WiFi 5 as the new standard for more routers, extenders will naturally benefit as well. Leave no corner of your home unconnected with a great range extender.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best WiFi extenders for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best routers for Comcast in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-routers-for-comcast/ Wed, 22 Jun 2022 02:45:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=451298
The Best routers for Comcast in 2022
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Sure, you can use the router Comcast provides, but those rental fees will add up fast.

The post The best routers for Comcast in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The Best routers for Comcast in 2022
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall Motorola MG7700 is the best overall router for comcast. Motorola MG7700
SEE IT

Comcast approved, this modem-router combo is quick to set up and the right bandwidth for most high-speed customers.

Best Netgear NETGEAR Nighthawk C7100V is the best Netgear router for comcast. NETGEAR Nighthawk C7100V
SEE IT

Supporting up to 30 devices and a shared storage device, this is a robust reliable home internet hub.

Best 600 Mbps for Cable Internet ARRIS SURFboard SBG7400ACS is the best 600 mbps for cable internet. ARRIS SURFboard SBG7400ACS
SEE IT

Approved for Xfinity, with built-in virus protection features, this is a stable east-to-setup option.

When you sign up for Comcast’s Xfinity internet service, you’ll be presented with a choice that seems almost trivial but will turn out to be one of the most critical parts of your customer experience: Rent a modem/router combo from Comcast or go out and buy your own. At first, it might feel like a no-brainer to go with the Comcast-provided choice. You know it will work well with what you have and the quoted price is never too expensive. However, the math is clear: you’re probably going to be a Comcast customer for many years, so buying your own modem and router will be cheaper. It can be scary to go out and finally make the purchase, though, because you don’t know if the equipment you’re looking at will work with Comcast. That’s why we’ve worked hard to put your fears to rest and come up with this list of the best routers for Comcast.

How we chose the best routers for Comcast

Getting one of the best routers for Comcast is typically a two-step process. First, you need to identify what kind of router you want. Are you going budget? Is Netgear best? Or are you searching for the best portable Wi-Fi? Whatever you’re looking for, there is probably a great router that works with Comcast in the list. This brings us to the second step: verifying that the router works with Comcast internet. This is done in a variety of ways, including researching the wide diversity of customer experiences, manufacturer claims, and product certifications. When combined, these two steps will lead you to one of our best routers for Comcast, just like they informed our list.

The best routers for Comcast: Reviews & Recommendations

The best routers for Comcast are ones that pick up on the key needs of consumers today, while also conferring some advantages of their own. It is tempting to fall into the trap of thinking that only DOCSIS 3.1, Wi-Fi 6E, multi-gigabyte-supporting routers are the best, but the reality is that a more measured approach is best. No over-the-top router built today will actually be the router of choice in the far future it imagines. Instead, our recommendations focus on the best routers for Comcast that will work great this year and beyond … but not so far beyond that we enter a future beyond our current understanding.

Best overall: Motorola MG7700

Motorola

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A Comcast Xfinity-approved modem-router combo that has all you need for quality internet quickly.

Specs

  • Modem combo: Yes
  • Max speed: Supports internet plans up to 800 Mbps
  • Wi-Fi standard: Wi-Fi 5

Pros

  • Comcast approved
  • Quick Setup
  • Right speed for most high-speed customers
  • 4 Gigabit Ethernet ports

Cons

  • Connectivity issues in large homes

The Motorola MG7700 is an upgrade to the very successful MG7550. As far as Wi-Fi routers for your home go, this one will prove to be a top competitor for the modern era. Serving up to 800 Mbps service plans and coming with four Ethernet ports ready to serve the gigabit generation, you should be happy for quite some time.

The MG7700 is only approved to work with Comcast Xfinity, Cox, and Spectrum, which works out in your favor as a Comcast customer. You’ll find that setup is generally quite quick, with only a power cord and your coaxial cable needing to be plugged in before following a few simple steps to secure your connection. Plus, if you do run into any problems, your customer support tech from Comcast Xfinity will likely be at least somewhat familiar with the MG7700 and can give you some pro tips about working with the device.

The Motorola MG7700 works best in medium-sized homes, with those in large homes finding some trouble connecting in the far corners of their home. For these customers, the Wi-Fi 6/DOCSIS 3.1 Motorola MG8725 might work better, but for the average person in the here and now the MG7700 will more than suffice.

Best Netgear: NETGEAR Nighthawk C7100V

NETGEAR

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is a tried-and-true Netgear with the perfect balance between reliable performance and price.

Specs

  • Modem combo: Yes
  • Max speed: Certified for 800 Mbps Xfinity Cable (1,900 Mbps theoretical maximum)
  • Wi-Fi range: Suitable for 1,800 sq. ft. homes

Pros

  • Supports up to 30 devices
  • Shared storage drive
  • 4 gigabit Ethernet ports
  • Access to Comcast Voice (VoIP)

Cons

  • Older model

The NETGEAR Nighthawk C7100V is a robust model that has not only stood the test of time but still competes as one of the best routers of today.

A manufacturing sticker tells us that the C7100V is “100% Certified Compatible” with cable internet from Xfinity up to 800 Mbps, while the actual speed that it can reach is somewhat faster. This should be enough for most consumers by itself, but the four gigabit Ethernet ports certainly aren’t reducing the value either.

Next, we have the access to Comcast Voice, a VoIP system signified by the “V” at the end of the product model. While VoIP is certainly nothing new, we aren’t into turning down well-tuned extras.

Speaking of being nothing new, the C7100V isn’t exactly the new kid on the block. When models have been out for a few years, you have the advantage of knowing exactly what you are going to get and the markdowns in price that come with time. The trade-off, of course, is lowered future longevity and the potential for reduced support from the manufacturer coming on the horizon. In all, with the C7100V you know you’re getting a modem-router combo that won’t break down easily and should still be worth something in a few years.

Best 600 Mbps for cable internet: ARRIS SURFboard SBG7400ACS

ARRIS

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is a recommended for 600 Mbps router that is capable of so much more.

Specs

  • Modem combo: Yes
  • Max speed: Approved for 600 Mbps cable, with 1000 Mbps download
  • DOCSIS: 3.0

Pros

  • Approved for Comcast Xfinity
  • Built-in McAfee protection
  • 4 gigabit Ethernet ports
  • Password-free connection via WPS

Cons

  • Tricky installation
  • Not compatible with DSL or fiber

ARRIS’s SURFboard SBG7400AC2 is a DOCSIS 3.0 router that is suggested for cable internet plans of around 600 Mbps. Again, that’s cable plans (it won’t work with DSL or fiber) and that is a suggestion. In many instances, this product is capable of much higher speeds, such as via the Ethernet ports that can give you a full gigabit connection.

One interesting feature that comes with the SURFboard SBG7400AC2 is access to McAfee Secure Home Internet, part of the McAfee Secure Home Platform. When enabled, it provides McAfee-level security to all devices connected to your network, controlled via an associated app. You can control the security via Alexa or Google Assistant, set parental controls, and even set it to prevent your devices from accessing the internet while you’re away from home for an even higher level of security. For those of you seeing another McAfee product in your lives as a hassle, you’ll be happy to know that this part of the router is optional.

Getting connected to the router with your device is also quite easy. The small button below the status lights, labeled “WPS,” can be pressed to connect applicable phones and other devices. No having to give your password out and no lengthy password typing. A win-win for sure.

The initial setup feels like the main drawback with this router, as the provided instructions are a tad confusing and the SURFboard Manager app isn’t as user-friendly as we’d like. Still, once it works the SURFboard SBG7400AC2 provides a lot for the right niche it serves.

Best Wi-Fi: Amazon eero 6e Mesh Wi-Fi Router

Eero

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Amazon’s eero Mesh Wi-Fi Router sets up quickly to provide whole-home internet coverage.

Specs

  • Modem combo: No
  • Max speed: Supports internet plans up to 2.3Gbps
  • Wi-Fi range: Supports 2,000 sq. ft. area

Pros

  • Tiny and lightweight
  • 2 gigabit Ethernet ports
  • Amazon Alexa support
  • Stay secure with auto-updates

Cons

  • No modem combo

If you’re looking for a pure router, no modem combo, to help distribute internet power throughout your home, Amazon’s own eero 6e Pro Mesh Wi-Fi Router is the perfect device to do so with. As a mesh router, it packs a lot of power in a tiny size and can help you destroy those pockets of your home that are currently just filling one or fewer internet bars on your phone.

The eero Mesh is an Amazon product, so there is no surprise that it comes with Alexa support. Here, Alexa can give you control over the access individual devices have to your Wi-Fi network, meaning your naughty child’s late-night Fortnite session can be shut down with a single sentence.

The eero Mesh is not expensive, with the three-pack option coming in at about the price of the modem-router combos on this list. This is a good thing because the only downside to this system is that in real homes it often isn’t meeting up to the 2,000 square foot coverage area suggested by eero. Too many customers are reporting difficulties using the product through their walls or just outside their home, suggesting a weak signal. Instead, give every room its own happy cube of Wi-Fi-fed internet joy.

TP-Link

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The TP-Link AC1750 Archer A7 provides Alexa support, a VPN server, parental control, and more at a price point anyone can afford.

Specs

  • Modem combo: No
  • Max speed: Supports plans up to 300 Mbps (1750 Mbps theoretical maximum)
  • Wi-Fi range: Suitable for 2,500 sq. ft. home

Pros

  • Competitive pricing
  • 4 gigabit Ethernet ports, 1 gigabit WAN port
  • Award-winning customer satisfaction
  • Built-in Alexa and parental control support

Cons

  • Old model
  • No modem combo

Finally, we get to the TP-Link Archer A7, which is a reliable older router without the modem combo. If you’re truly looking for the best routers for Comcast, as opposed to modem-router combos, and are on a budget this is the go-to pick that should satisfy you for quite some time.

What you might not be expecting from an older, budget router is the Alexa support and robust parental controls, which can set time limits and filtering levels. The router even has a VPN to secure your web-browsing privacy just an extra bit more.

Much like our commentary with the NETGEAR Nighthawk C7100V, there are certain pros and cons when it comes to getting an older router. With the Archer A7, you do get the satisfaction of knowing that the product you’re buying is a two-time winner of a customer satisfaction award from JD Power—the same group known for rating the best cars positively. If it were only to have a modem tied in with it, it could likely still be a high-ranking contender in its own right.

What to consider when buying the best routers for Comcast

So, you’ve followed the two-step approach outlined above and have arrived at a decent-looking router for Comcast. How do you evaluate it from here? A lot of the decision-making process from here comes down to stats and the nearly unlimited wealth of knowledge that comes from the huge Comcast user base. Numbers and individual experiences can tell you a lot about the short-term functioning of a router, but there is nothing like the masses to show you if a router outperforms the rest in the long run.

The next thing you should consider is possibly the biggest question you’ll face when getting a router for Comcast. A question so important, that it will divide the acceptable range of products for you to buy into two parts. So, what is this oh-so-essential question?

Max speed: Routers are rated on the max speed they can deliver. If that speed is higher than the internet speed Comcast is giving you, you’re overpaying for your router. However, if the speed is lower, you’re overpaying for your internet. Every. Single. Month. The recommendation is fairly straightforward and simple: Find the perfect internet speed for you, then buy a router that has a max speed somewhat above that speed. Getting a router with a bit extra leaves you some growing room as your internet package expands, as well.

For modem-router combo users, the next thing you’ll need to consider is DOCSIS. Standing for “Data Over Cable Services Interface Specification,” this factor affects your speed by determining how well the aforementioned “internet juice” can travel from the modem part of the combo to the router part.

You’ll need to select from DOCSIS 3.0 and DOCSIS 3.1. If you want to skip the technical details, we can simplify this selection by saying that DOCSIS 3.0 will be fine for average internet users of the current age but DOCSIS 3.1 is better for top-of-the-line internet speeds and equipment and is more “future-proofed.” In the years that come, we can expect that the basic standard will switch from DOCSIS 3.0 to DOCSIS 3.1.

Now, onto the fine details. DOCSIS 3.0 is capable of 200 Mbps upload speeds and up to 1 Gbps download speeds. In a world where most Americans don’t have gigabit internet yet, it will do fine. However, as coverage expands and competition drives prices cheaper, this will rapidly change. DOCSIS 3.1 has 2 Gbps upload and 10 Gbps download speeds. To put that in comprehensible terms: FromSoftware’s Elden Ring is 60GB. With DOCSIS 3.1 and fast enough internet, you could theoretically download Elden Ring in just 6 seconds. The best gaming routers of tomorrow will certainly be DOCSIS 3.1 routers.

Wi-Fi standard: There are three Wi-Fi standards you are likely to hear about while router shopping. From most to least common, they are: Wi-Fi 5, Wi-Fi 6, and Wi-Fi 6E. Much like DOCSIS 3.0 above, Wi-Fi 5 is going to be fine for the vast majority of you. It isn’t until you get to faster internet speeds or want a dozen or so devices connected to the router at once that you will want something better. Let’s look at these future-thinking options now:

We’ve explained Wi-Fi 6 in detail before, but here are the key facts: Wi-Fi 6 just started to appear in 2019 and is made to handle the faster, multi-gigabit internet speeds we are commonly starting to see. More importantly, it is able to handle a much larger number of smart devices at once. Think about your home filled with you and your spouse browsing through your phones while doing work on your laptops, with the addition of your teen and about a dozen of their friends doing a group project on just about as many phones and laptops. This is the future Wi-Fi 6 will have us prepared for.

Wi-Fi 6 routers also tend to have next-generation security protocols, like WPA3, and an extended Wi-Fi range.

Wi-Fi 6E is even newer than Wi-Fi 6, with the E standing for “Enhanced.” It uses technology that few devices today can actually take advantage of. Understanding Wi-Fi 6E in detail is worth it for the futurist but, in the here and now, there is such a thing as being too prepared. If you want something to last far into the future, one of our picks for the best Wi-Fi 6 routers should be more than enough.

Wi-Fi range: Wi-Fi range is quite a bit more simple to understand than the above. This is the range that you can get Wi-Fi signal from the router. The only time this calculation can get complicated to understand is if you have a multi-story home (at which point you might want to look at our suggestions for best Wi-Fi extenders). The range is a direct point A to point B count, so you might have to study up on your Pythagoras.

The last thing to consider is that walls, electronic devices, and certain other materials in between your device and the router can weaken the signal somewhat. Like a lot of stats in the tech product world, more is better, but just enough will suffice.

FAQs

Q: How much do routers for Comcast cost?

The best routers for Comcast can cost anywhere from around $50 to somewhat over $300. A lot of this comes down to if you are getting a modem-router combo or a plain router by itself that you will use with a separate modem. Some routers can be even more expensive than $500 but these typically use tech that the majority of customers won’t be able to get the full benefits of, such as advanced Wi-Fi standards and DOCSIS 3.1.

Q: What router is best for Comcast?

The best router for Comcast is the Motorola MG7700, as it comes Comcast Xfinity-approved and delivers high-quality internet speeds. The Motorola MG7700 is also very convenient to set up and will work well for most users.

Q: Are Xfinity routers any good?

The basic router provided by Xfinity is okay but comes with a monthly rental fee. Buying your own modem and router will save you a ton of money over the long run and give you access to higher quality service and bonus features. Our best routers for Comcast Xfinity above should all prove to be a better choice in the long run, depending on your own situation.

Should I get a modem-router combo?

Quick lesson time! In a simple sentence, here is the difference between a modem and a router: A modem is the part of your internet equipment that gets the “internet juice” from the company and a router is the part that “sprays” it around your house. Okay, that’s a bit oversimplified and a tad gross but can serve as a basic guide for those of you wondering, “Do I need to get a modem combo or just a router?”

If you get a router but don’t have a modem, you will be stuck with a box spraying signal around your house, but the signal won’t have any internet in it. Again, that’s a bit oversimplified, but the problem remains: If you have a plain router, you are going to need a separate modem box to make your internet work.

This is why so many of us get modem-router combos; you get everything you need in one box. The two are so commonly housed together that you might already have them confused as being one and the same. It doesn’t help that manufacturers will advertise the combos as simply a “router.” To avoid disappointment, be sure to check what you are actually getting by reading the labels and fine details carefully before you make a purchase.

Final thoughts on the best routers for Comcast

At the end of the day, the most important thing when buying your own router for Comcast is making sure you end up with both a router and a modem, have a router that is compatible with Comcast, and are able to enjoy the speeds provided. All of our best routers for Comcast are suitable for Comcast and many have modems, too. Nearly everyone will be happy using the Motorola MG7700 with their Comcast Xfinity internet.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best routers for Comcast in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best solar deck lights in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-solar-deck-lights/ Tue, 20 Jun 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=549598
The best solar deck lights
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Think Mother Nature needs a night light? Grab these solar lights to keep just a tad of the power of the sun running in the dark.

The post The best solar deck lights in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best solar deck lights
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Aootek Solar Lights with Lights Reflector Aootek Solar Lights with Lights Reflector
SEE IT

These lights give you more control, and more intelligent operation, than the competition.

Best lanterns TomCare Metal Solar Lantern Light TomCare Metal Solar Lantern Light
SEE IT

These lanterns give you the best range of usage options while feeling quite authentic.

Best budget Lightique Moroccan String Lights Lightique Moroccan String Lights
SEE IT

Highly weatherproof lights on a string. What more do you need?

With summer vacation here and warmer nights to enjoy, grabbing some solar deck lights to extend the joys of the day into the wee hours is starting to make sense. There are many different styles to choose from, each with their own specialties. Some provide a romantic ambiance, while others function to illuminate stairs and other objects to help you and your guests avoid accidents. Here, we’ve collected a comprehensive list of the best solar deck lights for any style, functionality, or circumstance.

How we chose the best solar deck lights

Finding the best solar deck lighting goes beyond finding the best forms for them (strings, stair illuminators, etc.) but also needs to consider several more complex factors. To make our decisions, real-world functionality, and materials were highly considered.

Solar-powered deck lights are tricky to fully review for anyone due to the somewhat finicky nature of the weather. As humans, we tend to over or underestimate local cloudiness based on our temperaments. Accordingly, it makes sense to cast a wide range and survey large numbers of real customer reviews, often more telling than expert reviews of lights in near-pristine conditions. How is the actual brightness and reliability of the lights, for instance?

Despite the low energy costs of maintaining outdoor lighting, many people buy solar-powered deck lights for their environmental benefits. Unfortunately, there are some environmentally destructive solar-powering materials. Manufacturers aren’t always forthcoming with what materials they use, and deck lights are, admittedly, small. Still, we’ll do our best to present what materials are used so you can make an informed decision about your purchase.

The best solar deck lights: Reviews & Recommendations

Choosing a single best solar deck lights set is difficult due to the many types available and the niches they each fill. Still, the Aootek Solar Lights with Lights Reflector easily takes our slot for top dog in the hierarchy. They fill their niche so well they can take on multiple jobs! But, if you need something else—including a bit of ambiance—we have a full list of great picks where you’re sure to find something that suits your needs, including deck lights that can be hung overhead, used specifically for stairs, and more.

Best overall: Aootek Solar Lights with Lights Reflector

Aootek

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a smart design and smart function, these are powerful lights!

Specs

  • Brightness: ~2,000 Lux
  • Weather-resistance: IP65
  • Materials: Plastic, monocrystalline silicon
  • Control: Automatic, remote 

Pros

  • Surprisingly bright
  • Three lighting modes to suit your preferences
  • Mirror light reflector tech
  • Environmentally friendly silicon solar panel

Cons

  • Not the best for “ambiance”

If you’re looking for something tough, bright, and reactive, then the Aootek Solar Lights are the best place to start. In a product category that typically shies away from being too “smart” (the typical smart tech sucks energy out of a system quickly), Aootek makes some great compromises to make deck lights that will do what you want when you want them to, in a convenient way.

They do this by providing three modes of usage. First, there is an energy-conserving security light mode triggered by motion, which is best used to ward others away from your deck when it isn’t in use. Next, a permanent on mode keeps the light on consistently throughout, perfect for your nighttime party. Finally, a sort of hybrid smart brightness mode brings the best of both worlds, giving a low level of light that gets brighter when motion is detected. This final lighting mode is perfect for guiding guests from your garden, or other parts of your landscape, to your deck and keeping them safe once there. In all instances, the lights are a clear and bright white, which is perfect for vision but may not necessarily create as romantic of an environment as other choices on this list. After installing the lights, they should stay well-protected as they have a durable plastic frame and achieve IP65 protection, meaning they are resistant to both dust and rain. And, speaking of materials, the solar power collection system is silicone based. Silicone panels are typically carbon-free, making these the best motion-sensing lights and somewhat better for the environment.

Best stair lights: JACKYLED Solar Step Lights

JACKYLED

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Strong and bright, the JACKYLED step lights won’t break or let you fall.

Specs

  • Brightness: 12 Lumens
  • Weather-resistance: IP65
  • Materials: Stainless steel, monocrystalline silicon
  • Control: Automatic, switch

Pros

  • Easier-than-most installation
  • Durable, rust-resistant frame
  • Bottom and side lights

Cons

  • Occasionally one will have a weak battery

The JACKYLED Solar Step Lights provide durability and flexibility for lighting up your steps. With a 3-way lighting system, the JACKYLED can be affixed to the vertical side of your steps to light up the step below and the easily-tripped-on front of the step. Don’t worry about kicking them, either, as the frame is a tough, rust-resistant stainless steel. Alternatively, line them up on the wall or rails adjacent to your steps to get a different angle (if your local lighting permits). No matter where you choose to place them, the setup should be a snap with screw-in and tape-on options available.

Best string lights: Brightown Solar String Lights

Brightown

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Brightown lights offer a romantic ambiance on speed dial.

Specs

  • Brightness: Variable settings
  • Water-resistance: IP45
  • Materials: Plastic
  • Control: Timer, remote 

Pros

  • Shatterproof bulbs even a klutz can install safely (strong dual hooks)
  • Great solar panel
  • Neat remote control
  • 20,000-hour lifespan

Cons

  • Not connectable

If you’re looking for true flexibility, the Brightown Solar String lights will give it to you. First, the setup is easy due to a patented dual-clip design, with clips and hooks adorning both the top and side of each bulb (optional ties can also be used). Even if you were to knock the bulbs about, they’re shatter-resistance. Once up, you can choose from various modes, including timers, variable brightnesses, and effects like blinking or pulsing. On a dimmer mode, they’re the perfect mood lighting and, when made brighter, can keep things light enough to see properly. On blinking mode, they light up the party like twinkle lights. Finally, everything is tied together by an above-average solar panel that can quickly charge indoors if you get an unlucky glut of cloudy days.

Best deck post lights: VOLISUN Solar Post Cap Lights

VOLISUN

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Has a stylish design, fits multiple post sizes, and can store enough energy to last through an overcast day here and there.

Specs

  • Brightness: Dual setting
  • Weather-resistance: IP44
  • Materials: Plastic, Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene
  • Control: Automatic, switch

Pros

  • Battery holds enough charge to shine for 20 hours on lower brightness setting
  • Fits both 4×4 and 6×6 post tops
  • Pop-on installation is easy

Cons

  • Doesn’t fit 5×5 post tops

VOLISUN is a pretty prolific maker of solar deck lights in every style. Their solar post cap lights stand out amongst their collection for their ease of use, style, and lasting power. Choose between a 4×4 or 6×6 setting (based on the size of your post), pop it on, and tighten a couple of screws, and your system is completely installed. But, before you move, flip the switch to ‘I’ or ‘II’ to select a power mode. The lower mood setting—‘I’ power—can last over 20 hours on a single charge, while the stronger ‘II’ setting can last over 10 hours. In other words, if you’re satisfied with the lower setting, you’ll be able to have guaranteed lights (next to) all the time, even after a day of inclement weather.

Best lanterns: TomCare Metal Solar Lantern Light

TomCare

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Hang, carry, or put on your table—the TomCare lanterns are super versatile in presentation

Specs

  • Brightness: 25 Lumens
  • Weather-resistance: IP65
  • Materials: Metal, Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS)
  • Control: Automatic, Switch

Pros

  • Easily maneuverable
  • Sturdy metal frame
  • Attractive flickering effect

Cons

  • Not as cheap as the average solar deck lights

A lot of solar lanterns fail at one of the most basic things they should do: looking and feeling like a lantern. The tops of both lanterns in the TomCare Metal Solar Lantern Light kit have a relatively innocuous solar panel, but the rest look like something out of history. The grainy, faux-aged copper, aside from the flickering flame-effect lighting inside, looks particularly decorative. Even better, this lantern offers much more versatility than other lanterns meant to sit or hang only. Place your lantern on a table as a set piece or hang it just about wherever you’d like, but try to find a regular resting spot that gets some sun during the day!

Best budget: Lightique Moroccan String Lights

Lightique

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: They’re the easiest way to get a bit of solar power on your deck.

Specs

  • Brightness: Variable modes
  • Weather-resistance: IP65
  • Materials: Copper
  • Control: Touch

Pros

  • Incredible IP rating for the price
  • Simple installation
  • 8 lighting modes

Cons

  • Short string (good if that’s all you need)

If you don’t need anything too elaborate and just want a short string of lights, try Lightique’s Moroccan String Lights. On the one hand, it’s just 10 feet of string lights. On the other hand, they provide eight lighting modes (including favorites like twinkle flash and wave), a unique look, a super simple installation, and the perfect size to install above your door. Additionally, at under $10, an IP68 rating is practically unheard of. If you have a wider door, it might be nice to have a longer string of lights, but for this price, you can’t really get any better.

What to consider before buying solar deck lights

When choosing solar deck lights for your property, you’ll naturally want to gravitate toward an aesthetic you like. Simply looking at product images can help you with this. However, things can get a bit more tricky once you’ve narrowed your selection down by taste. You’ll want to ask yourself what materials are used in producing the device and its bulbs’ caging. There are also factors, such as placement and weather resistance, that are surprisingly similar to the questions you’d be asking yourself if you were buying a potted plant for your deck.

Placement

Where should you place your solar deck lights? It’s more than feng shui, but you’ll definitely need to consider the facing of your solar panels, with a Northern exposure being especially bad if you live in the Northern Hemisphere. In fact, a lot of the placing suggestions are at least somewhat similar to what would be suggested for plants that require medium to high sunlight; avoid placing solar panels under overhangs, brush, and other locations where the light cannot reach them.

The next thing to think about is how to arrange your lighting. Are your solar deck lights multidirectional, unidirectional, or a standard bulb in open space? 3-way designs are especially useful for lighting up stairs and are best placed on the vertical part of each step. In this position, they emphasize both the landing for the foot and the height needed to take on each subsequent step. Avoid positioning bright bulbs or intense unidirectional lighting too close to head height—for adults and children—as it could be uncomfortable to the eyes.

Finally, what are the odds that something will get smacked, stepped on, or hit when the furniture is moved? If your solar deck lights aren’t made of a strong material (see below) then you might be faced with being extra careful or removing them temporarily when bringing in new deck gear.

Weather resistance

Whether or not a product can withstand a slight drizzle is usually the first thing buyers look at in an outdoor product. Unfortunately, it is a bit more complex than picking something labeled as “waterproof” due to the nature of the outdoors.

Your first thing to check should be a product’s IPXX rating, which will display as a number like IP46 or IPX8. More officially known as an item’s Ingress Protection rating, the numbers refer to a standardized 3rd party measure of a product’s officially tested protection against solids and liquids. Nowadays, the system is used for everything from earbuds to solar deck lights. While not all good weather-resistant products have an IP rating, you can feel secure in those that do.

The first digit after the P measures an object’s ability to withstand dust. For solar deck lights, this number will usually be a 4 or a 6, with 4 meaning the product withstands particles greater than a millimeter thick and 6 meaning the product does not allow dust inside. Periodically, you’ll see an ‘X’ instead of a number, which indicates that this test was not performed.

The second digit after the P measures an object’s ability to withstand water and other liquids to a lesser degree. For a solar deck light, a rating of 4 or 5 will likely do in most situations, as these signify the device is protected from spraying and splashing water from multiple directions. A rating of 7 or higher indicates the solar deck light could withstand being fully submerged in water for a period of time. Just how well are solar deck lights protected from the rain? As a fun fact, please note that there are customer reports of solar deck lights surviving Floridian hurricanes.

Finally, there are a couple of miscellaneous categories to check for. If your frame is steel, is it stainless steel or marked to be rustproof? While these issues might largely be aesthetic, having rust accumulate around screw holes won’t do you any favors down the line. For hanging and free-swinging solar deck lights, consider finding a product that offers shatterproof bulbs, as they’re both wind-resistant and accident resistant. If you live in an area with extreme temperatures, be sure also to check the upper and lower bounds for temperature that your solar deck lights can withstand.

Materials used

It’s not as in-depth of a category as the other two, but the materials used to make a solar deck light can make or break your experience with it (sometimes literally if it gets kicked but has low-quality caging).

Typically, the main materials you’ll see for the caging of solar deck lights are going to be hard plastic and some form of metal. Plastic can be a stylish black that fades into the night, a more modern iPhone-esque white, or any other color. High-quality plastic is actually quite nice and shouldn’t be ignored. Alternatively, metal casing provides extra security, especially if the light is to be put in a place where it might get stepped on. As mentioned in the previous section, looking for stainless steel or rustproof metal is advised.

Of course, this is for external caging and the parts that make up the solar panel. While we’d all like to pat ourselves on the back, the truth is that deck lights don’t use up a lot of energy in the first place. So long as you’re using modern LED bulbs, your entire home’s lighting shouldn’t even be in your home’s Top 10 energy users.

As a result, it is important to appreciate solar deck lights for their convenience and lack of wires. If you want to be environmentally conscious, focus on the materials used in the solar panel and opt for silicon (especially of the monocrystalline style) when possible. Also, look for new solar panel technologies as they come. Ultimately, though, there is a balance in all things, and solar deck lights are quite tiny in the scheme of things.

FAQs

Q: How much do solar deck lights cost?

Solar deck lights are typically not that expensive. You can get a good set for under $60 in most cases. This is because they are primarily made of bulbs and a plastic casing, neither expensive. And, just like with a solar-powered outdoor light, the technology to charge via solar power (at least for smaller objects) is always getting cheaper. In other words, the best solar deck lights are available for everyone.

Q: Is it OK to leave solar deck lights on all night?

Not only is it OK to leave solar deck lights on all night, but it is also somewhat encouraged. The best solar deck lights come with timers and other mechanisms to keep your lights on when possible and in such a way that is energy efficient. Unlike the best tiki torches, many of the best solar deck lights are made to run even when you aren’t around and even have motion-sensing modes.

Q: Will solar lights charge in overcast conditions?

Yes, solar lights charge even on cloudy days, but they charge best on clear days. Just as the fair-skinned can get a sunburn on a cloudy day, your solar panel can pick up at least some UV rays when the sun isn’t at full strength. Many of the best solar deck lights have optional secondary charging mechanisms or multi-use-day battery storage to compensate for the odd overcast day.

Final thoughts on the best solar deck lights

Solar deck lights illuminate your deck or patio using an inherent wireless design. They are, by nature, a seamless and cost-effective method to enhance both the safety and ambiance of your outdoor spaces. As of 2023, however, finding the best solar deck lights requires some research. It might take some time but rest assured, there is a perfect product out there. Anyone can discover solar deck lights that align with their needs, their family’s preferences, and the specific aesthetic of their home.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best solar deck lights in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best cordless leaf blowers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-cordless-leaf-blowers/ Thu, 18 Aug 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=462987
Home photo

The leaves are coming, so don’t fall behind—upgrade your leaf blower today!

The post The best cordless leaf blowers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Home photo

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best budget BHY 320 CFM 150 MPH Battery Leaf Blower with 4.0Ah Battery & Charge is the best overall. BHY 320 CFM 150 MPH Battery Leaf Blower with 4.0Ah Battery & Charge
SEE IT

Quick to set up, with a locking trigger-grip and multiple speeds, this leaf blower shows cost-efficient doesn’t mean lacking.

Best with trimmer WORX 20V GT Revolution 12" WG930.2 is the best cordless leaf blower with trimmer. WORX 20V GT Revolution 12" WG930.2
SEE IT

Not only a leaf blower, but also an edger and mini mower—a bargain combo tool, especially if you’re already invested in the WORX PowerShare system.

Best with vacuum BLACK+DECKER 40V Leaf Blower/Leaf Vacuum Kit is the best cordless leaf blower with vacuum. BLACK+DECKER 40V Leaf Blower/Leaf Vacuum Kit
SEE IT

With a built-in mulcher and long-lasting battery, this leaf blower with vacuum gives you options for clearing debris effectively.

It’s never more than nine months away from autumn, which means it’s never a bad time to be thinking about yard care, and lawn tools like cordless leaf blowers. As cities get more crowded and more expensive, the suburbs get more appealing, which means the competition for tools can get intense. Don’t wait till your lawn is smothered to find out that hard way that the local hardware store has been emptied. Whether you are new to leaf blowers or want an upgrade, the best cordless leaf blowers will up your “raking” game into the 21st century.

How we selected the best cordless leaf blowers

Naturally, there are countless cordless leaf blowers to choose from, but not every one of them will suit your individual needs. To make this list, I first explored critical reviews to determine what are considered the best cordless leaf blower brands. Then I investigated what people were searching for in a model. As it turns out, a lot of folks are really interested in getting leaf blowers with accessories like vacuums and trimmers or aren’t too shy about wanting a small cordless leaf blower. I took all of these expectations and impressions into account and sorted out the winners into the right categories so you can get exactly what you want.

The best cordless leaf blowers: Reviews & Recommendations

While any of the following leaf blowers will work well, and we especially love what BHY has to offer, we’ve categorized our selections with the special features and accessories that we know you need to be happy with a cordless leaf blower. For example, if having a vacuum is essential for you, go with this option from BLACK+DECKER. No matter what you’re looking for to deal with the yearly deluge of fallen foliage, take a look through our list and we bet you’ll find it.

Best overall: BHY 320 CFM 150 MPH Battery Leaf Blower with 4.0Ah Battery & Charge

BHY

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This offering from BHY is a powerful tool with lots of versatility that doesn’t make you pay for extra frills.

Specs

  • Weight: 6.2 pounds
  • Power: 320 CFM, 150 MPH
  • Length: 2-tube adjustable

Pros

  • Quick setup
  • Locking trigger-grip for hand comfort
  • Multiple speeds
  • Cost-effective

Cons

  • Loses battery quickly at top speeds

The BHY is the top cordless leaf blower because it has the top hardware available without scaring you at the checkout counter. With six speeds and two section tubes for adjustable length, the BHY is very adaptable and consumer friendly. Incredibly, it comes in at under $100.

The six speeds to choose from come in particularly handy, as you won’t often need the full 150 MPH for average leaf-blowing scenarios. In fact, I wholeheartedly recommend you turn down the speed a notch or two as the only real fault of the BHY is how charge-draining the top speeds are, killing the battery in under a half hour. While this isn’t unusual for cordless leaf blowers, it can be irritating if you’re just now going cordless. Use what you need for a majority of the yard, then finish up with short bursts of the max power to get the tough stuff left behind.

While on the topic of the battery, I do like how BHY sets out to save your battery instead of letting it get damaged in an attempt to sell you another one. How does the BHY save batteries? Automatic battery overheating protection! There’s a sensor that will shut things down if you’re running too hot. While it can feel annoying in the moment, this is a feature that has your long-term satisfaction in mind.

Finally, if you have arthritis or wrist issues, take note, because while you may notice that the BHY is a bit heavier than most items on this list, there is one big thing that makes up for that: the locking trigger mechanism in the grip. Instead of having to hold down a button, like on most trigger grips, you can lock it into the on position and go, saving yourself some tension in the joints.

Best with trimmer: WORX 20V GT Revolution 12″ WG930.2

WORX

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This kit from WORX provides two batteries that interchange with the two machines you’re looking for to get your yard cleaned up.

Specs

  • Weight: 4.9 pounds
  • Power: 360 CFM, 75 MPH
  • Batteries Included: 2

Pros

  • Batteries work with other products in the WORX PowerShare system
  • Blower uses wide handle with thumb toggle
  • Trimmer also converts into an in-line wheeled edger and mini-mower
  • “Combo” pricing

Cons

  • Unfortunately, not just one machine

This 2-in-1 offering from WORX is the combo meal of yard work accessories. You’re getting a high-quality trimmer and leaf blower along with two interchangeable batteries that suit the system. In fact, the batteries provided will work with not only the trimmer and blower provided here but also other yard work equipment within WORX’s PowerShare system. Today, let’s focus on what this package provides:

The blower half of the combo is a lightweight, two-speed unit with a comfortable grip. From the top of the handle, you can choose between the slower 240 CFM, 50 MPH setting or the faster 360 CFM, 75 MPH option with just a flick of your thumb. Getting extra bursts of power when you need it should be easy!

The trimmer half is a tool that can tackle a lot of tasks in one package. It quickly converts to an edger and a mini mower by rotating the head. Your main time with the device will likely be in standard trimmer mode—the mini mower certainly isn’t meant to replace your amazing zero-turn mower—but the other features are a nice bonus. The trimmer also features a line feed, a single button to push to feed more line into the head, and a two-handed two-handled grip for precision cutting.

There’s nothing particularly negative to say about this system. I know a select few people looking for a leaf blower with a trimmer are probably looking for both in one device. Unfortunately, that isn’t going to be the case here or with any of the other top products researched for this article. Luckily, that isn’t the case for our next product, the best cordless leaf blower and vacuum combo, which has both in one unit.

Best with vacuum: BLACK+DECKER 40V Leaf Blower/Leaf Vacuum Kit

BLACK+DECKER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The BLACK+DECKER leaf blower with leaf vacuum kit has a space-saving mulcher and plentiful battery life.

Specs

  • Weight: 5.2 pounds + bag
  • Power: 120 MPH
  • Length: 37 inches

Pros

  • Soft-grip handle
  • Built-in mulcher to reduce leaf size
  • 17.6-liter bag
  • Long-lasting battery

Cons

  • Cannot disassemble once assembled

The BLACK+DECKER brings the best of both worlds with its blower and vacuum. We’ve also reviewed the best leaf vacuums, focusing more on the vacuum. The BLACK+DECKER has a comfortable grip and the power to get big blowing jobs done.

This 40-volt cordless leaf blower has a battery life worth commenting on. In my research through customer reviews of cordless leaf blowers, battery life was a common complaint … so much so that you’ll notice a few products on our best cordless leaf blowers list come with a backup battery. The BLACK+DECKER completely reverses this script, with average users mentioning satisfaction with the battery life and one even going so far as to say that they were able to clear their courtyard twice on a single charge.

The leaf mulcher breaks down leaves on their way to the bag, reducing the area they take up in the bag by about a sixth. Don’t worry about sucking up other organic debris by accident, either, as the mulch grinder is strong enough to take on the occasional acorn.

While you can take the bag on and off easily enough, both to remove mulched debris and to convert the vacuum back to blower mode, you won’t be able to disassemble the main blower body once you’ve put it together. 

Best lightweight: Somorei YS-710

Somorei

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Somorei YS-710 packs quick bursts of intense power into a 3-pound frame.

Specs

  • Weight: 3.4 pounds
  • Power: 140 CFM, 130 MPH
  • Length: 2-tube adjustable (up to 35 inches)

Pros

  • Lightweight, full size
  • Anti-slip handle
  • Quick charging
  • Easy to transport

Cons

  • Low battery life on high power

It will be hard to find a full-length leaf blower lighter than the one offered by Somorei, which comes in at 3.4 pounds. Surprisingly, it is still able to muster up speeds up to 130 MPH and has a comfortable anti-slip handle. This isn’t just a cheap hollow plastic leaf blower with a random fan stuck inside.

The ideal usage for the Somorei is to clear off your deck, patio, or sidewalk using the lower speed setting, where power lasts for about 50 minutes. Then, you can finish up with a quick burst of power using the 130 MPH high speed. Unfortunately, for this mode, power only lasts about 10 minutes, but you probably won’t need it for very long. In the worst case, a full charge only takes around an hour. Even 20 to 30 minutes should be enough for a partial charge to finish the job. Take a quick rest and get back at it!

Since the Somorei cordless leaf blower is easy to disassemble and is also very light, you pop it in a work bag or backpack to take it to relevant work sites with ease, making it a perfect complement for field workers or people that travel to many job sites. Overall, the Somorei is an incredibly handy lightweight leaf blower, cordless and maneuverable.

Best small: Abeden Cordless Leaf Blower

Abeden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This small cordless leaf blower from Abeden is great for cleaning out small places.

Specs

  • Weight: 3.15 pounds
  • Power: ~100 CFM
  • Size: 22 inches x 5.9 inches x 7.5 inches

Pros

  • Press-response speed control
  • Mini vacuum
  • 18,000 max RPM fan

Cons

  • 2.5-hour full-charge time
  • Small vacuum bag

For the times when you need to get into nooks and crannies and really blast them clean, the Abeden Cordless Leaf Blower has your back. At only 22-inches long, with a thin-tip nozzle, you’ll be able to pop the Abeden underneath that difficult hedge or in that hard-to-reach space behind the fence. An optional vacuum mode will make the Abeden great for getting between car seats and underneath couches as well.

One thing that is particularly cool about Abeden’s system is how easy it is to adjust between the two-speed offerings. Just pull the trigger harder for more power! It will almost feel automatic as you go around on low speed to pull the trigger a bit more tightly to go full blast. You should find the system very intuitive and in rhythm with what your brain is wanting from you.

The main frustrations with this cordless leaf blower are the small vacuum bag and long charge times. As a product going for the best small cordless leaf blower with vacuum, it really shouldn’t come as a surprise that the Abeden Cordless Leaf Blower’s vacuum bag is on the small side. What might shock you a tad is that it takes around two-and-a-half hours to get a full charge on the thing. So much for small body, quick charge.

the unusually long full-charge time: 3 hours.

Things to consider before buying cordless leaf blowers

When you want a cordless leaf blower, it can feel like the only thing that matters is that you avoid getting an annoying, dangling cord. The reality is that there are a lot of things going on in the world of cordless leaf blowers these days. They aren’t just refined to one or two items on a list of the overall top leaf blowers anymore. With all that variety, here’s what you should consider more before making a cordless leaf blower purchase on your own:

Weight & grip

Having a good hold on the cordless leaf blower will help you properly aim it, maintain good wrist health, and fight fatigue. The average leaf blower will weigh less than 7 pounds, but even that can be enough to damage sensitive wrists. The best lightweight leaf blowers are under 4 pounds.

You’ll also want a steady, comfortable grip. While hard, hollow plastic grips reduce price, consider nicer materials such as rubber or PVC around a sturdy metal interior to improve the overall quality of your time with your leaf blower. The best cordless leaf blowers will also consider that the line between the end of fall and the start of winter is usually a bit blurry—having enough room to grip the leaf blower’s handle while using mittens is very desirable.

Power

A leaf blower’s power is usually measured in CFM and MPH. CFM, or cubic feet per minute, measures air volume used while MPH, or miles per hour, measures airspeed.

Since we’re dealing with completely invisible air, it can be quite tricky to properly visualize what is going on when we read these numbers. Instead, try imagining a hose filling up a pool. You’ll probably want to know how much water is coming out of the hose so you can see how long the job will take. That’s what CFM gives you for a leaf blower—how much air is coming out of the hose. You also might find it interesting to see how fast the water is moving when it comes out of the hose, in which case you’ll probably use MPH.

Our cordless leaf blower will work just like the hose. If you have a high volume (CFM) of air coming through the leaf blower, you will be able to get more work done quickly. With a high speed (MPH), you’ll be able to move heavier stuff. High CFMs get jobs done fast and high MPHs get heavier jobs done.

Length

Finally, don’t discount the importance of the length of your leaf blower. You’ll want one that suits your height and needs. For the ground, people of average height will want something over three or four feet long, so you can comfortably stand and not have to tilt the handle too aggressively. Raised beds, car tops, and other places can use shorter lengths.

Some leaf blowers, such as our choice for best cordless leaf blower, have multiple section tubes which can be removed or added so you can have more flexibility. The two-tube adjustable leaf blower is the best of both worlds.

FAQs

Q: How much does a cordless leaf blower cost?

A cordless leaf blower can cost anywhere from under $60 to over $120. Typically, cordless leaf blowers around $120 bring something else to the table, such as a trimmer or vacuum, or have immense power. On the other hand, the best under $100 are typically more standard models with high-quality components.

Q: What are the benefits of a cordless leaf blower vs. a corded model?

The benefits of a cordless leaf blower vs. a corded model are the advantages of maneuverability, distance from the home, and overall freedom. With corded leaf blowers, it is really difficult to reach the edges of your property or to use them in remote locations without multiple extension cords or even a generator. On the other hand, cordless leaf blowers can be taken with you to any site without worrying about outlet locations beforehand.

Q: How long do cordless leaf blowers last?

Cordless leaf blowers last different amounts of time based on the power setting you use. Cordless leaf blowers on the fastest setting typically die within 20 minutes but can last well over an hour on lower settings if you have the right model. Customer reviews of cordless leaf blowers will give you a good idea of how much work a model can do on a single charge. One customer reported being able to use the BLACK+DECKER 40V twice in a single charge to clear their courtyard. As in all other things, your mileage may vary.

Final thoughts on the best cordless leaf blowers

Getting a high-quality cordless leaf blower is getting easier and easier every year, especially with cordless electric leaf blowers getting such a boost in popularity recently. Every leaf blower on the list above will work for its given circumstances, and you will be able to find an attachment or accessory you want as well. Have a happy, prepared fall!

The post The best cordless leaf blowers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best air quality monitors in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-air-quality-monitors/ Thu, 28 Jul 2022 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=458568
Best air quality monitors sliced header
Stan Horaczek

What contaminants are lurking in your air? Knowing what to expect, at least, can be a breath of fresh air.

The post The best air quality monitors in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best air quality monitors sliced header
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall Temtop M2000 2nd Generation is the best air quality monitor overall. Temtop M2000 2nd
SEE IT

The ability to test many things in one device, with consistent results and audible alerts, makes this monitor our top pick.

Best Smart Atmotube Pro Portable is the best smart air quality monitor. Atmotube Pro Portable
SEE IT

Impressive accuracy, and handy app alerts, help this keychain-sized monitor work well across a wide variety of temperatures and humidity.

Best Indoor Outdoor Davis Instruments AirLink is the best indoor outdoor air quality monitor. Davis Instruments AirLink
SEE IT

This multienvironment-friendly unit offers easy-to-read graphs and charts, Weatherlink.com integration, and compatibility with Davis weather stations.

Nothing beats a breath of fresh air, but air can be contaminated by chemicals, soot, wildfire smoke, and other forest fire byproducts, making an air quality monitor a valuable tool. Even those with the best noses can have difficulty telling how good their local air is, especially with odorless gasses and “Volatile Organic Compounds” (VOCs) from products or processes lurking, so what are you to do? You could call in an air quality professional … or you can begin to do your own tracking with one of our picks for best air quality monitors.

How we selected the best air quality monitors

Largely, selecting the best air quality monitors was more a matter of hitting the research shelves than the shopping cart button. With such a product, the customer sentiment and manufacturer-supplied specs really mean a lot less than in-depth product analysis from researchers and experts that were able to compare consumer-facing products with laboratory-grade equipment. This results in a thin product selection, but I was able to identify five air quality monitors that I can confidently recommend.

The best air quality monitors: Reviews & Recommendations

What is the best air quality monitor? The best air quality monitors have been tested from official sources and come in various shapes, styles, and working methods. While the Temtop M2000 2nd Generation is the top pick for air quality monitor, due to its ease of use and robust testing ability, our four other monitors might be right for you depending on your circumstances. In any event, these five air quality monitors have both proper testing and current availability in the market.

Best overall: Temtop M2000 2nd Generation

Temtop

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Temtop M2000 2nd Generation tests for a wide variety of pollutants, has built-in calibration, and includes an audible alarm.

Specs

  • Measures: CO2, HCHO (formaldehyde), PM2.5/PM10, Temp., Humidity
  • AQ-SPEC report: High consistency
  • Type: Handheld 

Pros

  • Tests many things all in one device
  • High consistency across many devices
  • Has an audible alarm for when levels rise too high
  • Tried and tested by several school systems

Cons

  • Doesn’t work in temperatures below freezing

The Temtop M2000 2nd Generation is a relatively easily operated handheld air quality monitor that has been widely used. It has been used by the New York State Education Department, and the United Federation of Teachers has used it to measure carbon dioxide levels in schools in efforts to fight Covid-19.

The 2nd Generation product improves upon the original Temtop M2000 by adding a data export feature. This is really useful because, as mentioned by the AQ-SPEC report, where the Temtop M2000 2nd Generation suffers losses in accuracy, it makes up for it with high levels of consistency. Even across multiple Temtops, the reading levels should be consistently similar in the same situation. This means that you can pinpoint exactly when contaminant levels have started rising, even if you have to have a replacement device.

I’m also particularly pleased that it attempts a calibration system. While the accuracy, consistency, and difficulty for average users feel a bit daunting, the system’s overall capabilities are more than enough to begin with. Part of the calibration process being that you leave the device outside for lengthy periods is also annoying but manageable.

In reality, the main concern is the device’s limited capabilities during the colder months. Without being able to function below 32 degrees Fahrenheit, the supposed “indoor-outdoor” nature of the device is cut off for many months of the year for those of us too far North or South of the equator. Luckily, in-home monitoring will still work year-round.

Finally, if you like the look of the M2000 2nd Generation, but are looking for something quite a bit cheaper, our budget choice also comes from Temtop. The Temtop P20 has reduced features but also a reduced price tag.

Best smart: Atmotube Pro Portable 

Atmotube

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Atmotube Pro attaches directly to your backpack or belt clip and alerts your phone directly when there’s a problem.

Specs

  • Measures: PM1/PM2.5/PM10, VOCs, Temp., Humidity, Barometric Pressure
  • AQ-SPEC report: High accuracy, high precision
  • Type: Wearable

Pros

  • Impressive accuracy counts
  • Handy app alerts
  • Works well across a wide variety of temperatures and humidities
  • Keychain size

Cons

  • Shorter battery life than hoped for

The Atmotube Pro Portable is a keychain-size air quality monitor that won’t take up much space and can be put just about anywhere or come with you. All of the data collected will be at your fingertips via the Atmo app, available free for Android and iOS devices.

The app will give you your personal stats, access to personal and global maps, and a personalized series of articles to help you understand air quality. You can also export your device’s data as a CSV file for further analysis.

According to the Atmotube’s AQ-SPEC results, the device is quite accurate, ranging from 86% to 98% across various conditions. The AQ-SPEC report also notes that the device is highly consistent across various environmental conditions, saying that heat and humidity had “minimal effect” on the device’s precision. Despite its small size, the Atmotube Pro delivers at a high level.

One of the bigger disappointments with the Atmotube Pro is the battery life. As expected of such a small device, the battery is also quite tiny. When the device is set to take measurements only once every 30 minutes, you can squeeze about a week out of the little battery. However, when you crank that up just a notch, the battery dies much more quickly. This is very unfortunate when using a device that, by its very nature, you want to set up and forget about. Fortunately, if the device isn’t meant to be mobile, you can keep it plugged into the charger while it is running.

Davis Instruments

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The AirLink is made for both indoor and outdoor usage, provides beautiful charts, and works well with other Davis Instruments systems.

Specs

  • Measures: AQI, Temp., Humidity, Dew Point, Heat Index
  • AQ-SPEC report: Highly accurate for PM1.0/PM2.5, but not for PM10, consistent
  • Type: Indoor or outdoor

Pros

  • Weatherlink.com integration
  • Easy-to-read graphs and charts
  • Installs easily both indoors and out
  • Integrates into your Davis weather station

Cons

  • Poor PM10 reading

The Davis Instruments AirLink comes with a heavy-duty body that can be conveniently placed in indoor or outdoor environments. If you want it in your house, place the machine on a desk or table. It has four safety feet to reduce the chances of it sliding off smooth surfaces. Alternatively, mount it outside (near an outlet) and attach the provided weather-resistant cover.

If you’re into more than just air quality monitoring, you’ll really appreciate the extra things the AirLink tracks, such as dew point and heat index. You’ll also be happy to note that it will connect with weatherlink.com and can integrate with your other Davis weather station products. These services are also available on your phone via the WeatherLink app.

I really appreciate that the output looks professional but still feels closer to what you might expect from a cable weather station than what your average lab coat wearer would be reading. The only thing I was disappointed with is that, as per the AirLink’s AQ-SPEC report, the PM10 readings weren’t too accurate. Really, though, this is just a small trade-off for a good home system and typical consumers will be more than happy with this machine.

Best portable: Sensirion SPS30

SENSIRION

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Sensirion SPS30 is a no-frills machine dedicated to particulate matter testing.

Specs

  • Measures: PM1.0/PM2.5/PM4.0/PM10
  • AQ-SPEC report: High precision
  • Type: Portable

Pros

  • Small size
  • 8-year lifetime
  • Long-term stability and contamination-resistance
  • Moddable

Cons

  • Drab UI makes interpreting data difficult

If you want to feel like you’re really in the lab, the Sensirion SPS30 might be right up your alley. Right from the moment I opened the company’s product introduction video, I felt instantly reintroduced to the lab environment I once came from.

Where this really shines is the Sensirion SPS30’s great moddability. For example, some users are soldering them on bikes for CanAirIO, a citizen science project dedicated to building a citizen network for monitoring air quality worldwide. The simple USB port connection and loads of data quickly generated by the device lend it to lots of projects. Other possibilities include pairing it with air conditioners, smart home devices, HVAC equipment, and more.

Where this “lab environment feel” really doesn’t shine is the UI. If you’ve ever worked with in-company software or any niche data-collection devices, you probably already know what I mean. You sure get a lot of data, but it isn’t going to look beautiful or come easy to read. Check out the company’s demonstration video for an up-close look at the graphs provided by the machine before deciding whether to purchase.

As for the Sensirion SPS30’s AQ-SPEC report, the key thing to know is that the device is highly precise across temperatures and humidity levels. While PM1.0 and PM2.5 levels were highly accurately measured in field and laboratory testing, PM10 levels were shown to be highly inaccurate in the field trials.

Best budget: Temtop P20

Temtop

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This budget solution will take care of all of your basic air quality monitoring needs.

Specs

  • Measures: PM2.5, Temp., Humidity
  • AQ-SPEC report: Higher precision at low temperatures
  • Type: Desktop or mountable

Pros

  • Highly accessible interface
  • Everything needed for wall mounting included
  • Can double as a nice desk or wall clock
  • Exportable data

Cons

  • Limited pollutants measured, but still great for price
  • Low battery life

Considering that a laboratory-grade air quality tester can cost thousands of dollars, it would seem impossible to make a competitive one in the two-digit range. However, with Temtop’s P20, that isn’t true.

The Temtop P20 can measure PM2.5 pollutants. While it’d be nice to measure other pollutants or even other sizes of particulate matter, doing one thing well is quite impressive for the budget tier. The P20’s AQ-SPEC report tells us that the machine’s precision is most accurate when the local temperature is lower. That being said, the measurements indicate an accuracy of over 90% for most conditions at 68 degrees Fahrenheit.

You’ll probably enjoy having the Temtop P20 around, as it is also a rather nice LCD screen clock. To take a bit of the mystery out of the reading counts, a cute smiley face interprets the PM2.5 levels as good, fair, or poor. Another smiley face interprets your local humidity levels in a similar manner.

While the device can be mounted on the wall and includes the screws needed to do so, I recommend using the back stand and using it as a desk monitor. On the wall, the numbers, time, and smiley faces will probably prove somewhat tricky to see clearly. This will also help you keep it plugged into a charger because the battery only lasts for about 6-8 hours on a single charge.

Finally, those of you interested in data will rejoice. Much like the Temtop M2000 2nd Generation, our top choice of air quality monitor, the Temtop P20 has USB connectivity to export the collected data in CSV format. 

Things to consider before buying the best air quality monitors

One thing to note from the current research is that air quality monitors for public usage are still an emerging market. As such, there are a lot of claims about accuracy that are either demonstrably false or haven’t been thoroughly checked by scientists or any actual regulatory board. With all of this in mind, here are the key things to remember when buying an air quality monitor:

Target pollutant

In a fantasy world, an air quality monitor could sniff out any potential harm in the air and let you know. Unfortunately, air quality monitors in the real world must be designed to target specific contaminants. While it is never a mystery what pollutants an air quality monitor tracks—as they are nearly always prominently displayed in the specs and ads—you may find yourself overwhelmed with a few new terms. Here’s a quick mini-guide to get you up to speed on air pollution vocab:

PM: PM stands for “particulate matter” and measurements of it can tell you how many liquid or solid particles of varying sizes are in your air. The particles are measured in microns, given after the “PM.” For example, PM2.5 tests for the amount of particles that are approximately 2.5 microns in your air. The makers of the Atmotube report that PM1 particles are typically emissions from factories and vehicles, PM2.5 particles usually come from fires and combustion, and PM10 particles are from pollen, mold, and fine bits of old plants and insects. You’ll find that PM2.5 is a common measurement taken by portable air purifiers.

AQI: This stands for Air Quality Index and is a popular, but somewhat outdated, method for measuring air quality. Essentially, the AQI measures pollutant levels for a wide variety of substances, gives them each a score from 0-500, and reports the highest one. It doesn’t matter if only one pollutant is high or if several are, only the top one is getting reported. Still, the data is historically known and the conversions for each pollutant can still be useful. If you want to play around with the system, a handy AQI calculator is available for you.

VOCs: These are “Volatile Organic Compounds” and largely come from human sources. The EPA warns that sources of these contaminants include household cleaners, building materials, and standard office equipment. They also have found that these pollutants are consistently found in much higher concentrations in indoor settings. VOCs are a big part of why our recommended floor cleaners focused so heavily on ingredients. Certain high-end air purifiers, such as the Dyson Purifier Humidify+Cool Formaldehyde, are specifically equipped with sensors attuned to these byproducts we bring into our homes as we upgrade furnishings and electronics, etc.

Scientific usage

Before making any purchase of something as important as an air quality monitor, be sure to check out how the product is perceived by experts. That can be as simple as running a Google search with “site:.edu” or “site:.gov” followed by the product name or trawling through the depths of the “Air Quality Sensor Performance Evaluation Center” (AQ-SPEC) website.

AQ-SPEC provides comprehensive data on air sensors after real-world field trials. While AQ-SPEC reports explicitly state that they are not an endorsement of a particular monitor, the evaluations are free for the manufacturer if the sensors are “low-cost” and meet basic selection criteria. As a result, simply bothering to submit a sensor for an AQ-SPEC report is a sign of a manufacturer’s good faith in their product.

All of the air quality monitors on our list have a detailed AQ-SPEC report. Unfortunately, these reports can be a bit dense and read more like a Ph.D. journal submission than a consumer-facing report. I’ve attempted to condense these reports down into the relevant bits, but if you’ve got any interest, you’re highly encouraged to parse through them yourself as well.

Accuracy & consistency

Accuracy and consistency feel very similar at a glance but affect our perceptions of an air quality monitor in big ways. As you might be able to gather from a recent analysis by the Berkeley Lab, accuracy is going to be difficult to maintain. However, high consistency will make these machines still quite valuable sources of information for your home.

Part of this comes down to calibration, which laboratory equipment undergoes frequently. Take the humble pH machine, for example. Back in my lab days, I remember calibrating this machine nearly every day I would use it, using specialized liquid solutions. Now imagine calibrating something that measures air … at home. It appears that cheap calibration is on the way, but that doesn’t necessarily mean it will be easy or reliably done by the average person.

The result is that we have to expect some loss of accuracy when high-quality calibration isn’t feasible. Depending on what is being measured, this might not necessarily be too much of a problem. For example, your home thermometer is likely about 1 degree off, but it is still enough to tell you that you have a fever. The key is getting something accurate enough for your purposes.

Perhaps more important is consistency. While several consumer-grade air quality monitors have a bias, especially after being run for multiple days, if that bias is consistent, we can still get extremely useful information. For example, if your reading for Carbon Dioxide suddenly skyrockets above what you are used to getting, you know you have a problem.

FAQs

Q: How much do air quality monitors cost?

Air quality monitors can cost anywhere from around $80 to a few hundred dollars. Depending on their specifications, laboratory-grade air quality monitors can cost over $2,000 and quickly get into the several-thousand-dollar range. Routine maintenance and calibration can also become regular expenses for these high-level machines. Fortunately, our selection of the best air quality monitors has been tested against these professional machines and fares relatively well.

Q: Can an air quality monitor detect mold?

An air quality monitor can be a mold detector but won’t be able to tell you that you have mold. Molds are typically detected by PM10 sensors, as are other particulate matters, like pollen. So, an air quality monitor that can test for PM10 particles will be able to detect mold particles in your air but not tell you that those particles are mold.

Q: What is the best way to monitor air quality in industrial dusty rooms?

The best way to monitor air quality in dusty industrial rooms is to get your dust problem under control quickly. When you can see you have a problem with air quality, you are less in need of an air quality monitor and more in need of an air purifier.

Final thoughts on the best air quality monitors

Getting a high-quality air quality monitor doesn’t have to be for laboratory professionals alone. While the world of personal air quality monitoring is still emerging, there are still some great products out there. Combining the most stringent testing circumstances with ready commercial availability produced a list of exactly these five air quality monitors, so we’re sure customers will find satisfaction from something on this list.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best air quality monitors in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best dash cams under $100 in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-dash-cams-under-100/ Wed, 14 Sep 2022 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=469338
Best dash cams under $100 sliced header
Tony Ware

We help you track who is aggressively braking in front of your car—without breaking your budget.

The post The best dash cams under $100 in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best dash cams under $100 sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall HP F650 HP F660
SEE IT

Loop recording, a wide angle lens, and G-Shock sensor are just some of the features of this easily installed option.

Best 2-Channel Ssontong Dash Cam is the best 2-channel dash cam under $100. Ssontong Dash Cam
SEE IT

Including a backup cam with guidelines and a sensitive G-Sensor, this bundle (also available with four channels) offers a full value.

Best Parking Mode Vantrue N1 Pro is the best parking mode dash cam under $100. Vantrue N1 Pro
SEE IT

Superior night vision, quality collision and motion detection, plus battery protection help make sure your car is monitored even in the dark.

For years, dash cams for cars have been a great way to catch hit-and-run automobile accidents, staged pedestrian accident scams, and even Russian meteor showers. For a long time, having this ability to monitor what really happens on the exterior of your car, and being able to carefully review the data after the fact, has seemed like a luxury. It was something you might have appreciated but didn’t necessarily seem like something that’d be worth the extra buck to put in your car. But now, the year is 2022 and the best dash cams under $100 that we’ve collected are actually solid, working units ready to help you out in a pinch. 

How we selected the best dash cams under $100

Selecting budget products can always be a bit tricky due to manufacturer shortcuts, inferior hardware, and the possibility of outright fraud. Fortunately, for dash cams, there are still high-quality products in the budget range. To find the best of the best, we scoured dash cam reviews from critics and real-world users, combining these with peer suggestions to select dash cams that boasted good specs but also provided intensive value for the cost. Highlighting cams across the full price spectrum—from the REXING V1 at just under $100 before tax to the Angel Case Dash Cam sitting at under $40—was also made a priority. In the end, we were able to compile a list of dash cams that you will be able to select something from.

The best dash cams under $100: Reviews & Recommendations

The following dash cams provide quality in a variety of different situations for people of all budgets. While none are particularly specialized, it is quite incredible that we were able to find one that can handle many channels well, another one that handles parking mode and night vision well, and yet another one that can handle fairly extreme temperatures, all on one budget list. As a result, it is our firm belief that you’ll be able to find something worthy of both your dash and your wallet from the following selections.

Best overall: HP F650

Why it made the cut: This is a quick installation product that will get you started and dash cam ready within minutes.

Specs

  • Storage: 32GB MicroSD
  • Viewing angle: 150 degrees
  • Resolution: 1080P front

Pros

  • Warning system
  • Low effort installation
  • Loop recording with event highlights
  • Locks video clips when an accident occurs

Cons

  • No rear-facing camera

The F650 is a dash cam from your favorite laptop and printer maker, HP. It has a lot of features built-in that you will certainly want, but probably weren’t necessarily expecting to come together in one budget model. The F650 has simple, stick-on installation, and smart loop recording that locks files around the time of collisions. The dash cam’s 150 degree field of view means it’ll capture view of four lanes of traffic.

If you get into an accident, the F650’s G-Shock sensor will trigger, which will lock any video it records to prevent it from being overwritten. This is handy if you need to present evidence to the police several days after the incident occurs. This dash cam records video onto a MicroSD card, and while HP doesn’t include one in the box, you can get a 32GB card for well under $10.

It goes without saying that the HP F650 tops our list due to its insane value for the cost and its feature-packed nature. Like a lot of HP products, the F650 isn’t the best possible model out there but is instead an affordable product that tries its best to provide value to average customers. We wish it had a rear-facing camera to record video of what’s happening in your vehicle, but that isn’t a dealbreaker considering its sub $50 price.

Best 2-channel: Ssontong Dash Cam

Ssontong

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Ssontong Dash Cam comes with a fully featured backup cam, all for under $50.

Specs

  • Storage: 32GB SD
  • Angle of view: 170 degrees front / 140 degrees rear
  • Resolution: 1080P front / 720P rear

Pros

  • Includes backup cam with guidelines
  • Sensitive G-Sensor
  • Full value for price
  • Bundles available for four channels

Cons

  • Low angle of view rear cam

While the HP F660G has a second cam, the Ssontong’s second channel cam acts as a full backup camera with guidelines and everything. While the rear cam isn’t quite up to the standards of a backup cam proper (it has a low 140-degree angle of view), you are also getting it as part of a complete system for under $100. Note, too, that the Ssontong can become a four-channel system and has bundle deals available if you wish to expand the system to be larger.

The Ssontong comes alive when you aren’t driving quickly via the G-Sensor, which rapidly detects vibrations. Even small wiggles, such as from a shut trunk or when you go back into your car to retrieve the bag you left in the back, will trigger it into full recording mode.

Overall, the Ssontong takes the throne for low-budget multi-channel dash cams. Even if you upgrade to include more channels, which might take you over $100, you’re still getting discounts and good deals at every corner. Ultimately, the Ssontong is a solid choice worthy of its dollar value.

Best parking mode: Vantrue N1 Pro

Vantrue

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Vantrue N1 Pro works wonders at night, making its 24-hour parking mode worth every dollar.

Specs

  • Storage: Up to 256GB MicroSD (not included)
  • Angle of view: 160 degrees
  • Resolution: 1080P 

Pros

  • Superior night vision
  • Quality collision AND motion detection
  • Battery protection

Cons

  • Front cam only

The Vantrue N1 is a seemingly standard forward-facing dash cam but—much like vampires, werewolves, and teenagers—doesn’t begin to show its real power until night falls. Again, it’s not bad during the day with the standard 1080P resolution, relatively good 160-degree angle of view, and high storage capacity. You can even get GPS functionality for around $20 more if you buy the N1 Pro add-on, which will put the total purchase right around the $100 mark. However, what you really want to see is how it functions at night.

When engaged in parking mode, you have a couple of modes to explore. First, there is collision-detection mode, which requires no extra steps to use. When your car is hit during parking mode, your Vantrue N1 camera will come alive and take a quick 20-second video for you to review later. The other option is a slightly more complex motion-detection mode, which requires a bit of wiring so the cam has access to your car’s battery. Your battery is protected from draining completely even while this mode is engaged due to battery protection mechanisms.

All of these great parking features go hand-in-hand with the “SONY Sensor.” This night vision brand is well-received by customers and actually works pretty well in a variety of environments. Combined with the recording modes above, you’re likely to have a good parking-mode experience with Vantrue. If it only had an included rear cam, it’d be just about perfect.

Best heat handling: REXING V1

REXING

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you’ve ever worried about heat (or cold) affecting a dash cam, you can relax with the REXING V1.

Specs

  • Storage: Up to 256GB MicroSD (not included)
  • Temperature range: -20 degrees to 176 degrees Fahrenheit
  • Angle of view: 170 degrees

Pros

  • Best temperature range
  • Sharp, clear image
  • Phone support

Cons

  • Tax could take it over $100
  • Front cam only

As heat does affect cams to some degree, you’ll want some tough heat resistance if you are expecting to blast through yet another summer heat wave and possibly leave the cam in your car. With a 176 degree Fahrenheit max, way above the 117 degrees your car can become after an hour in 95-degree heat, the REXING V1 is a cam you can feel truly secure leaving in any conditions.

Furthermore, the REXING V1 can even function down at an extreme: -20 degrees Fahrenheit. Compare that to the Vantrue N1 Pro’s already ambitious -4 to 158 degrees Fahrenheit range and you’ll see that you’re gaining 28 degrees of flexibility with the REXING V1.

All of this comes with a high-quality cam that produces sharp, clear imagery. In addition to the typical loop recording, the REXING V1 is also capable of connecting with your phone and you can offload clips that way as well. If only it came with a rear camera that was just as capable, it’d be perfect.

The only other downside I can really see for this one is that it is on the higher side of product costs. If you encounter any sales tax, you’ll probably slide over $100. It’s a technicality, but worth mentioning!

Best budget: Angel Case Dash Cam

Zhrmghg

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Angel Case may not be easily pronounceable, but it is an ultra-low budget, legitimate dash cam with outstandingly good customer reviews.

Specs

  • Storage: Up to 32GB MicroSD (not included)
  • Angle of view: 170 degrees
  • Resolution: 1080P 

Pros

  • Quick installation
  • Fully featured
  • Incredible customer satisfaction

Cons

  • Cheap suction mount
  • Front cam only

For your super-budget needs, the ultra-affordable Angel Case is here for you. This cam is under $35 dollars and comes fully featured, making it our cheapest dash cam pick. It has the loop recording (with locks for special events), the parking modes and G-Sensors, and even the night vision you expect from higher models. Its installation is remarkably quick, too, though it does use an admittedly cheap suction-cup mechanism.

It’s worth noting that Angel Case has something special, in that it is one of the best-rated dash cams on Amazon. Not just in the best budget dash cams but in all of them, though the outrageously low price certainly is a contributing factor. Customers just love it and that certainly makes it something worth checking out.

Still, there are things to be desired coming from the Zhrmghg. In addition to somewhat more secure mounting, it’d be nice to see a rear cam, too. However, it is hard to expect too many extras when you’re getting sub-$50 quality. The Zhrmghg will serve you well and get you far beyond that bare minimum of peace of mind that you’re after.

Things to consider before buying dash cams under $100

Overall, selecting a dash cam under $100 isn’t too far off from buying other dash cams for your car. However, when looking at low-price products, different trends and problems will emerge. So, while things like resolution and screen type are still important, you may run into more important problems or have different concerns altogether as a budget customer. Here’s what we suggest you look at, specifically, when searching for the best dash cams under $100:

Recording time

How much time can a dash cam under $100 record for? It’s actually a pretty complex question, that won’t have the simple numeral answer you’re hoping for. At the most basic, you have to worry about power supply, but also the dash cam’s storage capacity. When you’re working within price limitations, there is a chance that either one of these factors will become the limiting one.

Manufacturers are, of course, aware of the difficulties of giving you something functional while keeping within tight production budgets. While not all companies will be dedicated enough to give you something functional, there are some pretty intelligent design features that make dash cams under $100 workable. Here are just a few of them I’ve seen quite a bit of:

Shake-on recording: You might be aware of systems that make a note of when activity is detected so you can come back and review the relevant footage later. Unfortunately, that mechanism won’t save battery and storage space. Instead, dash cams with shake-on recording come “alive” when the car is shook or jostled, recording what happens in these key moments.

This tech comes by many names, such as “collision detection” or “G-sensor,” but all of them work similarly. While the feature is fairly ubiquitous, more advanced units have settings that will let you determine the threshold for turning on. For example, if you park in a parking tower that vibrates a bit as cars drive by, you might not want just any bump setting off your dash cam. 

Loop recording: First-In-First-Out, or “FIFO,” is one of the first rules of the kitchen. It also appears as “loop recording” for dash cams and can make for a really good file storage system when you’re working on a budget. Instead of stopping future recordings when the system becomes full, dash cams with this style of recording start deleting your oldest files automatically to make room for new stuff.

This system has the advantage of making sure the latest information is taken into account but you do run the risk of losing something important if you don’t regularly backup your data. Many dash cams with shake-on recording will designate files taken around the time of a shaking incident as important and ‘lock’ them for later viewing.

All of the dash cams on our list use loop recording and it isn’t hard to figure out why—the system is a fantastic complement to the way dash cams operate. Still, if you’re planning on searching for your own budget dash cam, this is a keyword to look out for.

SD storage: Dash cams, and especially those under $100, typically store footage to an SD or MicroSD storage card. In many cases, a card will be provided with the purchase, but double-check to be sure.

This supplied card probably won’t have as much storage space as the ones we’ve detailed in our best MicroSD and SD card articles, considering the cost restrictions. If you are concerned about the storage space of the card given, be sure to check those articles out. Also, pay careful attention to which type of memory card your purchased dash cam uses, as MicroSD and SD are not the same!

Lastly, some of the dash cams on the list actually have a storage maximum. In other words, they aren’t designed to work with cards above a certain value. So, getting the best MicroSD or SD card isn’t necessarily going to be the best decision for your dash cam experience.

Viewing angle

Viewing angle becomes very important when you’re trying to get as much information as possible. Having too narrow of a view angle, and subsequently completely missing out on an accident that you should have been able to capture, completely misses the point of having a dash cam in the first place. On the other hand, if your viewing angle is too wide you could encounter other problems, such as barrel distortion, which causes straight lines to appear awkwardly bent. A viewing angle between 150 degrees and 170 degrees will be best in most cases.

Night-vision quality

If you’re wanting to know what goes bump in the night, or at least what bumps into your car at night, then you’ll need some degree of night vision. There is a lot of technical jargon, mixed with some company labeling, so expect to see a lot of different claims out there. Examples include technical explanation, such as using f/2.8 aperture lenses, or more vague gestures that reference the brand name’s “special” night-vision formula.

Luckily, you don’t really need to look at numbers or technical stats to understand night-vision quality—you need to look at pictures or at least get a sense of what you’ll be able to see. In reality, when it comes to night vision quality, your best friend is going to be user reviews, image stills, and word of mouth.

FAQs

Q: How much does a dash cam under $100 cost?

A dash cam under $100 will cost you around $30 at the very lowest. On the high end, you might, somewhat paradoxically, expect to go to around $120 if you decide to buy all of the add-ons, attachments, or extras. All of the dash cams presented in this article are under $100 and will stand as relatively decent quality dash cams even without possible extras. Depending on your local laws, some sales taxes may apply and push the price over $100 as well. In any event, there are decent, fully working dash cams available at the $50 price point.

Q: How much should I spend on a dash cam?

You should spend what you can afford on a dash cam. In most cases, a dash cam is a nice extra to avoid any additional “he said, she said” in the event of a car accident. If you’re concerned about this, something is better than nothing and you don’t really have to have top-of-the-line equipment to get an okay picture. For average people looking for peace of mind, or people like Uber drivers that spend a lot of time on the road but don’t want to spend too much money, any of our best dash cams under $100 should reduce your nerves and give you that extra bit of security you’re after.

Q: Do I need a rear-facing dash cam?

You don’t absolutely need a rear-facing dash cam, or any dash cam for that matter. However, if you want to catch detailed footage of any accidents you will need them. Since getting rear-ended by drivers not paying attention is possible, a rear-facing dash cam is quite beneficial. However, some people are not as interested in them as front-facing dash cams due to license plates always being in the. Note that some states, such as Maryland, require front and rear license plates and therefore get the most out of rear-facing dash cams.

Final thoughts on the best dash cams under $100

By now you should have a good idea of what dash cam you want for your car, depending on your needs. Additionally, you’ll have a firm idea of what the best dash cams under $100 have to offer in case you decide to do some further digging. In any event, while your package is on its way, be sure to check out the easiest way to install a dash cam so you’re 100% ready when it arrives!

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best dash cams under $100 in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>